Home

SQL*Plus User's Guide and Reference

1. If you do not specify a filename and the buffer is empty EDIT returns an error message In SQL Plus 9 0 and earlier versions on Windows the command EDIT opened a blank file after giving an invalid filename warning In SQL Plus 10 and later versions on Windows EDIT gives an invalid filename warning and does not open a blank file To retain the SOL Plus 9 0 behavior enter the set command SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY 9 0 To leave the editing session and return to SQL Plus terminate the editing session in the way customary for the text editor When you leave the editor SOL Plus loads the contents of the file into the buffer SQL Plus Command Reference 12 57 EDIT Note In Windows if you use WordPad as your editor _ EDITOR write exe the buffer is not reloaded when you exit WordPad In this case use GET to reload the buffer Examples To edit the file REPORT with the extension SQL using your operating system text editor enter EDIT REPORT 12 58 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EXECUTE EXECUTE Syntax Usage Examples EXEC UTE statement where statement represents a PL SQL statement Executes a single PL SQL statement The EXECUTE command is often useful when you want to execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure For more information on PL SQL see your Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference If your EXECUTE command can
2. Session altered To display the change enter a SELECT statement such as SELECT HIRE_DATE FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID 206 Job Report 04 19 01 Job SA_MAN HIRE_DATE 1994 06 07 See the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for information on the ALTER SESSION command SQL Plus Command Reference 12 33 COMPUTE COMPUTE Syntax Terms COMP UTE function LAB EL texf OF expr column alias ON expr column alias REPORT ROW In combination with the BREAK command calculates and prints summary lines using various standard computations on subsets of selected rows It also lists all COMPUTE definitions For details on how to create summaries see Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines on page 6 9 function Represents one of the functions listed in Table 12 2 COMPUTE Functions If you specify more than one function use spaces to separate the functions COMPUTE command functions are always executed in the sequence AVG COUNT MINIMUM MAXIMUM NUMBER SUM STD VARIANCE regardless of their order in the COMPUTE command Table 12 2 COMPUTE Functions Function Computes Applies to Datatypes AVG Average of non null values NUMBER COU NT Count of non null values all types MIN IMUM Minimum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING MAX IMUM Maximum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2
3. During recovery you can accept the suggested log name by pressing return cancel recovery by entering CANCEL instead of a log name or enter AUTO at the prompt for automatic file selection without further prompting If you have enabled autorecovery that is SET AUTORECOVERY ON recovery proceeds without prompting you with filenames Status messages are displayed when each log file is applied When normal media recovery is done a completion status is returned To recover the entire database enter RECOVER DATABASE To recover the database until a specified time enter RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 01 JAN 2001 04 32 00 12 78 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER To recover the two tablespaces ts_one and ts_two from the database enter RECOVER TABLESPACE ts_one ts_two To recover the datafile datal db from the database enter RECOVER DATAFILE datal db SQL Plus Command Reference 12 79 REMARK REMARK Syntax Usage Examples REM ARK Begins a comment in a script SQL Plus does not interpret the comment as a command The REMARK command must appear at the beginning of a line and the comment ends at the end A at the end of the line A line cannot contain both a comment and a command of a REMARK line is treated as a line continuation character For details on entering comments in scripts using the SOL comment delimiters or the ANSI ISO comment delimiter see Plac
4. Example 5 12 Prompting for and Accepting Input To direct the user to supply a report title and to store the input in the variable MYTITLE for use in a subsequent query first clear the buffer CLEAR BUFFER Next set up a script as shown and save this file as PROMPT1 PROMPT Enter a title of up to 30 characters ACCEPT MYTITLE PROMPT Title TTITLE LEFT MYTITLE SKIP 2 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN SAVE PROMPT1 Created file PROMPT1 sql The TTITLE command sets the top title for your report See Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions on page 6 17 for more information about the TTITILE command Finally run the script responding to the prompt for the title as shown START PROMPT1 Enter a title of up to 30 characters Title Department Report Department Report EMPLOYEE _ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY 145 John Russell 14000 146 Karen Partners 13500 147 Alberto Errazuriz 12000 148 Gerald Cambrault 11000 149 Eleni Zlotkey 10500 Before continuing turn the TTITLE command off TTITLE OFF Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 19 Communicating with the User Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable If you want to customize the prompt for a substitution variable value use PROMPT and ACCEPT in conjunction with the substitution variable as shown in the following example Example 5 13 Using PROMPT and ACCEPT in Conjunction with Sub
5. Starting SQL Plus 3 5 Exiting SQL Plus Command line SQL Plus Release 12 1 0 1 0 Development on Fri Aug 3 19 03 02 2012 Copyright c 1982 2012 Oracle All rights reserved Last successful login time Wed Aug 1 20 30 05 2012 Connected to Oracle Database 12c Enterprise Edition Release 12 1 0 1 0 Next SQL Plus displays the SQL Plus command prompt SQL gt The SOL Plus command prompt indicates that SOL Plus is ready to accept your commands If SQL Plus does not start you should see a message to help you correct the problem Getting Command line Help To access command line help for SOL Plus commands type HELP or followed by the command name at the SQL command prompt See the HELP command on page 12 63 for more information For example HELP ACCEPT To display a list of SQL Plus commands type HELP followed by either TOPICS or INDEX HELP TOPICS displays a single column list of SQL Plus commands HELP INDEX displays a four column list of SQL Plus commands which fits in a standard screen For example HELP INDEX Exiting SQL Plus Command line If you cannot log in to SOL Plus because your username or password is invalid or for some other reason SQL Plus returns an error status equivalent to an EXIT FAILURE command See the EXIT command on page 12 60 for further information When you are done working with SQL Plus and wish to return to the operating system enter EXIT or QUIT at the SOL Plus promp
6. The SOL ALTER SYSTEM command enables a complete recovery from disk failure as well as instance failure because all changes made to the database are permanently saved in an archived redo log Database Administration with SQL Plus 10 3 Database Recovery For more information about redo log files and database archiving modes see the Oracle Database Concepts manual and the ARCHIVE LOG command on page 12 13 To list the details of the current log file being archived enter ARCHIVE LOG LIST Database log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 Database Recovery If a damaged database is in ARCHIVELOG mode it is a candidate for either complete media recovery or incomplete media recovery operations To begin media recovery operations use the RECOVER command For more information about recovering data see the RECOVER command on page 12 73 In order to begin recovery operations you must have DBA privileges To recover the database up to a specified time using a control backup file enter RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 1998 11 23 12 47 30 USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE To recover two offline tablespaces enter RECOVER TABLESPACE ts1 ts2 Make sure that the tablespaces you are interested in recovering have been taken offline before proceeding with recovery for those tablespaces 10 4
7. command is used to execute the buffer The GET command can be used to load files created with the SAVE command See SAVE on page 12 87 for more information To load a file called YEARENDRPT with the extension SQL into the buffer enter GET YEARENDRPT 12 62 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference HELP HELP Syntax Usage Examples HELP topic where topic represents a SQL Plus help topic for example COLUMN Accesses the SQL Plus command line help system Enter HELP INDEX or INDEX for a list of topics You can view the Oracle Database Library at http www oracle com technology documentation Enter HELP or without topic to get help on the help system You can only enter one topic after HELP You can abbreviate the topic for example COL for COLUMN However if you enter only an abbreviated topic and the abbreviation is ambiguous SQL Plus displays help for all topics that match the abbreviation For example if you enter HELP EX SOL Plus displays the syntax for the EXECUTE command followed by the syntax for the EXIT command If you get a response indicating that help is not available consult your database administrator To see a list of SOL Plus commands for which help is available enter HELP INDEX or INDEX To see a single column list of SOL Plus commands for which help is available enter HELP TOPICS SQL Plus Command Reference 12 63 HOST HOST Syntax HO ST comm
8. sqlplus 2 When prompted enter your Oracle Database username and password If you do not know your Oracle Database username and password ask your Database Administrator 3 Alternatively enter the SOL Plus command in the form sqlplus username You are prompted to enter your password 4 SOL Plus starts and connects to the default database Now you can start entering and executing SQL PL SQL and SQL Plus statements and commands at the SQL gt prompt To start SQL Plus and connect to a database other than the default Open a UNIX or a Windows terminal and enter the SQL Plus command sqlplus username connect_identifier You are prompted to enter your password Starting SQL Plus Instant Client SOL Plus Instant Client is the SOL Plus command line without the need to install Oracle Database For information about using it see Starting SQL Plus Command line on page xxi Because SQL Plus Instant Client does not include a database it is always remote from any database server To connect to a database you must specify the database using an Oracle Net connection identifier If TNS_ADMIN is not set then an operating system dependent set of directories is examined to find tnsnames ora This search path includes looking in the directory specified by the ORACLE_HOME environment variable for network admin tnsnames ora This is the only reason to set the ORACLE_ HOME environment variable for SQL Plus Instant Client If ORACLE HOME is
9. BTITLE COL 50 CONFIDENTIAL TAB 6 1 JAN 2001 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 21 CHANGE CHANGE Syntax C HANGE sepchar old sepchar new sepchar Changes the first occurrence of the specified text on the current line in the buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands Terms sepchar mon Represents any non alphanumeric character such as or not appear in old or new old Use a sepchar that does Represents the text you wish to change CHANGE ignores case in searching for old For example CHANGE aq aw finds the first occurrence of aq AQ aQ or Aq and changes it to aw SOL Plus inserts the new text exactly as you specify it won If old is prefixed with it matches everything up to and including the first occurrence of old If it is suffixed with it matches the first occurrence of old and everything that follows on that line If it contains an embedded it matches everything from the preceding part of old through the following part of old new Represents the text with which you wish to replace old If you omit new and optionally the second and third sepchars CHANGE deletes old from the current line of the buffer Usage CHANGE changes the first occurrence of the existing specified text on the current line of the buffer to the new specified text The current line is marked with an asterisk in the LIST output Y
10. BYREFERENCE specifies that node identities are to be preserved Subsequent operations on this node preserve the node s context and definition DEFAULT specifies the database default In Oracle Database 10g the default is BYVALUE When SET XQUERY NODE is not set the default is DEFAULT BYVALUE SET XQUERY NODE BYREFERENCE XQUERY for i in doc foo xml return 1 This is equivalent to XQuery declare node byreference for i in doc foo xml return i 12 166 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET XQUERY CONTEXT text Specifies an XQuery context item expression A context item expression evaluates to the context item which may be either a node as in the expression fn doc bib xml book fn count author gt 1 or an atomic value as in the expression 1 to 100 mod 5 eq 0 To unset the XQUERY CONTEXT set an empty string for example SET XQUERY CONTEXT Take care to enter valid values as values are checked only when an XQUERY command is issued Example SET XQUERY CONTEXT doc foo xml XQUERY for i in a return i This is equivalent to XQuery for i in a return i passing XMLQuery doc foo xml SQL Plus Command Reference 12 167 SHOW SHOW Syntax Terms SHO W option where option represents one of the following terms or clauses system_variable ALL BTI TLE CON_ID CON_NAME EDITION ERR ORS FUNCTION PROC
11. Installing SQL Plus Instant Client on Windows To install SOL Plus Instant Client using the Basic OCI package on Windows copy the following files ORACLE_HOMEYinstantclientloraociei12 d11 ORACLE_HOME bin oci d1l ORACLE_HOME bin orannzsbb12 d11 ORACLE_HOME bin orasqlplusic12 d1l ORACLE_HOME bin sqlplus exe To install SOL Plus Instant Client using the lightweight OCI package on Windows copy the following files ORACLE_HOME instantclient light oraociicus12 dll ORACLE_HOME bin oci d1l ORACLE_HOME bin orannzsbb12 d11 ORACLE_HOME bin orasqlplusic12 d1l ORACLE_HOME bin sqlplus exe Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client The SQL Plus Instant Client executable should only be used with the matching version of the OCI Instant Client Note that no ORACLE HOME or ORACLE SID environment variables need to be set Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on Linux from RPMs The RPMs downloaded from OTN install into Oracle specific sub directories in the usr file system The sub directory structure enables multiple versions of Instant Client to be available 1 Add the name of the directory containing the Instant Client libraries to LD_ LIBRARY_PATH Remove any other Oracle directories For example to set LD_LIBRARY_PATH on Solaris in the Bourne or Korn shells LD_LIBRARY_PATH usr lib oracle 12 1 0 1 client lib LD_LIBRARY_PATH export LD_LIBRARY_PATH SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client
12. Your output may vary depending on the version and configuration of the Oracle Database server to which you are connected You need SELECT ON V_ PARAMETER object privileges to use the PARAMETERS clause otherwise you will receive a message ORA 00942 table or view does not exist PDBS Display the names ids mode and restriction status of Pluggable Databases in the Consolidated Database to which you are connected Returns NULL if you are connected to a non Consolidated Database SQL Plus Command Reference 12 169 SHOW The PDBS option is only available when logged in with DBA privileges For non DBA users attempting to use the PDBS option returns ORA 00942 table or view does not exist PNO Shows the current page number RECYC LEBIN original_name Shows objects in the recycle bin that can be reverted with the FLASHBACK BEFORE DROP command You do not need to remember column names or interpret the less readable output from the query SELECT FROM USER_RECYCLEBIN The query returns four columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ORIGINAL NAME Shows the original name used when creating the object RECYCLEBIN NAME Shows the name used to identify the object in the recyclebin OBJECT TYPE Shows the type of the object DROP TIME Shows the time when the object was dropped The output columns can be formatted with the COLUMN command For DBAs the command lists th
13. 2 PDBS SEED READ ONLY NO 3 CDB1_PDB1 READ WRITE NO To display the connect identifier for the default instance enter SHOW INSTANCE INSTANCE LOCAL To display the location for archive logs enter SHOW LOGSOURCE LOGSOURCE usr oracle90 dbs arch To display objects that can be reverted with the FLASHBACK commands where CJ1 and ABC were objects dropped enter SHOW RECYCLEBIN 12 172 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW ORIGINAL NAME RECYCLEBIN NAME OBJECT TYPE DROP TIME CJ1 RB 29458STABLES0 TABLE 2003 01 22 14 54 07 ABC RB 29453STABLESO TABLE 2003 01 20 18 50 29 To restore CJ1 enter FLASHBACK TABLE CJ1 TO BEFORE DROP SQL Plus Command Reference 12 173 SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Syntax SHUTDOWN ABORT IMMEDIATE NORMAL TRANSACTIONAL LOCAL Shuts down a currently running Oracle Database instance optionally closing and dismounting a database If the current database is a pluggable database only the pluggable database is closed The consolidated instance continues to run Shutdown commands that wait for current calls to complete or users to disconnect such as SHUTDOWN NORMAL and SHUTDOWN TRANSACTIONAL have a time limit that the SHUTDOWN command will wait If all events blocking the shutdown have not occurred within the time limit the shutdown command cancels with the following message ORA 01013 user requested cancel of current operation Prerequisites for PDB Shutdown
14. Cause An internal error occurred Action Make a note of the message then contact Oracle Support Services SP2 0645 Operating System error occurred Unable to complete EDIT command SQL Plus Error Messages 13 19 SQL Plus Error Messages Cause An operating system error occurred with the EDIT command Action Check that the file was created successfully and verify that the device you are writing to is still available SP2 0650 New passwords do not match Cause The new passwords entered did not match Action Re issue the PASSWORD command and make sure that the new passwords are entered correctly SP2 0659 Password unchanged Cause The PASSWORD command failed to change passwords because No passwords were given The new passwords did not match Action Re issue the PASSWORD command and make sure that the new passwords are entered correctly SP2 0666 WARNING SHIFTINOUT only affects shift sensitive character sets Cause The NLS character set used in this session does not contain shift sensitive characters The SET SHIFTINOUT command is unnecessary Action No action required SP2 0667 Message file facility lt lang gt msb not found Cause The SP1 SP2 or CPY message file could not be found SOL Plus cannot run Action Check the Oracle platform specific documentation to make sure SQL Plus is installed correctly This may occur because the ORACLE_HOME environment variable or registry equivalent is not set to
15. Cause An invalid option was used in the SET AUTOTRACE command Action Check the syntax of the SET AUTOTRACE command for the correct options SP2 0610 Error initializing feature_name Cause Not enough memory to enable this feature Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required or reduce the size of the command statement or query output SP2 0612 Error generating report_name report Cause Unable to generate the report using AUTOTRACE Action Make a note of the message and the number then contact the Database Administrator SP2 0613 Unable to verify PLAN_TABLE format or existence Error enabling autotrace_report report Cause An AUTOTRACE command was issued by a user with insufficient privileges or who did not have a PLAN_TABLE Action Make sure the user has been granted the PLUSTRACE role and that a PLAN_TABLE has been created for the user SP2 0614 Server version too low for this feature Cause The current version of the Oracle Server is too low for this feature Action Use a higher version of the Oracle Server SP2 0617 Cannot construct a unique STATEMENT_ID Cause Unable to construct a unique statement ID in AUTOTRACE Action Check that AUTOTRACE is configured and that you have the PLUSTRACE role enabled SP2 0618 Cannot find the Session Identifier Check PLUSTRACE role is enabled Error enabling autotrace_report report Cause Unable to find the session identifier Action Check that th
16. SET System Variable Summary SET EMB EDDED ON OFF Controls where on a page each report begins OFF forces each report to start at the top of a new page ON enables a report to begin anywhere on a page Set EMBEDDED to ON when you want a report to begin printing immediately following the end of the previously run report SQL Plus Command Reference 12 109 SET ERRORL OGGING ON OFF TABLE schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER identifier SET ERRORL OGGING ON OFF TABLE schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER identifier Turns SQL Plus error logging ON or OFF Error logging records SOL PL SQL and SQL Plus errors and associated parameters in an error log table You can then query the log table to review errors resulting from a query When error logging is ON errors are recorded whether the query is run interactively or from a script This is particularly useful for capturing errors generated from long running queries and avoids capturing all output using the SPOOL command or having to remain present during the run By default errors are written to a the table SPERRORLOG in your schema If this table does not exist it is created automatically You can also use the TABLE schema tablename option to specify other tables to use When using a table other than SPERRORLOG it must already exist and you must have access to it See Creating a User Defined Error Log Table If an internal error occurs to avoid recurs
17. Terms When the current container is a pluggable database PDB the SHUTDOWN command can only be used if a The current user has SYSDBA SYSOPER SYSBACKUP or SYSDG system privilege The privilege is either commonly granted or locally granted in the PDB The current user exercises the privilege using AS SYSDBA AS SYSOPER AS SYSBACKUP or AS SYSDG at connect time a To close a PDB the PDB must be open For more information see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide ABORT Proceeds with the fastest possible shutdown of the database without waiting for calls to complete or users to disconnect Uncommitted transactions are not rolled back Client SQL statements currently being processed are terminated All users currently connected to the database are implicitly disconnected and the next database startup will require instance recovery You must use this option if a background process terminates abnormally IMMEDIATE Does not wait for current calls to complete or users to disconnect from the database Further connects are prohibited The database is closed and dismounted The instance is shutdown and no instance recovery is required on the next database startup NORMAL NORMAL is the default option which waits for users to disconnect from the database Further connects are prohibited The database is closed and dismounted The instance is shutdown and no instance recovery is required on the next database startup TR
18. column expr DEF AULT obsolete 0 00 0 cece cesses ee ceeenesseeeessseneseeaeees C 2 DOGIUMENT obsoleta losin SE Aes ieee ei Os oes See C 2 NEWPAGE 1 ln obsolete s cec c cee hess te toiees hee te ii C 2 SET BUF FER buffer SQL obsolete eee ecccsssesesescsesssesescscscsesescscscscaeseseecscaeavaeseecatananesesanans C 2 SET COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE obsolete ccccccccccccscssessesscecssescssecseessseessesees C 3 SET CLOSECUR SOR ON OFF obsolete ooocooonooncconcconoconaninnoconncconoco conan nono conan onnno ra nonnnncnnos C 3 SET DOC UMENT ON OFF obsolete ooooonccnccocinncnnonccononcnncnncnncnnonocnnononononconnnn nono cn cnn nnncnnonncnnon C 3 SET MAXDIATA n obsolete c cccccecescsssssscscsesessscssesessscuececsesesesessesesessecseseeesecseseseseeseseseneeeceeseass C 3 SET SCAN ON OFF obsolete oooooiocccncnncnoncnnccnnconcconanoncnn cano nan ono nonncnnnon nono non no rnncnanancnnnnnn ana ccaninn C 4 SET SPACE41 11 obsolete ia id it adan a idas C 4 SET TRU NCATE ON OFF obsolete 0 cc cece cc ccsscesccsseesscssscsscsscssecssessecsecsscessesssesseessesseeasens C 4 TTI TLE text obsolete old form it C 4 D SQL Plus Instant Client Choosing the SOL Plus Instant Client to Install 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ce eesescscseseseececscenenseececenens D 1 Basic InstantiCl enti ciscay obs ites Hea eed Sa heen bia eich eee ieee he D 1 Lightweight Insta
19. using the SQL Plus REMARK command for single line comments using the SQL comment delimiters for single or multi line comments using ANSI ISO American National Standards Institute International Standards Organization comments for single line comments Comments entered at the command line are not stored in the SQL buffer Using the REMARK Command Using Use the REMARK command on a line by itself in a script followed by comments on the same line To continue the comments on additional lines enter additional REMARK commands Do not place a REMARK command between different lines of a single SQL command REMARK Commission Report REMARK to be run monthly COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST_NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90 90 REMARK Includes only salesmen SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN Enter the SOL comment delimiters on separate lines in your script on the same line as a SOL command or on a line in a PL SQL block You must enter a space after the slash asterisk beginning a comment The comments can span multiple lines but cannot be nested within one another Commission Report to be run monthly COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST_NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 9
20. 12 170 REPFOOTER clause 12 170 REPHEADER clause 12 170 SPOOL clause 12 170 SQLCODE clause 12 171 TTITLE clause 12 171 Index 13 USER clause 12 171 XQUERY clause 12 171 SHOWMODE variable 12 90 12 143 SHUTDOWN command 12 174 ABORT 12 174 IMMEDIATE 12 174 NORMAL 12 174 TRANSACTIONAL LOCAL 12 174 SILENT option 3 11 7 5 site profile glogin 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 11 12 148 SKIP clause in BREAK command 6 10 6 11 12 17 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 12 83 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 6 20 12 188 used to place blank lines before bottom title 6 20 SKIP PAGE clause 6 10 6 11 12 18 slash command 12 9 files loaded with GET command 12 62 SPACE variable C 1 C 4 SPOOL clause 3 9 12 170 SPOOL command 6 26 12 176 APPEND clause 12 176 CREATE clause 12 176 file name 6 27 12 176 OFF clause 6 26 12 176 OUT clause 6 27 12 176 REPLACE clause 12 176 to HTML file 3 9 turning spooling off 6 26 12 176 use with SET MARKUP 7 2 SQL clause 12 24 SQL DML statements reporting on 12 89 12 97 SQL optimizer 8 3 SQL Plus command prompt 3 6 command summary 12 2 configuring globalization support 11 1 configuring Oracle Net 2 7 database administration 10 1 environment variables 2 1 error messages 13 1 execution plan 8 3 exiting 3 6 12 60 limits A 1 obsolete command alternatives C 1 setting up environment 2 3 starting 3 5 3 6 statistics 8 3 system variables affecting performance 8
21. 13 500 20 Michael Hartstein 13 000 6 rows selected Now reset PAGESIZE NEWPAGE and LINESIZE to their default values SET PAGESIZE 14 SET NEWPAGE 1 SET LINESIZE 80 To list the current values of these variables use the SHOW command SHOW PAGESIZE SHOW NEWPAGE SHOW LINESIZE Through the SQL Plus command SPOOL you can store your query results in a file or print them on your computer s default printer Storing and Printing Query Results Send your query results to a file when you want to edit them with a word processor before printing or include them in a letter email or other document To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file name If you do not follow the filename with a period and an extension SPOOL adds a default file extension to the filename to identify it as an output file The default varies with the operating system on most hosts itis LST or LIS The extension is not appended when you spool to system generated files such as dev null and dev stderr See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for more information SQL Plus continues to spool information to the file until you turn spooling off using the following form of SPOOL SPOOL OFF Creating a Flat File When moving data between different software products it is sometimes necessary to use a flat file
22. COMMISSION_PCT NUMBER 2 2 DEPARTMENT_NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 JOB_TITLE NOT NULL VARCHAR2 S cry i NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 STATE_PROVINCE VARCHAR2 5 COUNTRY_NAME VARCHAR2 40 REGION_NAME VARCHAR2 25 To rename the column headings and to select data from the HR sample schema view EMP_DETAILS VIEW enter COLUMN FIRST_NAME HEADING First Name COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Family Name SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE LAST _NAME LIKE K which produces the following output xxiv Payam sto Steven King Neena Kochhar Alexander Khoo anette King Sundita Kumar Exiting SQL Plus To exit SOL Plus command line enter EXIT XXV Xxvi Part SQL Plus Getting Started Part 1 provides the information you need to get started with SQL Plus It describes the command line user interface provides configuration information and information you need to log in and run SQL Plus Part 1 contains the following chapters a SQL Plus User Interface a Configuring SOL Plus a Starting SOL Plus 1 SQL Plus User Interface This chapter describes the SQL Plus command line user interface It contains the following topics a The Command line Screen Changing the Command line Font and Font Size The Command line Screen The following image shows the SQL Plus command line interface The SOL Plus command line interface is standard on all
23. CONTEXT variable 12 91 CONTEXT XQUERY option 12 167 CONTINUE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 12 198 WHENEVER SQLERROR 12 199 continuing a long SOL Plus command 4 7 12 1 COPY command 12 42 B 1 B 3 and at sign B 1 B 4 and ARRAYSIZE variable B 3 B 6 and COPYCOMMIT variable B 3 B 6 and LONG variable B 3 B 6 APPEND clause B 2 B 5 copying data between databases B 3 copying data between tables on one database B 7 CREATE clause B 2 B 5 creating a table B 2 B 5 destination table B 2 B 4 determining actions B 4 determining source rows and columns B 3 B 4 error messages 13 34 FROM clause B 4 INSERT clause B 2 B 5 inserting data in a table B 2 B 5 interpreting messages B 6 mandatory connect identifier B 2 naming the source table with SELECT B 3 B 4 query B 3 B 4 referring to another user s table B 6 REPLACE clause B 2 B 5 replacing data in a table B 2 B 5 sample command B 4 service name B 4 B 5 B 7 specifying columns for destination B 2 B 4 specifying the data to copy B 3 B 4 TO clause B 4 username password B 1 B 4 B 5 B 7 USING clause B 3 B 4 COPYCOMMIT variable 12 89 12 103 relationship to COPY command B 3 B 6 COPYTYPECHECK variable 12 89 12 104 CREATE clause in COPY command _ B 2 B 5 CREATE command disabling 9 4 entering PL SQL 4 6 creating a PLAN_TABLE 8 2 creating flat files 6 26 creating PLUSTRACE role 8 2 creating sample tables 0 xxiv creating the PRODUCT_US
24. Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Storing and Printing Query Results Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the HR sample schema described in SQL Plus Quick Start on page xix Formatting Columns Through the SQL Plus COLUMN command you can change the column headings and reformat the column data in your query results Changing Column Headings When displaying column headings you can either use the default heading or you can change it using the COLUMN command The following sections describe how default headings are derived and how to alter them using the COLUMN command See the COLUMN command on page 12 26 for more details Default Headings SQL Plus uses column or expression names as default column headings when displaying query results Column names are often short and cryptic however and expressions can be hard to understand Changing Default Headings You can define a more useful column heading with the HEADING clause of the COLUMN command in the following format COLUMN column_name HEADING column_heading Example 6 1 Changing a Column Heading To produce a report from EMP_DETAILS_VIEW with new headings specified for LAST_NAME SALARY and COMMISSION_PCT enter the following commands COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 1 Forma
25. If the destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table If the destination table does not already exist COPY reports an error and stops Use APPEND when you want to insert data in an existing table or create a new table if the destination table does not exist APPEND specifies the following actions a If the destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table a Ifthe table does not already exist COPY creates the table and then inserts the copied data in it Example B 1 Copying from a Remote Database to Your Local Database Using CREATE To copy HR from a remote database into a table called EMPLOYEE_COPY on your own database enter the following command Note See your DBA for an appropriate username password and service name for a remote computer that contains a copy of EMPLOYEE_COPY COPY FROM HR BOSTONDB CREATE EMPCOPY USING SELECT FROM HR SQL Plus COPY Command B 5 Copying Data from One Database to Another Array fetch bind size is 15 arraysize is 15 Will commit when done copycommit is 0 Maximum long size is 80 long is 80 SQL Plus then creates the table EMPLOYEE_COPY and copies the rows Table SALESMAN created 5 rows selected from HR BOSTONDB 5 rows inserted into SALESMAN 5 rows committed into SALESMAN at DEFAULT HOST connection In this COPY command the FROM clause directs COPY to connect
26. If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between report pages To set the number of lines on a page use the PAGESIZE variable of the SET command SET PAGESIZE number_of_lines You may wish to reduce the line size to center a title properly over your output or you may want to increase line size for printing on wide paper You can change the line width using the LINESIZE variable of the SET command SET LINESIZE number_of_ characters Example 6 25 Setting Page Dimensions To set the page size to 66 lines clear the screen or advance the printer to a new sheet of paper at the start of each page and set the line size to 70 enter the following commands SET PAGESIZE 66 SET NEWPAGE 0 SET LINESIZE 70 Now enter and run the following commands to see the results TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 1 CENTER 01 JAN 2001 SKIP 2 Now run the following query COLUMN FIRST_NAME HEADING FIRST NAME COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 25 Storing and Printing Query Results ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT 01 JAN 2001 FIRST LAST MONTHLY DEPARTMENT_ID NAME NAME SALARY 90 Steven King 24 000 90 Neena Kochhar 17 000 90 Lex De Haan 17 000 80 John Russell 14 000 80 Karen Partners
27. REPLACE Replaces destination_table and its contents with the rows from query If destination_table does not exist COPY creates it Otherwise COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data destination_table Represents the table you wish to create or to which you wish to add data column column column Specifies the names of the columns in destination_table You must enclose a name in double quotes if it contains lowercase letters or blanks If you specify columns the number of columns must equal the number of columns selected by the query If you do not specify any columns the copied columns will have the same names in the destination table as they had in the source if COPY creates destination_table USING query B 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another Usage Examples Specifies a SQL query SELECT command determining which rows and columns COPY copies To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The SQL Plus SET LONG variable limits the length of LON
28. SALARY If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you are done press Return to move to the next line 2 SQL Plus displays a 2 the prompt for the second line Enter the second line of the command FROM EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 SQL Plus Basics 4 3 Running SQL Commands The semicolon means that this is the end of the command Press Return or click Execute SQL Plus processes the command and displays the results EMPLOYEE ID LAST NAME JOB_ID SALARY 100 King AD_PRES 24 000 101 Kochhar AD_VP 17 000 102 De Haan AD_VP 17 000 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 201 Hartstein MK_MAN 13 000 6 rows selected After displaying the results and the number of rows retrieved SQL Plus command line displays the command prompt again If you made a mistake and therefore did not get the results shown re enter the command The headings may be repeated in your output depending on the setting of a system variable called PAGESIZE Sometimes the result from a query will not fit the available page width You can use the system variable LINESIZE to set the width of the output in characters See Setting Page Dimensions on page 6 24 Typically LINESIZE is set to 80 in command line Whether you see the message stating the number of records retrieved depends on the setting of the system variable FEEDBACK See System Variables that Affect How Commands Run on page
29. SET SHOW MODE ON OFF Controls whether SQL Plus lists the old and new settings of a SOL Plus system variable when you change the setting with SET ON lists the settings OFF suppresses the listing SHOWMODE ON has the same behavior as the obsolete SHOWMODE BOTH SQL Plus Command Reference 12 143 SET SQLBL ANKLINES ON OFF SET SQLBL ANKLINES ON OFF Example Controls whether SOL Plus puts blank lines within a SOL command or script ON interprets blank lines and new lines as part of aSQL command or script OFF the default value does not allow blank lines or new lines in a SOL command or script or script Enter the BLOCKTERMINATOR to stop SOL command entry without running the SQL command Enter the SOLTERMINATOR character to stop SQL command entry and run the SOL statement To allow blank lines in a SOL statement enter SET SOLBLANKLINES ON REM Using the SQLTERMINATOR default is REM Could have used the BLOCKTERMINATOR default is SELECT FROM DUAL 1 The following output results 12 144 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET SQLC ASE MIX ED LO WER UP PER Converts the case of SQL commands and PL SQL blocks just prior to execution SQL Plus converts all text within the command including quoted literals and identifiers to uppercase if SQLCASE equals UPPER to lowercase if SQLCASE equals LOWER and makes no changes if SOLCASE equals MIXED
30. SP2 0822 Java created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL java has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL java Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0823 Java altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL java has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL java Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0824 PL SQL compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL block has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL block Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0825 Dimension created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL dimension has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL dimension Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0826 Dimension altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL dimension has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL dimension 13 28 SQL Plus U
31. To set the instance back to the default of local enter SET INSTANCE local You must disconnect from any connected instances to change the instance SQL Plus Command Reference 12 123 SET LIN ESIZE 80 n SET LIN ESIZE 80 n Sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays on one line before beginning a new line It also controls the position of centered and right aligned text in TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER Changing the linesize setting can affect text wrapping in output from the DESCRIBE command DESCRIBE output columns are typically allocated a proportion of the linesize Decreasing or increasing the linesize may give unexpected text wrapping in your display You can define LINESIZE as a value from 1 to a maximum that is system dependent 12 124 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET LOBOF FSET 1 n Sets the starting position from which BLOB BFILE CLOB and NCLOB data is retrieved and displayed Example To set the starting position from which a CLOB column s data is retrieved to the 22nd position enter SET LOBOFFSET 22 The CLOB data will wrap on your screen SOL Plus will not truncate until the 23rd character SQL Plus Command Reference 12 125 SET LOGSOURCE pathname SET LOGSOURCE pathname Specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery The default value is set by the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST initialization p
32. UPDATE DELETE or MERGE Sets the non alphanumeric character used to end PL SQL blocks to c Sets the non alphanumeric character used to separate multiple SQL Plus commands entered on one line to c ON sets the DESCRIBE command to display column information for an invisible column Sets the text to be printed between selected columns Sets the character you can use to terminate a substitution variable reference if you wish to immediately follow the variable with a character that SQL Plus would otherwise interpret as a part of the substitution variable name Controls the number of batches after which the COPY command commits changes to the database Sets the suppression of the comparison of datatypes while inserting or appending to tables with the COPY command Sets the character used to prefix variables to c Sets the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object Controls whether the START command lists each command in a script as the command is executed Sets the default filename for the EDIT command Controls where on a page each report begins Enables recording of SQL PL SQL and SQL Plus errors to an error log table which you can query later Defines the character you enter as the escape character Specifies a special character to escape in a filename Prevents character translation causing an error Specifies whether the default EXIT behavior is COMMIT or ROLLBACK SQL Plus Command
33. amp 1 in the file with the first value called an argument after START filename then replaces each amp 2 with the second value and so forth For example you could include the following commands in a script called MYFILE SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 AND SALARY amp 2 In the following START command SQL Plus would substitute PU_CLERK for amp 1 and 3100 for amp 2 in the script MYFILE START MYFILE PU_CLERK 3100 When you use arguments with the START command SOL Plus DEFINEs each parameter in the script with the value of the appropriate argument Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 17 Passing Parameters through the START Command Example 5 11 Passing Parameters through START To create a new script based on SALES that takes a parameter specifying the job to be displayed enter GET SALES COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90 90 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN no FWD RE 6 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN CHANGE SA_MAN amp 1 6 WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 SAVE ONEJOB Created file ONEJOB Now run the command with the parameter SA_MAN START ONEJOB SA_MAN SOL Plus lists the line of the SQL command that contains the parameter before and after replacing the parameter with its value and then displays the output
34. are correctly interpreted in the report Otherwise they would be replaced with their respective entities amp lt amp gt amp quot and amp amp preventing web browsers from correctly interpreting the HTML Entities in the column heading and any COMPUTE labels or output appearing in the column are mapped or not mapped according to the value of ENTMAP for the column The default setting for COLUMN ENTMAP is the current setting of the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option For more information about the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option see SET MARKUP Options on page 3 7 FOLD_A FTER Inserts a carriage return after the column heading and after each row in the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return after the last column in the SELECT list FOLD_A FTER does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode unless PREFORMAT is set ON FOLD_B EFORE Inserts a carriage return before the column heading and before each row of the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return before the first column in the SELECT list FOLD_A FTER does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode unless PREFORMAT is set ON FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 Character Columns The default width of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR and NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING columns is the width of the column in the database SOL Plus formats these datatypes left justified If a
35. line ignored Cause The input value specified was too long Action Re enter with fewer characters SP2 0029 command buffer space exhausted Cause A large SOL or PL SQL script is being executed from SQL Plus Action Reduce the size of the SQL statement or PL SQL block by one of the following a Remove extra white space and comments a Re code to use fewer commands and or shorter variable names a Place sections of the block into stored or packaged procedures and then call these procedures from the block SP2 0030 no room for another line 13 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Cause The maximum number of lines in a SOL statement or PL SQL block has been exceeded Action Reduce the number of lines and try again SP2 0038 Command too long max_characters characters Cause The specified command entered was too long Action Check the command syntax for the limitation SP2 0039 command line overflow while substituting into command_name Cause The maximum length of the command line has been exceeded Action Reduce the length of the data in the substitution variables used in the command SP2 0042 unknown command command_name rest of line ignored Cause The command entered was not valid Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0044 For a list of known commands enter HELP and to leave enter EXIT Cause An unknown command was entered Action
36. or lists the current BTITLE definition Enter BTITLE with no clauses to list the current BTITLE definition For a description of the old form of BTITLE see BTI TLE text obsolete old form on page C 2 See the TTITLE command on page 12 187 for information on terms and clauses in the BTITLE command syntax If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text BTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets BTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name SOL Plus substitution variables amp variables are expanded before BTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the BTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of results the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a BTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for variables that are to be substituted on each page of results If you want to use a substitution variable to insert unchanging text in a BTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once To set a bottom title with CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT on the left and a date on the right enter BTITLE LEFT CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT RIGHT 1 JAN 2001 To set a bottom title with CONFIDENTIAL in column 50 followed by six spaces and a date enter 12 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BTITLE
37. to skip a page when the value of DEPARTMENT_ID changes and one line when the value of JOB_ID changes enter the following command BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP PAGE ON JOB_ID SKIP 1 To show that SKIP PAGE has taken effect create a TTITLE with a page number TTITLE COL 35 FORMAT 9 Page SQL PNO Run the new query to see the results Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 11 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Page 1 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 MK_MAN Hartstein 13000 Page 2 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 80 SA_MAN Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Page 3 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 90 AD_PRES King 24000 AD_VP Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected Listing and Removing Break Definitions Before continuing turn off the top title display without changing its definition TTITLE OFF You can list your current break definition by entering the BREAK command with no clauses BREAK You can remove the current break definition by entering the CLEAR command with the BREAKS clause CLEAR BREAKS You may wish to place the command CLEAR BREAKS at the beginning of every script to ensure that previously entered BREAK commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes If you organize the rows of a report into subsets with the BREAK command you can perform various computations on the rows in each sub
38. 0 Production on Tue Jan 24 20 56 48 2012 3 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax Logon Copyright c 1982 2012 Oracle All rights reserved Last Successful login time Wed Jan 18 2012 07 39 37 07 00 Connected to Oracle Database 12c Enterprise Edition Release 12 1 0 1 0 64bit Production With the Partitioning Oracle Label Security Data Mining and Real Application Last login time does not show when making a connection with the CONNECT command RESTRICT Option R ESTRICT 11213 Enables you to disable certain commands that interact with the operating system This is similar to disabling the same commands in the Product User Profile PUP table However commands disabled with the RESTRICT option are disabled even if there is no connection to a server and remain disabled until SOL Plus terminates If no RESTRICT option is active than all commands can be used unless disabled in the PUP table If RESTRICT 3 is used then LOGIN SQL is not read GLOGIN SOL is read but restricted commands used will fail Table 3 1 Commands Disabled by Restriction Level Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 EDIT disabled disabled disabled GET disabled HOST disabled disabled disabled SAVE disabled disabled SPOOL disabled disabled START disabled STORE disabled disabled SILENT Option S ILENT Suppresses all SOL Plus information and prompt messages including the command prompt the echoing of c
39. 11 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes To place one blank line between departments enter the following command BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP 1 Now rerun the query 6 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected Inserting Space after Every Row You may wish to insert blank lines or a blank page after every row To skip n lines after every row use BREAK in the following form BREAK ON ROW SKIP n To skip a page after every row use BREAK ON ROW SKIP PAGE Note SKIP PAGE does not cause a physical page break character to be generated unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques Suppose you have more than one column in your ORDER BY clause and wish to insert space when each column s value changes Each BREAK command you enter replaces the previous one Thus if you want to use different spacing techniques in one report or insert space after the value changes in more than one ordered column you must specify multiple columns and actions in a single BREAK command Example 6 12 Combining Spacing Techniques Type the following SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID Now
40. 12 199 Windows installing SOL Plus Instant Client D 2 notepad 12 46 SQL Plus Instant Client files to copy D 4 WORD_WRAPPED clause 6 6 6 8 12 31 WRAP variable 6 5 12 91 12 162 WRAPPED clause 6 6 12 31 X XMLOPTIMIZATIONCHECK variable 12 91 12 163 XMLType column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 column formatting 6 6 column width 6 5 creating 6 6 formatting in reports 6 4 inserting values 6 6 selecting data 6 6 setting column retrieval size 8 9 12 128 setting maximum column width 12 127 XQUERY clause 12 171 XQUERY command 12 201 XQUERY options BASEURI 12 164 CONTEXT 12 167 NODE 12 166 12 165 Index 17 Index 18
41. 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Action Make sure that the last synonym in the synonym path points to an object that exists and that it doesn t point back to itself SP2 0750 ORACLE_HOME may not be set Cause SQL Plus was unable to find a message file during program initialization and could not display error messages or text required for normal operation The most common cause is that ORACLE_HOME has not been set Other possible causes are a corrupt or unreadable message file On Windows the SOLPLUS registry entry may be invalid This message is hard coded in English in the SOL Plus source code so it can be displayed on message file error It could never be read from this message file because the error occurs only when the message files cannot be opened This entry in the message file is for documentation purposes only Action Make sure that all environment variables or registry entries needed to run SQL Plus are set The variables are platform specific but may include ORACLE _ HOME ORACLE_SID NLS_LANG and LD_LIBRARY_PATH On Windows if the environment variable called SOLPLUS is set it must contain the directory name of the SQL Plus message files for example ORACLE_ HOME saqlplus mesg Also check that the file sp1XX msb is in the HKORACLE_HOME sqlplus mesg or ORACLE_HOME sqIplus mesg directory The XX stands for the country prefix associated with your NLS_LANG environment variable SOL Plus read
42. 5 17 Communicating with the User iinan ieina p aa a nero rri eai iisi cion 5 19 Receiving a Substitution Variable Value ss ss sssssessesssssesessessetsssissesnetensesnesnssnienesnesnssseenees 5 19 Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable ss ssssesssssssestssesesstsstesstenttesseentessterstsstestes 5 20 Sending a Message and Accepting Return as Input se sssssssssssserstssssesttsstestestesstsnterstesnteestes 5 21 Clearing th Sereen iias inaa ia a E A a Side Ra i S 5 21 Using Bind Variables cocida tartas 5 21 Creating Bind Variables miii id is 5 21 Referencing Bind Variables tema a e a a id 5 22 Displaying Bind Variables i Acta chad tain alada 5 22 Using REFCURSOR Bind VariableS ooionnnninnnnnnninnnnnoncnnncncncncnronaroronnn crono rorornnororo ro ran anciano nora cronos 5 22 Fetching Iterative Results from a SELECT inside a PL SQL Block eee 5 25 Formatting SQL Plus Reports Formatting Columns epa paaa Ean A A aE E aida ici 6 1 Changing Column Headings x cseccasie ii tie debe nies e d aR 6 1 Formatting NUMBER ColumnS ccococociononnononcnnononinnonnnoneninnnninnananannnnnnno nan onnnonone nan annrono nan anoronerarananonos 6 3 Formatting Datatypes s cici ivormociioireciiciiio se EL debat iaa EEE d testes daa escocia aire da 6 4 Copying Column Display Attributes cocicococionononnnonononarananonononcnananonononononononon coco nonnon rn cono raro rnrnnnion 6 7 Listing and Resetting Column
43. 706 496 A So a Plan hash value 2988506077 1 access E JOB_ID J JOB_ID 2 filter E SALARY gt 12000 SALARY JOB_TITLE 24000 President 17000 Administration Vice President 17000 Administration Vice President 13500 Sales Manager 14000 Sales Manager 13000 Marketing Manager 6 rows selected Execution Plan sampling used for this statement recursive calls db block gets consistent gets physical reads redo size bytes sent via Oracle Net Services to client bytes received via Oracle Net Services from client Oracle Net Services roundtrips to from client sorts memory sorts disk rows processed 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 Id Operation Name Rows Bytes Cost CPU 0 SELECT STATEMENT 6 360 6 17 1 HASH JOIN 6 360 6 17 2 TABLE ACCESS FULL EMPLOYEES 6 204 3 0 3 TABLE ACCESS FULL JOBS 19 494 2 0 Example 8 5 To trace the same statement without displaying the query data enter Tracing Statements Without Displaying Query Data SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY 8 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Collecting Timing Statistics 6 rows selected Execution Plan Plan hash value 2988506077 Id Operation Name Rows Bytes Cost CPU Time 0 SELECT STATEMENT 6 360 6 17 00 00 01 1 HASH JOIN 6 360 6 17 00 00 01 2 TABLE ACCESS FULL EMPL
44. 90 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN The format model for the column COMMISSION_PCT tells SQL Plus to display an initial zero for decimal values and a zero instead of a blank when the value of COMMISSION_PCT is zero for a given row Format models and the COLUMN command are described in more detail in the COLUMN command on page 12 26 and in the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference Now use your editor s save command to store your query in a file called SALES SQL Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line You can use a number of SQL Plus commands to edit the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the buffer Table 5 1 SOL Plus Editing Commands lists the SOL Plus commands that allow you to examine or change the command in the buffer without re entering the command 5 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line Table 5 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose APPEND text A text adds text at the end of the current line CHANGE 01d new C old new changes old to new in the current line CHANGE text C text deletes text from the current line CLEAR BUFFER CL BUFF deletes all lines DEL none deletes the current line DEL n none deletes line n DEL none deletes the current line DEL n none deletes line n through the current line DEL LAST none deletes the last line DEL mn none deletes a ra
45. AUTORECOVERY OFF if a bad log name is entered errors for the bad log name are displayed and you are prompted to enter a new log name TEST Specifies a trial recovery to detect possible problems Redo is applied normally but no changes are written to disk and changes are rolled back at the end of the trial recovery You can only use the TEST clause for a trial recovery if you have restored a backup In the event of logfile corruption specifies the number of corrupt blocks that can be tolerated while allowing recovery to proceed During normal recovery integer cannot exceed 1 ALLOW integer CORRUPTION In the event of logfile corruption specifies the number of corrupt blocks that can be tolerated while allowing recovery to proceed parallel _clause Enables you to specify the degree of parallel processing to use during the recovery operation CONTINUE Continues multi instance recovery after it has been interrupted to disable a thread CONTINUE DEFAULT 12 74 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER Continues recovery using the redo log file generated automatically by Oracle Database if no other logfile is specified This is equivalent to specifying AUTOMATIC except that Oracle Database does not prompt for a filename CANCEL Terminates cancel based recovery SNAPSHOT TIME date Recovers the database with a storage snapshot using Storage snapshot Optimization STANDBY DATABASE Recovers the standby database using
46. Action Check the limits of the parameter and enter a value that is within the range SP2 0268 option_name option not a valid number Cause Non numeric value integer was entered for a parameter Action Enter a valid numeric value integer SP2 0271 variable_name is not a buffer variable Cause The specified variable was not defined as a buffer Action Make sure that the buffer variable name is correct and try again SQL Plus Error Messages 13 9 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0272 character_name character cannot be alphanumeric or white space Cause The specified character in the SET command cannot be alphanumeric or white space Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0277 entered_value value not valid Cause The value entered was incorrect Action Re enter with a valid value SP2 0281 option_name missing set option Usage SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE or Usage SET MARKUP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF M ARKUP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text Cause SET option was missing in the command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0306 Invalid option Usage CONNIECT login AS SYSDBA SYSOPER Where lt login gt lt username gt lt password gt lt connect_string gt or Usage CONNI ECT username password connect_iden
47. Autotrace Report is sisii eeann iee iaaeaie aratati arasia asainne iS 8 1 Execution Pla inssi anan a a a pi iee iaa a aani atico liar 8 3 SAS ii A a ja 8 3 Collecting Timing Statistics o iio hpi ie cidade erea ite e aieiaa SE i a E 8 5 Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries ccccccescssssesssseesesseeeceseseeeneseseseeeseseseecesesesesnenaneneaes 8 6 Execution Plan Output in Earlier Databases eee ce ceeseseseeeessssseesesesessseesesesasasenees 8 7 SOL Plus Script Tuning co ci a A AE tents havea eee Sasi 8 8 COLUMN NOPRRING ocio iia ide diia Dolar 8 8 SET ARPINEO OEP A AA A A AE A o 2 AA 8 8 SET ARRAY SIZ Ei ses sist adn dire ii A ia 8 8 SET DEFINE OFF cutis A EErEE EE EE a tie 8 9 SET PELUSHO Primarias 8 9 SETTINESIZ E conidios nato iacii till npaadtraide daros 8 9 SET LONGCHUNKSIZ EB civil ti a a A a E AE 8 9 NI NAAA A O TT 8 9 SET SERVERQUIPU Titi da td alee ba DAA EEEE 8 9 SET SOEPROM EP I oiera e sessed ses teas aces E T caves III ad EE iio Lap ana casa 8 9 SET TAB iii a ote 8 10 SETTERMOU usina aaa ds odo odiada 8 10 SET TRIMOUT ON SET TRIMSPOOL ON 8 10 10 11 MI NDDEFIN Ecco TAS ai rn A teats sha staat EE EDICTOS 8 10 SQL Plus Security PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Tabl e a ehea e a iaaa a N erari t ron oro nora rn iie Sai 9 1 Creating the PUP TL ia A ab e 9 1 PUP Table SHUI tia 9 2 Description and Use of PUP Columns ococoncnccnnnoncnnnnonenennnanannnnnnnnoronnnnonananonnnnn coronan nn ian EEES eNEAN RA 9
48. BLOB BFILE CLOB NCLOB or SET MARKUP HTML ON OFF HEAD text on BODY texf TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF Pase 12 129 SPOOL ON OFF PREFORMAT ON OFF SET NEWPAGE 1 n NONE on page 12 131 SET NULL text on page 12 132 SET NUMFORMAT format on page 12 133 SET NUMWIDTH 10 n on page 12 134 SET PAGESIZE 14 n on page 12 135 SET PAUSE ON OFF text on page 12 136 SET RECSEP WRAPPED EACH OFF on page 12 137 SET RECSEPCHAR _ c on page 12 138 SET SECUREDCOL ON OFF on UNAUTH ORIZED tex UNK NOWN text page 12 139 o SET SERVEROUTPUT ON OFF SIZE n n UNL IMITED FORMAT WRAPPED WORD_ Page 12 140 WRAPPED TRUNCATED SET SHIFTINOUT VISIBLE INVISIBLE on page 12 142 SET SHOWMODE ON OFF on page 12 143 12 90 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference XMLType value Outputs HTML marked up text Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of each page to the top title Sets the text that represents a null value in the result of a SQL SELECT command Sets the default format for displaying numbers Sets the default width for displaying numbers Sets the number of lines in each page Enables you to control scrolling of your terminal when running reports RECSEP tells SQL Plus where to make the record separation Display or print record separators Sets how secure column values are displayed for users without permission to view a colum
49. BLOB BFILE or multibyte CLOB columns cannot be formatted with the WORD_WRAPPED option If you format an NCLOB BLOB BFILE or multibyte CLOB column with COLUMN WORD_WRAPPED the column data behaves as though COLUMN WRAPPED was applied instead Note The column heading is truncated regardless of the setting of WRAP or any COLUMN command clauses Now return the column to its previous format COLUMN LAST_NAME FORMAT A10 Example 6 6 Formatting an XMLType Column Before illustrating how to format an XMLType column you must create a table with an XMLType column definition and insert some data into the table You can create an XMLType column like any other user defined column To create a table containing an XMLType column enter CREATE TABLE warehouses warehouse_id NUMBER 3 warehouse_spec SYS XMLTYPE warehouse_name VARCHAR2 35 location_id NUMBER 4 To insert a new record containing warehouse_id and warehouse_spec values into the new warehouses table enter INSERT into warehouses warehouse_id warehouse_spec VALUES 100 sys XMLTYPE createXML lt Warehouse whNo 100 gt lt Building gt Owned lt Building gt lt Warehouse gt To set the XMLType column width to 20 characters and then select the XMLType column enter COLUMN Building FORMAT A20 SELECT w warehouse_spec extract Warehouse Building text getStringVal Building FROM warehouses w Building 6 6 SQL Plus User s Gui
50. CREATE GRANT and SET commands To create a role you use the CREATE command You can create roles with or without passwords To grant access to roles you use the GRANT command In this way you can control who has access to the privileges associated with the role a To access roles you use the SET ROLE command If you created the role with a password the user must know the password in order to access the role For more information about roles see your Oracle Database SQL Language Reference your Oracle Database Administrator s Guide and your Oracle Database Concepts manual Disabling SET ROLE From SQL Plus users can submit any SOL command In certain situations this can cause security problems Unless you take proper precautions a user could use SET ROLE to access privileges obtained through an application role With these privileges they might issue SQL statements from SQL Plus that could wrongly change database tables To prevent application users from accessing application roles in SQL Plus you can use the PUP table to disable the SET ROLE command You also need to disable the BEGIN and SQL Plus EXECUTE commands to prevent application users setting application roles through a PL SQL block This gives a SOL Plus user only those privileges associated with the roles enabled when they started SQL Plus For more information about the creation and usage of user roles see your Oracle Database SQL Language Reference and Oracl
51. CREATE TYPE EMPLOYEE AS OBJECT LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 Js Type created DESCRIBE employee LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 To create and describe the object type addr_type as a table of the object type ADDRESS enter CREATE TYPE addr_type IS TABLE OF ADDRESS 12 52 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE Type created DESCRIBE addr_type addr_type TABLE OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the object type addr_varray as a varray of the object type ADDRESS enter CREATE TYPE addr_varray AS VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS Type created DESCRIBE addr_varray addr_varray VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the table department that contains the columns DEPARTMENT_ID PERSON and LOC enter CREATE TABLE department DEPARTMENT_ID NUMBER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC NUMBER des Table created DESCRIBE department DEPARTMENT_1D NUMBER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC NUMBER To create and describe the object type rational that contains the attributes NUMERATOR and DENOMINATOR and the METHOD rational_order enter CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE rational AS OBJECT NUMERATOR NUMBER DENOMINATOR NUMBER SQL Plus Command Reference 12 53 DESCRIBE MAP MEMBER
52. Database SQL Language Reference SQL Plus Command Reference 12 197 WHENEVER OSERROR WHENEVER OSERROR Syntax Terms Usage Examples WHENEVER OSERROR EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Performs the specified action exits SOL Plus by default if an operating system error occurs such as a file writing error SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to perform the specified action as soon as an operating system error is detected You can also specify that SOL Plus return a success or failure code the operating system failure code or a number or variable of your choice EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to exit as soon as an operating system error is detected You can also specify that SQL Plus return a success or failure code the operating system failure code or a number or variable of your choice See EXIT on page 12 60 for more information CONTINUE Turns off the EXIT option COMMIT Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database ROLLBACK Directs SOL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database NONE Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing If you do not enter the WHENEVER OSERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is t
53. DimensioNS oooicnininnnnnicnnnnnnnnnnnoninncnnnnnronororornnconrororoncnnnos 6 17 Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and FoOteTS oococoniconcnconenenonnnnnnennernrnnenirananonoa 6 18 Displaying System Maintained Values in Titles coconocincononininennononnnnnnonencnrnerinnnnennrnrornennnarararnanass 6 21 Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions ccinoncoconcnonnncnnncncnncnnrrnnnananoso 6 22 Displaying Column Values in Titles oonocinnnininnnncinnnnnnnnncncncncncornrnrnnncoraro corn croro raro rnn corra rancios 6 23 Displaying the Current Date in Titles ooonicninnnnninnnnnnnnnnncncnaceoncncncnrarornrnrororarorn ro rnroraro raros 6 24 Setting Page Dimensions i e preerian eer ine aS a ae aani aaa aa a aiie aaa 6 24 Storing and Printing Query Results 0 0 0 0 cece cece ceeecseececeseeeeeneseseseseneneneseseneneseseenenes 6 26 Creating a Plat Pileta tilda ibid 6 26 Sending Results toa Fleiss id taa 6 27 Sending Results to a Printer cin lia iia dto des aca 6 27 Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus Creating Reports using Command line SQL PIUS ooonnnnnninnnnnnnicnnnnnnincnnncncnnocncnnnnononornroronono coronan 7 1 Sa AA A 7 1 Suppressing the Display of SOL Plus Commands in Reports ococococononenennncnnnnonncnnererannanannoos 7 5 ATMEL ENTE S tn EIA ode E cons En E A tE 7 5 Tuning SQL Plus Tracing Statements evs cria ces ries teow Sess cscs ils ede Sis dees R aia idad deca ti 8 1 Controlling the
54. Display Attributes ocoococononcncononenenennnoncnnnnrornnennrananonnarararannnnnnananos 6 7 Suppressing and Restoring Column Display AttributeS ococoneninonoononnoncnrennncanrnarrarnnnncnrannnns 6 8 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values cococonccininoninnnnicananonanacinnonanononncnnono 6 8 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines ooocnicicnnonininnnnonnninnnnoninancnnnononanancnonono 6 9 Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break ColuMWS ooconococcocononenonnnnnncnnrnrnnnnnnconannnnarnrorannnnncanannnoa 6 10 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes ooonccccccconononacananononononananononononononcnrncnoos 6 10 Inserting Space after Every ROW ii ecocoiicisiontadias ici iii ea 6 11 vi Using Multiple Spacing Techniques ccccccccccccsssesesesccssseesescscsssesescsesesssesescscsssssesescsesssnecsees 6 11 Listing and Removing Break Definitions oocinnnnnnnnncnnannonincncnnannncncnconononnrorononanirnrornoraro raras 6 12 Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Chang S cccnicnninininoninnnnncncncnnos 6 12 Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report oococonencncininnnoconnennncnnnnrnrnrncnncaranannanass 6 15 Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines cceccccsesssses estes eseseeteeseeceeesesceeeteneneaes 6 16 Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions cconcinninnnnnnnnnoninnnnonnnnnnnononoronnnconno nono rnn cra ro coran ninos 6 17 Defining Page and Report Titles and
55. Download the packages from the Oracle Technology Network OTN a Copy the same files that are in the packages from an Oracle Database 12c Client Administrator installation Both the SQL Plus and OCI packages must be from the same Oracle Database version for example 12 1 0 0 0 Basic Instant Client SOL Plus Instant Client using the Basic OCI package works with any NLS_LANG setting supported by the Oracle Database It supports all character sets and language settings available in the Oracle Database Lightweight Instant Client SQL Plus Instant Client using the lightweight OCI package displays error messages in English only and supports only specific character sets It is significantly smaller than SQL Plus Instant Client using the Basic OCI package Valid values for NLS_LANG parameters with the lightweight Instant Client are language can be any valid language supported by the Oracle Database however error messages are only reported in English territory can be any valid territory supported by the Oracle Database SQL Plus Instant Client D 1 Installing SQL Plus Instant Client by Downloading from OTN a charset is one of the following character sets a US7ASCII a WE8DEC a WES8MSWIN1252 a WESISO8859P1 a UTF8 a AL16UTF16 a AL32UTF8 For example NLS_LANG AMERICAN_AMERICA UTF8 See the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide and NLS_LANG Environment Variable on page 11 1 for more information about NLS set
56. FUNCTION rational_order RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION PRAGMA RESTRICT _REFERENCES rational_order RNDS WNDS RNPS WNPS CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE BODY rational AS OBJECT MAP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION IS BEGIN RETURN NUMERATOR DENOMINATOR END END DESCRIBE rational Name Null Type NUMERATOR NUMBER DENOMINATOR NUMBER METHOD Sao ween FUNCTION RATIONAL_ORDER RETURNS NUMBER To create a table which contains a column of XMLType and describe it enter CREATE TABLE PROPERTY Price NUMBER Description SYS XMLTYPE Table created DESCRIBE PROPERTY PRICE NUMBER DESCRIPTION SYS XMLTYPE To format the DESCRIBE output use the SET command as follows SET LINESIZE 80 SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 SET DESCRIBE INDENT ON SET DESCRIBE LINE OFF To display the settings for the object use the SHOW command as follows SHOW DESCRIBE DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 LINENUM OFF INDENT ON DESCRIBE employee 12 54 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE Name Null Type FIRST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 To create and describe the table des2_table which contains an encrypted column col2 enter CREATE TABLE des2_table coll VARCHAR2 10 col2 VARCHAR2 15 ENCRYPT col3 CHAR 5 col4 CHAR 20 Table created DESCRIBE des2_table COL1 VARCHAR2 10 COL2 VA
57. HTML spool file employee htm the output is also displayed on screen because SET TERMOUT defaults to ON You can view the spool file employee htm in your web browser It should appear something like the following SQL Plus Command Reference 12 129 SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FOR FIRST NAME LASTNAME Steven King 24000 Neena Kochhar 17000 Lex De Haan 17000 Michael Hartstein 13000 ohn Russell 14000 Karen Partners 13500 6 rows selected 12 130 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET NEWP AGE 1 n NONE Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of each page to the top title A value of zero places a formfeed at the beginning of each page including the first page and clears the screen on most terminals If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between the report pages SQL Plus Command Reference 12 131 SET NULL text SET NULL text Sets the text displayed whenever a null value occurs in the result of a SQL SELECT command Use the NULL clause of the COLUMN command to override the setting of the NULL variable for a given column The default output for a null is blank 12 132 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET NUMF ORMAT format Sets the default format for displa
58. Haan 17 000 00 King 24 000 00 Kochhar 17 000 00 RHERLARARERE AEREA AAA a a a a A Subtotal 58 000 00 Marketing Hartstein 13 000 00 ERE ERRARERRERREERERERRRRRRERRRERR O a ect AS Subtotal 13 000 00 Sales Partners 13 500 00 Russell 14 000 00 KEK KK KKK KEK KR KEKE KKK RRR KEKE RRR RRR RK aa Subtotal 27 500 00 Total 98 500 00 The following example illustrates producing a report containing a CLOB column and then displaying it with the SET LOBOFFSET command Assume you have already created a table named clob_tab which contains a column named clob_col of type CLOB The clob_col contains the following data Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information To produce a report listing the data in the col_clob column enter VARIABLE T CLOB BEGIN SELECT CLOB_COL INTO T FROM CLOB_TAB END PL SQL PROCEDURE SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED To print 200 characters from the column clob_col enter 12 196 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE SET LINESIZE 70 SET LONG 200 PRINT T Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This r eport contains confidential information To set the printing position to the 21st character enter SET LOBOFFSET 21 PRINT T Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confi dential information For more information on creating CLOB columns see your Oracle
59. JONES 20 2975 7788 SCOTT 20 3000 7521 WARD 30 notallow 7499 ALLEN 30 notallow SQL Plus Command Reference 12 139 SET SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n UNL IMITED FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED SET SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n UNL IMITED FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Example Controls whether to display output that is DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SQL Plus The DBMS_OUTPUT line length limit is 32767 bytes OFF suppresses the output of DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE ON displays the output ON uses the SIZE and FORMAT of the previous SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SIZE n FORMAT f or uses default values if no SET SERVEROUTPUT command was previously issued in the current connection SIZE sets the number of bytes of the output that can be buffered within the Oracle Database server The default is UNLIMITED n cannot be less than 2000 or greater than 1 000 000 Resources are not pre allocated when SERVEROUTPUT is set As there is no performance penalty use UNLIMITED unless you want to conserve physical memory Every server output line begins on a new output line When WRAPPED is enabled SQL Plus wraps the server output within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAPPED is enabled each line of server output is wrapped within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE Lines are broken on word
60. ON or SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to produce standalone web pages SQL Plus will generate complete HTML pages automatically encapsulated with lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags The HTML tags ina spool file are closed when SPOOL OFF is executed or SQL Plus exits The SILENT and RESTRICT command line options may be useful when used in conjunction with MARKUP You can use MARKUP HTML ON to produce HTML output in either the lt PRE gt tag or in an HTML table Output to a table uses standard HTML lt TABLE gt lt TR gt and lt TD gt tags to automatically encode the rows and columns resulting from a query Output to an HTML table is the default behavior when the HTML option is set ON You can generate output using HTML lt PRE gt tags by setting PREFORMAT ON In SOL Plus use the SHOW MARKUP command to view the status of MARKUP options The SQLPLUS MARKUP command has the same options and functionality as the SET MARKUP command These options are described in this section For other information on the SET MARKUP command see the SET command on page 12 88 HTML ONIOFF HTML is a mandatory MARKUP argument which specifies that the type of output to be generated is HTML The optional HTML arguments ON and OFF specify whether or not to generate HTML output The default is OFF MARKUP HTML ON generates HTML output using the specified MARKUP options You can turn HTML output ON and OFF as required during a session The default is OF
61. Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer and all lines are renumbered starting at 1 0 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID Example 5 6 Adding a Line Suppose you want to add a fourth line to the SQL command you modified in Example 5 4 Correcting the Error Since line 3 is already the current line enter INPUT and press Return INPUT SQL Plus prompts you for the new line Enter the new line Then press Return 4 ORDER BY SALARY SOL Plus prompts you again for a new line CI Press Return again to indicate that you will not enter any more lines and then use RUN to verify and re run the query 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN 4 ORDER BY SALARY EMPLOYEE ID LAST NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 149 Zlotkey SA_MAN 10 500 148 Cambrault SA_MAN 11 000 147 Errazuriz SA_MAN 12 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 5 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Placing Comments in Scripts Deleting Lines Use the DEL command to delete lines in the buffer Enter DEL specifying the line numbers you want to delete Suppose you want to delete the current line to the last line inclusive Use the DEL command as shown DEL LAST DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line See DEL on page 12 48 for more information Placing Comments in Scripts You can enter comments in a script in three ways
62. Plus Command Line Placing Comments in Scripts Running Scripts Nesting Scripts Exiting from a Script with a Return Code Defining Substitution Variables Using Predefined Variables Using Substitution Variables Passing Parameters through the START Command Communicating with the User Using Bind Variables Fetching Iterative Results from a SELECT inside a PL SQL Block Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample schema described in SOL Plus Overview on page xix Editing Scripts In SOL Plus command line the use of an external editor in combination with the O or START commands is an effective method of creating and executing generic scripts You can write scripts which contain SOL Plus SOL and PL SQL commands which you can retrieve and edit This is especially useful for storing complex commands or frequently used reports Writing Scripts with a System Editor Your Operating system may have one or more text editors that you can use to write scripts You can run your operating system s default text editor without leaving the SOL Plus command line by entering the EDIT command Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 1 Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line You can use the SOL Plus DEFINE command to define the variable EDITOR to hold the name of your preferred text editor For example to define the editor used by EDIT to be vi enter the f
63. Plus session to grant the PLUSTRACE role to the HR user CONNECT AS SYSDBA GRANT PLUSTRACE TO HR Grant succeeded 8 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Execution Plan Statistics The Execution Plan shows the SQL optimizer s query execution path Execution Plan output is generated using EXPLAIN PLAN and DBMS_XPLAN For information about interpreting the output of DBMS_XPLAN see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide The statistics are recorded by the server when your statement executes and indicate the system resources required to execute your statement The results include the following statistics Database Statistic Name Description recursive calls Number of recursive calls generated at both the user and system level Oracle Database maintains tables used for internal processing When Oracle Database needs to make a change to these tables it internally generates an internal SQL statement which in turn generates a recursive call db block gets Number of times a CURRENT block was requested consistent gets Number of times a consistent read was requested for a block physical reads Total number of data blocks read from disk This number equals the value of physical reads direct plus all reads into buffer cache redo size Total amount of redo generated in bytes bytes sent through Oracle Total number of bytes sent to the client from the foreground Net Services to client
64. Plus will not truncate until the 501st byte The default for LONG is 80 bytes SQL Plus Command Reference 12 127 SET LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n SET LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n Sets the size in bytes of the increments SQL Plus uses to retrieve a BLOB BFILE CLOB LONG NCLOB or XMLType value LONGCHUNKSIZE is not used for object relational queries such as CLOB or NCLOB Example To set the size of the increments in which SOL Plus retrieves LONG values to 100 bytes enter SET LONGCHUNKSIZE 100 The LONG data will be retrieved in increments of 100 bytes until the entire value is retrieved or the value of SET LONG is reached whichever is the smaller 12 128 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD texf BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF Example Outputs HTML marked up text To be effective SET MARKUP commands that change values in dynamic report output must occur before statements that produce query output The first statement that produces query output triggers the output of information affected by SET MARKUP such as HEAD and TABLE settings Subsequent SET MARKUP commands have no effect on the information already sent to the report SET MARKUP only specifies that SQL Plus output will be HTML encoded You must use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON and the SQL Plus SPOOL command to create and name a spool file a
65. SET DEF INE amp c ON OFF Sets the character used to prefix substitution variables to c ON or OFF controls whether SQL Plus will scan commands for substitution variables and replace them with their values ON changes the value of c back to the default amp not the most recently used character The setting of DEFINE to OFF overrides the setting of the SCAN variable See SET SCAN ON OFF obsolete on page C 4 for more information on the SCAN variable SQL Plus Command Reference 12 105 SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF Example Sets the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object The valid range of the DEPTH clause is from 1 to 50 If you SET DESCRIBE DEPTH ALL then the depth will be set to 50 which is the maximum level allowed You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types Use the SET LINESIZE command to control the width of the data displayed See DESCRIBE on page 12 50 for more information about describing objects To create an object type ADDRESS enter CREATE TYPE ADDRESS AS OBJECT STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 i Type created To create the table EMPLOYEE that contains a nested object EMPADDR of type ADDRESS enter CREATE TABLE EMPLOYEE LAST_NAME VARC
66. SET WRA P ON OFF Controls whether to truncate the display of a selected row if it is too long for the current line width OFF truncates the selected row ON enables the selected row to wrap to the next line Use the WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command to override the setting of WRAP for specific columns 12 162 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET XMLOPT IMIZATIONCHECK ONIOFF Controls whether only XML queries and DML operations that are fully optimized are executed ON prevents the execution of any XML query or DML operation that cannot be fully optimized and writes the reason in the trace file OFF does not prevent the execution of such queries and operations OFF is the default SET XMLOPT IMIZATIONCHECK ON is only to assist during development and debugging an XML query or DML operation SQL Plus Command Reference 12 163 SET XQUERY BASEURI text SET XQUERY BASEURI text Specifies the base URI used to resolve relative URIs in functions It enables the prefix of the file accessed by an XQuery to be changed To unset the BASEURI set an empty string for example SET XQUERY BASEURI Take care to enter valid values as values are checked only when an XQUERY command is issued Example SET XQUERY BASEURI public hr XQUERY for i in doc foo xml return 1 This is equivalent to XQuery declare base uri public hr for i in doc foo xml return
67. SOL Plus prefix character SQL Plus will execute the command immediately without affecting the SQL command or PL SQL block that you are entering The prefix character must be a non alphanumeric character 12 150 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET SQLP ROMPT SQL gt text Example Sets the SQL Plus command prompt SET SQLPROMPT substitute variables dynamically This enables the inclusion of runtime variables such as the current connection identifier Substitution variables used in SQLPROMPT do not have to be prefixed with amp and they can be used and accessed like any other substitution variable Variable substitution is not attempted for the default prompt SQL gt Variable substitution occurs each time SQLPROMPT is SET If SQLPROMPT is included in glogin sql then substitution variables in SQLPROMPT are refreshed with each login or connect To change your SQL Plus prompt to display your connection identifier enter SET SQLPROMPT _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt To set the SQL Plus command prompt to show the current user enter SET SQLPROMPT _USER gt To change your SQL Plus prompt to display your the current date the current user and the users privilege level enter SET SQLPROMPT _DATE _USER _PRIVILEGE gt To change your SQL Plus prompt to display a variable you have defined enter DEFINE mycon Prodl SET SQLPROMPT mycon gt Prod1 gt Text in nested quotes is not
68. SQL Statement ignored Disconnected from Oracle 12 200 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference XQUERY XQUERY Syntax Terms Usage XQUERY xquery_statement The SQL Plus XQUERY command enables you to perform an XQuery 1 0 query ona specified database XQUERY is supported on Oracle Database 10g Release 2 and later versions Attempting to use XQUERY on an earlier version of the Oracle Database gives the error SP2 614 Server version too low xquery_statement Specifies the XQuery statement you want to run The statement is entered with standard XQuery syntax The XQUERY statement is terminated with a forward slash Prefix your XQuery statement with the SQL Plus command XQUERY and terminate the XQUERY command with a slash XQUERY is a SOL Plus keyword If XQueries are executed in other tools the keyword may not be needed XML output from the XQUERY command is displayed as native XML according to the active SET command options SET LONG typically needs to be set It may be useful to consider the following settings a Linesize for rows longer than the default 80 characters SET LINESIZE LOB LONG and XML Type Size for rows longer than the default 80 characters SET LONG Output Page Setup to match output SET PAGESIZE a Display Headings to repress the Result Sequence column heading SET HEADING OFF The XQUERY command requires an active database connection The command wi
69. SQL command to the server for processing resulting in an error 4 Do not use ampersand characters amp in comments in a SQL statement or PL SQL block For example if you enter a script such as SELECT REGION_NAME CITY THIS amp THAT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 SQL Plus interprets text after the ampersand character amp as a substitution variable and prompts for the value of the variable amp that Enter value for that old 2 THIS amp THAT new 2 RATES S7 REGION_NAME CITY Americas Seattle Americas Seattle Americas Seattle Europe Oxford Europe Oxford Americas Toronto 6 rows selected You can SET DEFINE OFF to prevent scanning for the substitution character Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 9 Running Scripts For more information on substitution and termination characters see DEFINE SOLTERMINATOR and SOLBLANKLINES in the SET command on page 12 88 Running Scripts The START command retrieves a script and runs the commands it contains Use START to run a script containing SOL commands PL SQL blocks and SOL Plus commands You can have many commands in the file Follow the START command with the name of the file START file_name SQL Plus assumes the file has a SQL extension by default Example 5 7 Running a Script To retrieve and run the command stored in SALES SOL enter START SALES SOL Plus runs the commands in the file SALES and displays the results of t
70. SQLERROR 12 199 COMMIT command 4 9 disabling 9 4 communication between tiers 0 xxi COMPATIBILITY variable C 1 C 3 compilation errors 4 6 12 169 13 29 COMPUTE command 6 9 12 34 computing a summary on different columns 6 16 LABEL clause 6 13 6 15 12 34 listing all definitions 6 17 12 35 maximum LABEL length 12 34 OF clause 6 12 ON 12 35 ON column clause 6 12 12 35 ON expr clause 12 35 ON REPORT clause 6 15 12 35 printing grand and sub summaries 6 16 printing multiple summaries on same column 6 16 printing summary lines at ends of reports 6 15 printing summary lines on a break 6 12 referencing a SELECT expression in OF 12 35 referencing a SELECT expression in ON 12 35 removing definitions 6 17 12 24 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 12 194 COMPUTES clause 12 24 CON_ID clause 12 168 CON_NAME clause 12 168 CONCAT variable 5 17 12 89 12 102 configuration globalization support configuring Oracle Net 2 7 SQL Plus 2 1 CONNECT feature 3 2 CONNECT command 3 1 12 39 and at sign 12 39 changing password 12 39 12 40 12 69 SYSASM clause 12 40 SYSBACKUP clause 12 40 SYSDBA clause 12 40 SYSDG clause 12 40 SYSKM clause 12 40 SYSOPER clause 12 40 username password 12 39 connect identifier 12 39 in CONNECT command 12 39 in COPY command B 1 in DESCRIBE command 12 50 in SQLPLUS command 3 12 connection identifier 3 3 easy or abbreviated 3 4 full 3 3 net service name 3 3
71. STATISTICS The following shows typical results Statistics 467 recursive calls 27 db block gets 147 consistent gets 20 physical reads 4548 redo size 502 bytes sent via Oracle Net Services to client 496 bytes received via Oracle Net Services from client 2 Oracle Net Services roundtrips to from client 14 sorts memory 0 sorts disk 1 rows processed If consistent gets or physical reads are high relative to the amount of data returned it indicates that the query is expensive and needs to be reviewed for optimization For example if you are expecting less than 1 000 rows back and consistent gets is 1 000 000 and physical reads is 10 000 further optimization is needed Note You can also monitor disk reads and buffer gets using V SQL or TKPROF Execution Plan Output in Earlier Databases Execution Plan output from Oracle Database 9i Release 2 9 2 or earlier is different Each line of the Execution Plan has a sequential line number SQL Plus also displays the line number of the parent operation The Execution Plan consists of four columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the relationship between each step and its parent This column is useful for large reports PLAN _PLUS_EXP Shows each step of the report OBJECT_NODE_PLUS_EXP Shows database links or parallel query servers use
72. Security library Installing SQL Plus Instant Client from the 12c Client Release Media 1 Run the installer on the Oracle Database 12c Client Release media and choose the Administrator option 2 Create a new directory for example home instantclient12_1 on UNIX and Linux or c instantclient12_1 on Windows 3 Copy the SQL Plus Instant Client and the OCI Instant Client files to the new directory All files must be copied from the same ORACLE_HOME See Installing SQL Plus Instant Client on UNIX or Linux on page D 4 or Installing SQL Plus Instant Client on Windows on page D 4 for a list of the files to copy 4 Configure SQL Plus Instant Client See Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on page D 4 SQL Plus Instant Client D 3 Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client Installing SQL Plus Instant Client on UNIX or Linux To install SOL Plus Instant Client using the Basic OCI package on UNIX and Linux copy the following files SORACLE_HOME instantclient libociei so SORACLE_HOME 1ib libclntsh so 12 1 SORACLE_HOME 1ib 1libnnz12 so SORACLE_HOME 1ib libsqlplus so SORACLE_HOME 1ib libsqlplusic so SORACLE_HOME bin sqlplus To install SOL Plus Instant Client using the lightweight OCI package on UNIX and Linux copy the following files SORACLE_HOME instantclient light libociicus so SORACLE_HOME 1ib libclntsh so 12 1 SORACLE_HOME 1ib libnnz12 so SORACLE_HOME 1ib libsqlplus so SORACLE_HOME 1ib libsqlplusic so SORACLE_HOME bin sqlplus
73. States of America SQL Plus Command Reference 12 9 ACCEPT ACCEPT Syntax Terms ACC EPT variable NUM BER CHAR DATE BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_DOUBLE FOR MAT format DEF AULT default PROMPT texiNOPR OMPT HIDE Reads a line of input and stores it in a given substitution variable variable Represents the name of the variable in which you wish to store a value If variable does not exist SOL Plus creates it NUM BER Makes the variable a NUMBER datatype If the reply does not match the datatype ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again CHAR Makes the variable a CHAR datatype The maximum CHAR length is 240 bytes If a multi byte character set is used one CHAR may be more than one byte in size DATE Makes reply a valid DATE format If the reply is not a valid DATE format ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again The datatype is CHAR BINARY_FLOAT Makes the variable a BINARY_FLOAT datatype BINARY_FLOAT is a floating point number that conforms substantially with the Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic IEEE Standard 754 1985 BINARY_DOUBLE Makes the variable a BINARY_DOUBLE datatype BINARY_DOUBLE is a floating point number that conforms substantially with the Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic IEEE Standard 754 1985 FOR MAT Specifie
74. VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING NUM BER Count of rows all types SUM Sum of non null values NUMBER STD Standard deviation of non null values NUMBER VAR IANCE Variance of non null values NUMBER LAB EL text Defines the label to be printed for the computed value If no LABEL clause is used text defaults to the unabbreviated function keyword You must place single quotes around text containing spaces or punctuation The label prints left justified and truncates to the column width or linesize whichever is smaller The maximum label length is 500 characters The label for the computed value appears in the break column specified To suppress the label use the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column If you repeat a function in a COMPUTE command SQL Plus issues a warning and uses the first occurrence of the function 12 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE Usage Examples With ON REPORT and ON ROW computations the label appears in the first column listed in the SELECT statement The label can be suppressed by using a NOPRINT column first in the SELECT statement When you compute a function of the first column in the SELECT statement ON REPORT or ON ROW then the computed value appears in the first column and the label is not displayed To see the label select a dummy column first in the SELECT list OF expr column alias In the OF clause you can refer to an expression or functi
75. You can reference the variable in TTITLE commands Use NEW_VALUE to display column values or the date in the top title You must include the column in a BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action The variable name cannot contain a pound sign NEW_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause See the example at the end of this command description Variables specified with NEW_V ALUE are expanded before TTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the TTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of the report the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a TTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for NEW_V ALUE variables that are to be substituted on each page of the report If you want to use a substitution variable to insert unchanging text in a TTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once For information on displaying a column value in the bottom title see OLD_V ALUE variable below For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE command on page 12 187 For information on formatting and valid format models see FOR MAT format above NOPRI NT PRI NT Controls the printing of the column the column heading and all the selected values NOP
76. a REFCURSOR variable 12 194 used with COMPUTE 12 16 12 17 12 35 break definition listing current 6 12 12 18 removing current 6 12 12 24 BREAKS clause 6 12 12 24 browser web 7 1 BTITLE clause 12 169 BTITLE command 6 18 12 20 aligning title elements 12 188 BOLD clause 12 188 CENTER clause 12 188 COL clause 12 188 FORMAT clause 12 188 indenting titles 12 188 LEFT clause 12 188 OFF clause 12 187 old form C 2 printing blank lines before bottom title 6 20 referencing column value variable 12 31 RIGHT clause 12 188 SKIP clause 12 188 suppressing current definition 12 187 TAB clause 12 188 TTITLE command 12 20 buffer 4 2 appending text toalinein 5 5 12 12 delete a single line 5 3 delete the current line 5 3 delete the last line 5 3 deleting a range of lines 5 3 12 48 deleting a single line 12 48 deleting all lines 5 3 12 24 12 48 deleting lines from 5 7 12 48 deleting the current line 12 48 deleting the last line 12 48 executing contents 12 9 12 86 inserting new line in 5 6 12 65 listing a range of lines 5 3 12 67 listing a single line 5 3 12 67 listing all lines 5 3 12 67 listing contents 5 3 12 67 listing the current line 5 3 12 67 listing the last line 5 3 12 67 loading into system editor 12 57 saving contents 12 87 BUFFER clause 5 2 5 3 12 24 BUFFER variable C 2 C CALL command disabling 9 3 CANCEL clause 12 75 12 77 Cancel key 4 8 cancel query 4
77. a format model consisting of the letter A for alphanumeric followed by a number representing the width of the column in characters Within the COLUMN command identify the column you want to format and the model you want to use COLUMN column_name FORMAT model If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SQL Plus truncates the heading See the COLUMN command on page 12 26 for more details Example 6 5 Formatting a Character Column To set the width of the column LAST_NAME to four characters and rerun the current query enter COLUMN LAST_NAME FORMAT A4 LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russ 14 000 4 ell Part 13 500 3 ners Erra 12 000 3 zuri LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Camb 11 000 3 raul t Zlot 10 500 2 key If the WRAP variable of the SET command is set to ON its default value the employee names wrap to the next line after the fourth character as shown in Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 5 Formatting Columns Example 6 5 Formatting a Character Column If WRAP is set to OFF the names are truncated cut off after the fourth character The system variable WRAP controls all columns you can override the setting of WRAP for a given column through the WRAPPED WORD_WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command See the COLUMN command on page 12 26 for more information on these clauses You will use the WORD_WRAPPED clause of COLUMN later in this chapter NCLOB
78. and runs the commands it contains Modifying Your LOGIN File You can modify your LOGIN file just as you would any other script The following sample User Profile script shows some modifications that you could include login sql SQL Plus user login startup file 2 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Configuration This script is automatically run after glogin sql To change the SQL Plus prompt to display the current user connection identifier and current time First set the database date format to show the time ALTER SESSION SET nls_date_format HH MI SS SET the SQLPROMPT to include the _USER _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER and _DATE variables SET SQLPROMPT _USER CONNECT_IDENTIFIER _DATE gt To set the number of lines to display in a report page to 24 SET PAGESIZE 24 To set the number of characters to display on each report line to 78 SET LINESIZE 78 To set the number format used in a report to 99 999 SET NUMFORMAT 99 999 See Also SET command on page 12 88 for more information on these and other SET command variables you may wish to set in your SQL Plus LOGIN file Using Predefined Variables on page 5 12 for more information about predefined variables Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables From the Command line you can store the current SQL Plus system variables in a script with the STORE command If you alter any variables this scri
79. archived redo log file needed to continue the recovery operation Oracle Database uses the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_ 1 and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT parameters or their defaults to generate the target redo log filename If the file is found the redo contained in that file is applied If the file is not found SQL Plus prompts you for a filename displaying a generated filename as a suggestion If you do not specify either AUTOMATIC or LOGFILE SQL Plus prompts you for a filename suggesting the generated filename You can either accept the generated filename or replace it with a fully qualified filename You can save time by using the LOGFILE clause to specify the filename if you know the archived filename differs from the filename Oracle Database would generate FROM location Specifies the location from which the archived redo log file group is read The value of location must be a fully specified file location If you omit this parameter SQL Plus assumes the archived redo log file group is in the location specified by the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 Do not specify FROM if you have set a file with SET LOGSOURCE full_database_recovery Enables you to specify the recovery of a full database partial_database_recovery Enables you to specify the recovery of individual tablespaces and datafiles LOGFILE Continues media recovery by applying the specified redo log file In interactive recovery mode
80. cannot use a wildcard See Disabling Commands with SOLPLUS RESTRICT on page 9 6 for information on disabling a role Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store DATE values in this column Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store LONG values in this column 9 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands PUP Table Administration The DBA username SYSTEM owns and has all privileges on the PUP table Other Oracle Database usernames should have only SELECT access to this table which enables a view of restrictions for that username and those restrictions assigned to PUBLIC The script PUPBLD SQL when run grants SELECT access on the PUP table to PUBLIC Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands To disable a SQL or SQL Plus command for a given user insert a row containing the user s username in the Userid column the command name in the Attribute column and DISABLED in the Char_Value column The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_ Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMBERIC CHAR VALUE VALUE SQL Plus HR HOST DISABLED SQL Plus INSERT DISABLED SQL Plus UPDATE DISABLED SQL Plus DELETE DISABLED DATE LONG VALUE VALUE To re enable commands delete the row containing the restriction SQL Plus Commands That Can Be Disabled ACCEPT DEFINE PASSWORD SHUTDOWN APPEND D
81. cannot use b a or a b in a COLUMN command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command If you select columns with the same name from different tables a COLUMN command for that column name will apply to both columns That is a COLUMN command for the column LAST_NAME applies to all columns named LAST_NAME that you reference in this session COLUMN ignores table name prefixes in SELECT commands Also spaces are ignored unless the name is placed in double quotes To format the columns differently assign a unique alias to each column within the SELECT command itself do not use the ALIAS clause of the COLUMN command and enter a COLUMN command for each columns alias 12 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN ALI AS alias Assigns a specified alias to a column which can be used to refer to the column in BREAK COMPUTE and other COLUMN commands CLE AR Resets the display attributes for the column to default values To reset the attributes for all columns use the CLEAR COLUMNS command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTEs for that column ENTMAP ON OFF Enables entity mapping to be turned on or off for selected columns in HTML output This feature enables you to include for example HTML hyperlinks in a column of data while still mapping entities in other columns of the same report By turning entity mapping off for a column containing HTML hyperlinks the HTML anchor tag delimiters lt gt and amp
82. canon cnc conan cronanccnno 11 1 Viewing NLS_LANG Settings henep p e a e a a aaa 11 2 Setting NES LANG seeiis iren O E ees KDEa e Eea la ASA Sebi dete os AAE EEEa E NEE aE SE 11 2 Part Ill SQL Plus Reference 12 SQL Plus Command Reference SOL Plus Command Summary inocuidad it tactil daa da arc n ana a 12 2 AU sighi cit as A AA AAA A E E SETE AS 12 5 Qu double at sign 2 iirc sss osc E E E 12 7 MOL O RO NOA 12 9 PG GERD cesses mods naaa caia actos pois ITA Stave cathe tee volar dest iaa Las decai 12 10 APPEN Dina ars eii reia alicia 12 12 ARCHIVE TOG outra diria E e Migas 12 13 ATTRIBUTE 00000 nere ae eea cial acabas E E a a E E Era alain label acosan 12 14 vii viii BIITEE O condado sell ads Ten taba E A E det ves Ii 12 20 CHANGE sia is A AAA AN A fey 12 22 ELA ita ia elias 12 24 COLUMN isos malisima idas 12 26 COMPUTE ss sess eens ocio Sess aR E E EEEE EE Ad e Sats see Sesh 12 34 CONNECT iia Lt A Ga i UNO SA Be ed ee Wee ae Behe 12 39 COPY ise cF sect sie eas sles aes shins cae eas ahaa ahah aus E EE A AA AE 12 42 DEFINE ita do li el steht baca od aio 12 43 Predefined Variables ii A A tt A A EA as 12 45 DEL IA OA IATA A dd 12 48 DESCRIBE GA AA AAA RES 12 50 DISCONNECT cocinan csi AA tenias 12 56 A O 12 57 EXECUTE aut 12 59 O tare vans ate tet a a an ilelae ine ua Wok Mela moat tants dened itiete Mia 12 60 GET cone fees E RA AAA AA Sa obs age nae Pa Rete tin cette itl alte Reser isd seen dees toed 12 62 A A seia ati
83. clause 12 10 12 27 in ATTRIBUTE command 12 14 in COLUMN command 6 3 6 5 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 12 84 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 6 22 12 188 format models number 6 3 12 29 formfeed to begin a new page 6 25 12 131 FROM clause 12 74 B 4 G GET command 12 62 LIST clause 12 62 NOLIST clause 12 62 retrieving scripts 12 62 globalization support Oraclel0g 11 3 glogin profile 12 148 See also login sql site profile 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 11 12 148 GRANT command 9 1 disabling 9 3 H HEAD clause 3 8 HEAD option 3 8 headers aligning elements 6 19 displaying at top of page 12 83 displaying system maintained values 12 83 setting at the start of reports 6 17 suppressing 6 19 HEADING clause 6 1 12 30 HEADING variable 12 121 headings aligning elements 12 84 column headings 12 121 formatting elements 12 84 indenting 12 83 listing current definition 12 83 suppressing definition 12 83 HEADSEP variable 12 90 12 122 use in COLUMN command 6 2 help installing command line 2 6 online 12 63 HELP command command 12 63 HIDE clause 12 11 HOST command 4 9 12 64 Index 7 HTML 7 1 clause 3 8 entities 7 5 option 3 8 spooling to file 3 9 tag 7 1 hyphen continuing a long SQL Plus command 4 7 12 1 IMMEDIATE mode 12 174 infinity sign 12 29 initialization parameters displaying 12 169 12 170 INIT ORA file parameter file 12 181 input accepting Retur
84. clause 12 171 user profile 2 4 glogin sql 2 4 login sql 2 4 See also site profile user variable See substitution variable username 3 1 connecting under different 3 1 12 39 in CONNECT command 3 1 12 39 in COPY command B 4 B 5 B 7 in SOLPLUS command 3 5 3 11 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 12 75 USING clause B 3 B 4 UTF 8 V V SESSION virtual table 12 92 V SQLAREA virtual table 12 92 VALIDATE command disabling 9 3 VARCHAR columns default format 6 5 VARCHAR2 column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 VARCHAR clause VARIABLE command 12 192 VARCHAR columns changing format 12 28 default format 6 5 VARIABLE command 12 191 BFILE clause 12 193 BINARY_DOUBLE clause 12 193 BINARY_FLOAT clause 12 193 BLOB clause 12 193 CHAR clause 12 191 ORDERING CLOB clause 12 193 NCHAR clause 12 192 NCLOB clause 12 193 NUMBER clause 12 191 REFCURSOR clause 12 193 VARCHAR clause 12 192 variable clause 12 191 variables bind variables 5 21 substitution variables 12 43 system variables 4 8 VERIFY clause 5 13 VERIFY variable 5 17 12 91 12 161 W WARNING clause 12 60 web browser 7 1 web outputting reports 7 1 WHENEVER OSERROR command 12 198 COMMIT clause 12 198 CONTINUE clause 12 198 EXIT clause 12 198 NONE clause 12 198 ROLLBACK clause 12 198 WHENEVER SQLERROR command 12 199 COMMIT clause 12 199 CONTINUE clause 12 199 EXIT clause 12 199 NONE clause 12 199 ROLLBACK clause
85. computer and try out the example shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in SQL Plus Quick Start on page xix The COPY command will be deprecated in future releases of SQL Plus After Oracle 9i no new datatypes are supported by COPY COPY Command Syntax Terms COPY FROM database TO database FROM database TO database APPENDICREATEIINSERTIREPLACE destination_table column column column USING query where database has the following syntax username password connect_identifier Copies data from a query to a table in the same or another database COPY supports the following datatypes CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER VARCHAR2 Warning Including your password in plain text is a security risk You can avoid this risk by omitting the password and entering it only when the system prompts for it See the following list for a description of each term or clause FROM database The database that contains the data to be copied If you omit the FROM clause the source defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database SQL Plus COPY Command B 1 COPY Command Syntax that other commands address You must use a FROM clause to specify a source database other than the default The COPY command FROM clause does not support SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged connections TO database The database containing the destination table If you omit the
86. data that the COPY command copies Here is an example of a COPY command that copies only two columns from the source table and copies only those rows in which the value of DEPARTMENT_ID is 30 B 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another COPY FROM HR BOSTONDB REPLACE EMPCOPY2 USING SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID 30 You may find it easier to enter and edit long COPY commands in scripts rather than trying to enter them directly at the command prompt Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table You control the treatment of the destination table by entering one of four control clauses REPLACE CREATE INSERT or APPEND The REPLACE clause names the table to be created in the destination database and specifies the following actions If the destination table already exists COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data a If the destination table does not already exist COPY creates it using the copied data You can use the CREATE clause to avoid accidentally writing over an existing table CREATE specifies the following actions If the destination table already exists COPY reports an error and stops a Ifthe destination table does not already exist COPY creates the table using the copied data Use INSERT to insert data into an existing table INSERT specifies the following actions
87. database instance optional Environment variable to specify the path to search for executables and DLLs in Windows Typically includes ORACLE_HOME bin Environment variable or Windows registry entry to specify the location of SQL scripts SQL Plus searches for SQL scripts including login sql in the current directory and then in the directories specified by SQLPATH and in the subdirectories of SQLPATH directories SQLPATH is a colon separated list of directories There is no default value set in UNIX installations In Windows SQLPATH is defined in a registry entry during installation For more information about the SQLPATH registry entry see SOLPATH Registry Entry on page 2 3 Environment variable to specify the location of the tnsnames ora file If not specified HKORACLE_ HOME network admin is used Example h network var opt oracle UNIX environment variable to specify a connection string Connections that do not specify a database will connect to the database specified in TWO_TASK Example TWO_TASK MYDB export TWO_TASK sqlplus hr is the same as sqlplus hr MYDB 2 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Configuration SQLPATH Registry Entry The SQLPATH registry entry specifies the location of SQL scripts SQL Plus searches for SQL scripts in the current directory and then in the directories specified by the SQLPATH registry entry and in the subdirectories of SQLPATH directories The HK
88. disabling 9 3 message sending to screen 5 19 12 72 MOUNT clause 12 181 mounting a database 12 181 N national language support See also globalization support NCHAR clause VARIABLE command 12 192 NCHAR columns changing format 12 28 default format 6 5 12 27 NCLOB clause VARIABLE command 12 193 NCLOB columns changing format 12 28 default format 12 27 setting maximum width 12 90 12 127 setting retrieval position 12 90 12 125 setting retrieval size 8 9 12 90 12 128 negative infinity sign 12 29 net service name 3 3 NEW_VALUE clause 6 23 12 30 storing current date in variable for titles 12 30 NEWLINE clause 12 30 NEWPAGE command C 1 C 2 NEWPAGE variable 6 25 12 90 12 131 NLS NLS_DATE_FORMAT 12 10 12 33 NLS_LANG charset parameter for Instant Client D 2 environment variables 2 1 language parameter for Instant Client D 1 SQL Plus Instant Client D 1 territory parameter for Instant Client D 1 NOAUDIT command disabling 9 3 NODE variable 12 91 NODE XQUERY option 12 166 N N N N N N N N N N N N NOLIST clause 12 62 NOLOG 3 4 3 12 nolongontime 3 10 OMOUNT clause 12 181 ONE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 12 198 WHENEVER SQLERROR 12 199 OPARALLEL clause 12 76 OPRINT clause 6 13 6 23 8 8 12 30 OPROMPT clause 12 11 ORMAL mode 12 174 otepad on Windows 12 46 ULL clause 12 31 null values setting text displayed 12 31 12 90 12 132 ULL v
89. existing file called DEFAULTENV with the extension OLD enter STORE SET DEFAULTENV OLD APPEND SQL Plus Command Reference 12 185 TIMING TIMING Syntax Terms Usage Examples TIMI NG START text SHOW STOP Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the current timer s name and timing data or lists the number of active timers START text Sets up a timer and makes text the name of the timer You can have more than one active timer by STARTing additional timers before STOPping the first SQL Plus nests each new timer within the preceding one The timer most recently STARTed becomes the current timer SHOW Lists the current timer s name and timing data STOP Lists the current timer s name and timing data then deletes the timer If any other timers are active the next most recently STARTed timer becomes the current timer Enter TIMING with no clauses to list the number of active timers For other information about TIMING see SET AUTOTRACE You can use this data to do a performance analysis on any commands or blocks run during the period See the SET TIMING command for information on automatically displaying timing data after each SQL command or PL SQL block you run To delete all timers use the CLEAR TIMING command To create a timer named SQL_TIMER enter TIMING START SQL_TIMER To list the current timer s title and accumulated time enter TIMING SHOW To list the current timer
90. filename was missing after the SET EDITFILE command Action Check the syntax of the SET EDITFILE command for the correct options SP2 0603 Usage Illegal STORE command Usage STORE SET filenamel ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Cause An invalid option was used in the STORE command Action Check the syntax of the STORE command for the correct options SP2 0605 File file_name already exists Use another name or STORE SET filename ext REPLACE Cause The file specified in the STORE command already exists Action Use the REPLACE option to overwrite the existing file or specify another file name SP2 0606 Cannot create file_name file Cause The STORE command was unable to create the specified file There may be insufficient disk space too many open files or read only protection on the output directory Action Check that there is sufficient disk space and that the protection on the directory enables file creation SP2 0607 Cannot close file_name file Cause The STORE command was unable to close the specified file Another resource may have locked the file Action Check that the file is not locked before closing it SP2 0608 Object object_name is a remote object cannot further describe Cause Unable to DESCRIBE the remote object Action No action required SP2 0609 Usage SET AUTOT RACE OFF ON TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS SQL Plus Error Messages 13 17 SQL Plus Error Messages
91. gt lt td gt lt td gt Seattle lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Executive html gt Executive lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Seattle lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Executive html gt Executive lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Seattle lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Sales html gt Sales lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Oxford lt td gt lt tr gt Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 7 3 Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Sales html gt Sales lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Oxford lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Marketing html gt Marketing lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Toronto lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt p gt 6 rows selected lt br gt SQL amp gt spool off lt br gt lt body gt lt html gt Example 7 2 Creating a Report using the SQLPLUS Command Enter the following command at the operating system prompt SQLPLUS S M HTML ON TABLE BORDER 2 HR Oral0g depart sql gt depart html where depart sql contains SELECT DEPARTMENT_NAME CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 EXIT This example starts SOL Plus with user HR prompts for the HR password sets HTML ON sets a BORDER attribute for TABLE and runs the script depart sql The output from depart sql is a web page
92. i 12 164 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET XQUERY ORDERING UNORDERED ORDERED DEFAULT Example Sets the ordering of output from an XQuery There are three values UNORDERED specifies that results are sorted in the order they are retrieved from the database ORDERED specifies that results are sorted as defined by the XQuery DEFAULT specifies the database default In Oracle Database 10g the default is UNORDERED When SET XQUERY ORDERING is not set the default is DEFAULT UNORDERED SET XQUERY ORDERING ORDERED XQUERY for i in doc foo xml return 1 This is equivalent to XQuery declare ordering ordered for i in doc foo xml return i SQL Plus Command Reference 12 165 SET XQUERY NODE BYVALUE BYREFERENCE DEFAULT SET XQUERY NODE BYVALUE BYREFERENCE DEFAULT Example Sets the node identity preservation mode The preservation mode applies to all expressions that either create a new node such as element constructors or return an item or sequence containing nodes such as path expressions There are three values BYVALUE specifies that the node identity need not be preserved This means that any node operation such as creation or that is returned as a result of an expression is deep copied and loses its context from the original tree Subsequent operations on this node that test for node identity parent or sibling axes or ordering will be undefined
93. ii tildes 12 128 SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF 12 129 SET NEWP AGE i 1 T A NONE ii A dada teeter Sie 12 131 SET NULE texts iii iii 12 132 SET NUME ORMAT format dada dario 12 133 SET NUM WIDTH ALO UN acciona ciao eevee lends Etna E dada dei 12 134 SET PAGES IZE MIA Aci ss 12 135 SETPAU SEMON LOBEE teta talas lo aus nadaa 12 136 SET RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF cocooooncocncoconincnnnonononnononnnonnononnononnononnononnoronnnnonos 12 137 SET REESEPCHAR ii A a ac cas 12 138 SET SECUREDCOL OFF ON UNAUTH ORIZED text UNK NOWN text 12 139 SET SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n UNLITMITED FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED 12 140 SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE sssccsscessssscscscssssssssssvesssssecsesssssssssessesseeees 12 142 SET SHOW MODE ON OEE sscssssssssessesssceccsssssssssssevssssecessesssssnssesesssececsesssssssnseessessecessnte 12 143 SET SOLBL ANKLINES ON QFE cssssscsscccsssssccsssssssssssesesscesecensssssssssessesseceesssssssnenseesseeees 12 144 SET SOLC ASE MIX ED LO WER UP PER sscsscccssssssssssssssevesssssscssssssssseverseseesesenee 12 145 SET SOLCO NTINUE gt text cccscssssssssevsesscssscsssssssssssesssssseceessssssnscevessseceesesstsnssnseessesseceesete 12 146 SET SQLN UMBER ON OFF ai di az 12 147 SET SQLPLUSCOMPAT IBILITY x4y
94. is displayed if the stored procedure has any compilation errors To see the errors you use SHOW ERRORS When you specify SHOW ERRORS with no arguments SOL Plus shows compilation errors for the most recently created or altered stored procedure When you specify the type function procedure package package body trigger view type type body dimension or java class and the name of the PL SQL stored procedure SQL Plus shows errors for that stored procedure For more information on compilation errors see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference schema contains the named object If you omit schema SHOW ERRORS assumes the object is located in your current schema SHOW ERRORS output displays the line and column number of the error LINE COL as well as the error itself ERROR LINE COL and ERROR have default widths of 8 and 65 respectively You can use the COLUMN command to alter the default widths LNO Shows the current line number the position in the current page of the display and or spooled output PARAMETERS parameter_name Displays the current values for one or more initialization parameters You can use a string after the command to see a subset of parameters whose names include that string For example if you enter SHOW PARAMETERS COUNT db_file_multiblock_read_count integer 12 spin_count integer 0 The SHOW PARAMETERS command without any string following the command displays all initialization parameters
95. it to the file TEMP ACME WIDGET EMPLOYEE REPORT PAGE 1 DEPARTMENT LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY 20 Hartstein 13 000 KREERET ERRER 5 Fe a a rh ee a a aa sum 13 000 80 Russell 14 000 Partners 13 500 TIT IR RAR sos 8 AAA AA sum 27 500 90 King 24 000 Kochhar 17 000 De Haan 17 000 RRR RRR 8 RA AE sum 58 000 sum 98 500 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected 6 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus This chapter explains how to generate a HTML report containing your query results This chapter covers the following topics a Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus In addition to plain text output the SQL Plus command line interface enables you to generate either a complete web page or HTML output which can be embedded in a web page You can use SOLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON or SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to produce complete HTML pages automatically encapsulated with lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags By default data retrieved with MARKUP HTML ON is output in HTML though you can optionally direct output to the HTML lt PRE gt tag so that it displays in a web browser exactly as it appears in SQL Plus See the SQLPLUS MARKUP Options on page 3 7 and the SET MARKUP command on page 12 88 for more information about these commands SOLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON is useful when embedding SQL Plus in program scrip
96. nor logon are specified SQL Plus prompts for logon information The following sections contain descriptions of SQLPLUS command options HELP Option H ELP Displays the usage and syntax for the SQLPLUS command and then returns control to the operating system VERSION Option V ERSION Displays the current version and level number for SOL Plus and then returns control to the operating system COMPATIBILITY Option C OMPATIBILITY X 4 4 Sets the value of the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable to the SQL Plus release specified by x y z Where x is the version number y is the release number and z is the update number For example 9 0 1 or 10 2 For more information see the SET SOLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY x y z on page 12 148 LOGON Option L OGON Specifies not to reprompt for username or password if the initial connection does not succeed This can be useful in operating system scripts that must either succeed or fail and you don t want to be reprompted for connection details if the database server is not running MARKUP Options M ARKUP Starting SQL Plus 3 7 SQLPLUS Program Syntax You can use the MARKUP option to generate a complete stand alone web page from your query or script MARKUP currently supports HTML 4 0 transitional Note Depending on your operating system the complete markup_ option clause for the SQLPLUS command may need to be contained in quotes Use SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML
97. normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 When you enter file_name ext SOL Plus searches for a file with that filename and extension in the current default directory If SQL Plus does not find the file in the current directory it searches a system dependent path to find it Some operating systems may not support the path search See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Represent data items you wish to pass to parameters in the script If you enter one or more arguments SQL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the script The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The command defines the parameters with the values given by the arguments if you run the script again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the current values For more information on using parameters see Using Substitution Variables on page 5 12 All previous settings like COLUMN command settings stay in effect when the script starts If the script changes any setting this new value stays in effect after the script has finished You can include in a script any command you would normally enter interactively typically SOL SOL Plus comma
98. not implemented Action Use the appropriate SQL Plus command See the documentation for a list of commands and their correct syntax SP2 0382 The command_name command is not available Cause The command was not recognized or it is disabled This occurs if it is a command that does not have any meaning in SQL Plus such as a SQL buffer editing command or it is not allowed for security reasons Action Remove the command from the script See the documentation for a list of commands and their correct syntax SP2 0392 Cannot UNDEFINE the current edit buffer Cause The current edit buffer cannot be undefined Action No action required SP2 0394 Illegal buffer name buffer_name Cause A buffer name contained an illegal character for example hyphen Action Correct and remove the illegal character from the buffer name SP2 0423 Illegal GET command Cause An invalid option was used in the GET command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0425 value is not a valid datatype Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not valid for the specified datatype Action Enter a valid value e g 123 for a NUMBER variable SP2 0426 Input truncated to number_of_characters characters Cause There was no carriage return at the last line of the SQL statement Action Insert a carriage return SP2 0495 FROM and TO clauses both missing specify at least one 13 12 SQL Plus User s Guid
99. obsolete Specifies the version of the SQL language parsing syntax to use Set COMPATIBILITY to V7 for Oracle7 or to V8 for Oracle8 or later COMPATIBILITY always defaults to NATIVE Set COMPATIBILITY for the version of Oracle Database SQL syntax you want to use on the connected database otherwise The default compatibility setting NATIVE is the most relevant setting for modern Oracle databases For information about SQL Plus version compatibility settings see SET SOLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY x y z on page 12 148 Example To run a script SALARY SOL created with Oracle7 SOL syntax enter SET COMPATIBILITY V7 START SALARY After running the file reset compatibility to NATIVE to run scripts created for Oracle Database 10g SET COMPATIBILITY NATIVE Alternatively you can add the command SET COMPATIBILITY V7 to the beginning of the script and reset COMPATIBILITY to NATIVE at the end of the file SET CLOSECUR SOR ONIOFF obsolete Sets the cursor usage behavior On or OFF sets whether or not the cursor will close and reopen after each SQL statement This feature may be useful in some circumstances to release resources in the database server SET DOC UMENT ONIOFF obsolete Displays or suppresses blocks of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command SET DOCUMENT ON causes blocks of documentation to be echoed to the screen Set DOCUMENT OFF suppresses the display of blocks of documentation See DOC UMENT
100. obsolete on page C 2 for information on the DOCUMENT command SET MAXD ATA n obsolete Sets the maximum total row width that SQL Plus can process In SOL Plus the maximum row width is now unlimited Any values you set using SET MAXDATA are ignored by SQL Plus Obsolete SQL Plus Commands C 3 SET SCAN ONIOFF obsolete SET SCAN ONIOFF obsolete Controls scanning for the presence of substitution variables and parameters OFF suppresses processing of substitution variables and parameters ON enables normal processing ON functions in the same manner as SET DEFINE ON SET SPACE 1In obsolete Sets the number of spaces between columns in output The maximum value of n is 10 The SET SPACE 0 and SET COLSEP commands have the same effect This command is obsoleted by SET COLSEP but you can still use it for backward compatibility You may prefer to use COLSEP because the SHOW command recognizes COLSEP and does not recognize SPACE SET TRU NCATE ONIOFF obsolete Controls whether SQL Plus truncates or wraps a data item that is too long for the current line width ON functions in the same manner as SET WRAP OFF and vice versa You may prefer to use WRAP because the SHOW command recognizes WRAP and does not recognize TRUNCATE TTI TLE text obsolete old form Displays a title at the top of each report page The old form of TTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but prov
101. operating systems sqlplus SQL Plus Release 12 1 0 1 0 Production on Wed Dec 19 01 20 05 2012 Copyright c 1982 2012 Oracle All rights reserved Connected to Oracle Database 12c Enterprise Edition Release 12 1 0 1 0 64bit Production With the Partitioning Advanced Analytics and Real Application Testing options so gt E When SQL Plus starts it displays the date and time the SQL Plus version and copyright information before the SQL Plus prompt appears The default prompt for SOL Plus command line is SQL gt Changing the Command line Font and Font Size In Windows from a Command Prompt open the Command Prompt Properties dialog to set the font and font size used in the SQL Plus command line interface To Change the Command line Interface Font and Font Size 1 Right click in the command line interface title bar 2 Click Properties The Window Preview box displays the current window s relative size on your monitor based on your font and font size selections The Selected Font box displays a sample of the current font 3 Click the Font tab 4 Select the font size to use from the Size box Raster font sizes are shown as width by height in pixels TrueType font sizes are shown as height in pixels 5 Select the font to use from the Font box SQL Plus User Interface 1 1 Changing the Command line Font and Font Size 6 Select the Bold Fonts check box to use a bold version of the font For more information abo
102. parsed for substitution To have a SQL Plus prompt of your username followed by and then your connection identifier enter SET SQLPROMPT _USER _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt SQL Plus Command Reference 12 151 SET SQLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF SET SQLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF Sets the character used to end script or data entry for PL SQL blocks or SQL statements to execute the script and to load it into the buffer It cannot be an alphanumeric character or a whitespace OFF means that SQL Plus recognizes no command terminator you terminate a SQL command by entering an empty line or a slash If SQLBLANKLINES is set ON you must use the BLOCKTERMINATOR to terminate a SOL command ON resets the terminator to the default semicolon 12 152 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET SUF FIX SQL text Example Sets the default file extension that SQL Plus uses in commands that refer to scripts SUFFIX does not control extensions for spool files To change the default command file extension from the default SQL to TXT enter SET SUFFIX TXT If you then enter GET EXAMPLE SQL Plus will look for a file named EXAMPLE TXT instead of EXAMPLE SQL SQL Plus Command Reference 12 153 SET TAB ON OFF SET TAB ON OFF Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal output OFF uses spaces to format white space in the output ON uses the TAB chara
103. path as PRINTRPT and runs it Suppose that the same script PRINTRPT was located on a web server and you ran it with START HTTP machine_name domain port PRINTRPT When it reaches the command it looks for the script named EMPRPT in the current working directory and runs it When PRINTRPT reaches the command it looks for the script named WKRPT in the same url as PRINTRPT HTTP machine_ name domain port WKRPT SQL and runs it 12 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference slash slash Syntax Usage Examples slash Executes the most recently executed SQL command or PL SQL block which is stored in the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history and does not record SQL Plus commands You can enter a slash at the command prompt or at a line number prompt of a multi line command The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command Executing a SQL command or PL SQL block using the slash command will not cause the current line number in the SQL buffer to change unless the command in the buffer contains an error In that case SOL Plus changes the current line number to the number of the line containing the error Type the following SQL script SELECT CITY COUNTRY_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY 12000 Enter a slash to re execute the command in the buffer CITY COUNTRY_NAME Seattle United States of America Oxford United Kingdom Seattle United
104. printing computed figures each time a given column value changes or at the end of the report See the COMPUTE command on page 12 34 Enter BREAK with no clauses to list the current BREAK definition ON column action action When you include actions specifies actions for SQL Plus to take whenever a break occurs in the specified column called the break column column cannot have a table or view appended to it To achieve this you can alias the column in the SQL statement A break is one of three events a change in the value of a column or expression the output of a row or the end of a report When you omit actions BREAK ON column suppresses printing of duplicate values in column and marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can specify ON column one or more times If you specify multiple ON clauses as in BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP PAGE ON JOB_ID SKIP 1 ON SALARY SKIP 1 the first ON clause represents the outermost break in this case ON DEPARTMENT_ ID and the last ON clause represents the innermost break in this case ON SALARY SOL Plus searches each row of output for the specified breaks starting with the outermost break and proceeding in the order you enter the clauses to the innermost In the example SOL Plus searches for a change in the value of DEPARTMENT_ID then JOB_ID then SALARY Next SOL Plus executes actions beginning wi
105. privileges to open the file A system error made it impossible to open the file Action Take the following actions a Make sure the file name specified is stored in the appropriate directory a Make sure that the file has the privileges necessary for access If it does not then change privileges accordingly Consult operating system documentation or contact the System Administrator SP2 0161 line line_number truncated Cause The line in the file was too long Action No action required or reduce the length of the line SP2 0162 unable to close file_name Cause Unable to close the specified file as it was being used Action Release the file from the other process SP2 0171 HELP system not available Cause Command line SQL Plus help is not installed in this Oracle instance Action Command line SQL Plus help is not installed in this Oracle instance Use the sqlplus admin help hlpbld sql script to install HELP on this database sqlplus system hlpbld sql helpus sql SP2 0172 No HELP matching this topic was found Cause There is no help information available for the specified command Action Enter HELP INDEX for a list of topics SP2 0176 Option Is invalid Cause The option is not valid in this command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0187 error in variable assignment Cause The assignment for the specified variable was incorrect Action Check the syntax of the
106. processes bytes received through Total number of bytes received from the client over Oracle Net Oracle Net Services from client Oracle Net Services Total number of Oracle Net messages sent to and received round trips to from from the client client sorts memory Number of sort operations that were performed completely in memory and did not require any disk writes sorts disk Number of sort operations that required at least one disk write rows processed Number of rows processed during the operation The client referred to in the statistics is SQL Plus Oracle Net refers to the generic process communication between SQL Plus and the server regardless of whether Oracle Net is installed You cannot change the default format of the statistics report For a more complete list of database statistics see the Oracle Database Reference For more information about the statistics and how to interpret them see Chapter 3 Gathering Optimizer Statistics in the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide Example 8 4 Tracing Statements for Performance Statistics and Query Execution Path If the SOL buffer contains the following statement SELECT E LAST_NAME E SALARY J JOB_TITLE FROM EMPLOYEES E JOBS J WHERE E JOB_ID J JOB_ID AND E SALARY gt 12000 Tuning SQL Plus 8 3 Tracing Statements The statement can be automatically traced when it is run SET AUTOTRACE ON King De Haan Kochhar Partners Russell Hartstein
107. prompt for its value in the current session Example 5 10 Using Double Ampersands To expand the script STATS using double ampersands and then run the file first suppress the display of each line before and after substitution SET VERIFY OFF 5 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Substitution Variables Now retrieve and edit STATS by entering the following commands GET STATS SELECT amp GROUP_COL MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM FROM amp TABLE GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM APPEND 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM CHANGE amp amp amp 2 MAX amp amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM MIN amp amp NUMBER_COL MINIMUM SUM amp amp NUMBER_COL TOTAL AVG amp amp NUMBER_COL AVERAGE 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL CHANGE amp amp amp 1 SELECT amp amp GROUP_COL 7 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 15 Using Substitution Variables CHANGE amp amp amp 7 GROUP BY amp amp GROUP_COL SAVE STATS2 Created file STATS2 Finally run the script STATS2 and respond to the prompts as follows START STATS2 Enter value for group_col JOB_ID Enter value for number_col SALARY Enter value for table EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SQL Plus displays the following output JOB_ID MAXIMUM MINIMUM TOTAL AVERAGE AC_ACCOUNT 8300 8300 8300 8300 AC_MGR 12000 12000 12000 12000 AD_ASST 440
108. responsible for creating the databases you use and defining net service names for them in the tnsnames ora file A net service name definition in the tnsnames ora file has the syntax net_service_name DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST host PORT port CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME service_name To use a net service name alias it must have an entry in the tnsnames ora file on the machine running SQL Plus An entry in tnsnames ora is not required if you use a connection identifier Example 3 1 The tnsnames ora entry for the sales database SALES1 DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST sales server PORT 1521 CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME sales us acme com Example 3 2 Start a command line session to the sales database using the net service name SQLPLUS hr SALES1 See the Oracle Database Net Services Reference and the Oracle Database Net Services Administrator s Guide for more information about database connections and net service name definitions Full Connection Identifier Depending on your configuration use the full connection identifier syntax like DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST host PORT port CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME service_name The SERVICE_NAME is the global database name entered during database creation It combines a database name with a domain name For example the SERVICE_NAME sales us acme com has a database name of sales and a domain o
109. rows selected Elapsed 00 00 00 01 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 157 SET TRIM OUT ON OFF SET TRIM OUT ON OFF Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the end of each displayed line ON removes blanks at the end of each line improving performance especially when you access SQL Plus from a slow communications device OFF enables SQL Plus to display trailing blanks TRIMOUT ON does not affect spooled output 12 158 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET TRIMS POOL ON OFF Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the end of each spooled line ON removes blanks at the end of each line OFF enables SQL Plus to include trailing blanks TRIMSPOOL ON does not affect terminal output SQL Plus Command Reference 12 159 SET UND ERLINE c ON OFF SET UND ERLINE c ON OFF Sets the character used to underline column headings in reports The underline character cannot be an alphanumeric character or a white space ON or OFF turns underlining on or off ON changes the value of c back to the default 12 160 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET VER IFY ON OFF Controls whether to list the text of a SQL statement or PL SQL command before and after replacing substitution variables with values ON lists the text OFF suppresses the listing SQL Plus Command Reference 12 161 SET WRA P ON OFF
110. s Guide and Reference C Obsolete SQL Plus Commands This appendix covers earlier versions of some SQL Plus commands While these older commands still function in SOL Plus they are not supported It is recommended that you use the alternative SQL Plus commands listed in the following table SQL Plus Obsolete Command Alternatives Obsolete commands are available in current releases of SOL Plus In future releases they may only be available by setting the SOLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY variable You should modify scripts using obsolete commands to use the alternative commands Obsolete Alternative Description of Alternative Command Command Command BTITLE BTITLE on page 12 20 Places and formats a title at the bottom old form of each report page or lists the current COLUMN DEFAULT COLUMN CLEAR on page 12 26 DOCUMENT REMARK on page 12 80 NEWPAGE SET NEWP AGE 1 n NONE on page 12 131 SET BUFFER EDIT on page 12 57 SET COMPATIBILITY none SET CLOSECURSOR none SET DOCUMENT none SET MAXDATA none SET SCAN SET DEF INE amp c ON OFF on page 12 105 SET SPACE SET COLSEP text on page 12 101 BTITLE definition Resets column display attributes to default values Places a comment which SQL Plus does not interpret as a command Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of each page to the top title Enables the editing of the SQL Plus command buffer or the contents of a saved file Us
111. set when running Instant Client applications it must be set to a directory that exists Connecting to a Different Database From an existing command line session enter a CONNECT command in the form SQL gt connect username connect_identifier You are prompted to enter your password Sample Schemas and SQL Plus Sample schemas are included with the Oracle Database Examples in this guide use the EMP_DETAILS_VIEW view of the Human Resources HR sample schema This schema contains personnel records for a fictitious company To view column details for the view EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW For more information about the sample schemas see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide Unlocking the Sample Tables The Human Resources HR Sample Schema is installed as part of the default Oracle Database installation The HR account is locked by default You must unlock the HR account before you can use the HR sample schema To unlock the HR account log in as the SYSTEM user and enter the following command where your_password is the password you want to define for the user HR ALTER USER HR IDENTIFIED BY your_password ACCOUNT UNLOCK For further information about unlocking the HR account see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide The HR user is primarily to enable you to access the HR sample schema and is necessary to enable you to run the examples in this guide Each table in the database is owned by a par
112. substitution variables named MYVAR1 and MYVAR2 enter UNDEFINE MYVAR1 MYVAR2 12 190 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE VARIABLE Syntax Terms VAR IABLE variable type where type represents one of the following NUMBER CHAR CHAR n CHAR BYTE NCHAR NCHAR n VARCHARZ2 n CHAR BYTE NVARCHARZ2 n BLOB BFILE CLOB NCLOB REFCURSOR BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_DOUBLE Declares a bind variable that can be referenced in PL SQL VARIABLE without arguments displays a list of all the variables declared in the session VARIABLE followed only by a variable name lists that variable To free resources used by BLOB BFILE CLOB and NCLOB bind variables you may need to manually free temporary LOBs with EXECUTE DBMS_LOB FREETEMPORARY cv See Using Bind Variables on page 5 21 for more information on bind variables See your Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference for more information about PL SQL variable Represents the name of the bind variable you wish to create NUMBER Creates a variable of type NUMBER with fixed length CHAR Creates a variable of type CHAR character with length one CHAR n CHAR BYTE Creates a variable of type CHAR with length n bytes or n characters The maximum that n can be is 2000 bytes and the minimum is 1 byte or 1 character The maximum n for a CHAR variable with character semantics is determined by the number of bytes SQL Plus Command Reference 1
113. suppressed The log sequence increments every time the Log Writer begins to write to another redo log file group it does not indicate the number of logs being used Every time an online redo log file group is reused the contents are assigned a new log sequence number You must be connected to an open Oracle database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA For information about connecting to the database see the CONNECT command on page 12 39 For information about specifying archive destinations see your platform specific Oracle Database documentation Note ARCHIVE LOG LIST only applies to the current instance To START and STOP archiving use the SQL command ALTER SYSTEM For more information about using SOL commands see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference SQL Plus Command Reference 12 13 ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE Syntax Terms ATTR IBUTE type_name attribute_name option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI AS alias CLE AR FOR MAT format LIKE type_name attribute_name alias ON OFF Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an Object Type column such as the format of NUMBER data Columns and attributes should not have the same names as they share a common namespace Also lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes Enter ATTRIBUTE followed by type_name attribute_name and no other clauses to list the current display c
114. the SPOOL command for the correct options SP2 0769 Usage SPOOL lt file gt OFF OUT where lt file gt is file_name ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Cause Incorrect syntax for the SPOOL command was entered Action Check the syntax of the SPOOL command for the correct usage SP2 0771 File filename already exists Use another name or SPOOL filenamel extl REPLACE Cause The file specified in the SPOOL command already exists Action Use the REPLACE option to overwrite the existing file or specify another file name SP2 0772 Automatic Storage Manager instance started Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0773 Automatic Storage Manager diskgroups mounted Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0774 Automatic Storage Manager instance shutdown 13 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0775 Automatic Storage Manager diskgroups dismounted Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0776 Invalid schema and object separator in SHOW ERRORS object Cause Invalid syntax was found in the object name submitted as an argument to SHOW ERRORS Action If a schema is specified check that the schema and object names are separated by a period SP2 0777 Invalid single quotes in SHOW ERRORS object Cause Invalid syntax was found in the object name submitted as an argument to SHOW ERRORS Action If the SHOW ERRORs
115. the control file and archived redo log files copied from the primary database The standby database must be mounted but not open DATABASE Recovers the entire database UNTIL CANCEL Specifies an incomplete cancel based recovery Recovery proceeds by prompting you with suggested filenames of archived redo log files and recovery completes when you specify CANCEL instead of a filename UNTIL TIME Specifies an incomplete time based recovery Use single quotes and the following format YYYY MM DD HH24 MI SS UNTIL CHANGE Specifies an incomplete change based recovery integer is the number of the System Change Number SCN following the last change you wish to recover For example if you want to restore your database up to the transaction with an SCN of 9 you would specify UNTIL CHANGE 10 USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE Specifies that a backup of the control file be used instead of the current control file TABLESPACE Recovers a particular tablespace tablespace is the name of a tablespace in the current database You may recover up to 16 tablespaces in one statement DATAFILE Recovers a particular datafile You can specify any number of datafiles STANDBY TABLESPACE Reconstructs a lost or damaged tablespace in the standby database using archived redo log files copied from the primary database and a control file STANDBY DATAFILE Reconstructs a lost or damaged datafile in the standby database using archived redo log files co
116. the location of the Oracle software Make sure this value is set correctly Check that the SQL Plus binary message files exist in the SQL Plus message directory for example ORACLE_ HOME sqlplus mesg Check the value of NLS_LANG environment variable or registry equivalent is correct SP2 0668 Invalid variable name Cause An invalid character was specified as part of the variable name Action Specify the variable with valid characters SP2 0669 Valid characters are alphanumerics and _ Cause An invalid character was specified as part of the variable name Action Specify the variable with alphanumeric characters and _ SP2 0670 Internal number conversion failed Cause A conversion request could not be performed because the string contained alphanumeric characters Action Make sure that the string only contains numeric digits SP2 0675 COPY command not available Cause The COPY command is not available in this version of SQL Plus Action Make a note of the message and the number then contact Oracle Support Services SP2 0676 Bind variable length cannot exceed variable_length units_of_variable 13 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Cause The length of the bind variable datatype was exceeded Action Reduce the length of the bind variable datatype SP2 0678 Column or attribute type can not be displayed by SOL Plus Cause The type specified is not supported Action Rewrite the query to
117. the predefined value of the SQLPLUS_RELEASE substitution variable enter DEFINE _SQLPLUS_RELEASE DEFINE _SOLPLUS_RELEASE 1201000100 CHAR SQL Plus Command Reference 12 47 DEL DEL Syntax Terms Usage Examples DEL n nm n nLAST n LAST LAST Deletes one or more lines of the buffer SQL Plus commands are not stored in the buffer There is no history of commands previously entered in the buffer Term Description n Deletes line n nm Deletes lines n through m n Deletes line n through the current line n LAST Deletes line n through the last line a Deletes the current line n Deletes the current line through line n LAST Deletes the current line through the last line LAST Deletes the last line Enter DEL with no clauses to delete the current line of the buffer DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line You can enter DEL several times to delete several consecutive lines Note DEL is a SOL Plus command and DELETE is a SOL command For more information about the SOL DELETE command see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference Assume the SQL buffer contains the following query SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT ID FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA _MAN ORDER BY DEPARTMENT ID To make the line containing the WHERE clause the current line you could enter LIST 3 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN followed by 12 48 SQL Plus User s G
118. the value SMITH enter the following command DEFINE L_NAME SMITH To confirm the variable definition enter DEFINE followed by the variable name DEFINE L_NAME DEFINE L_NAME SMITH CHAR To list all substitution variable definitions enter DEFINE by itself Note that any substitution variable you define explicitly through DEFINE takes only CHAR values that is the value you assign to the variable is always treated as a CHAR datatype Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 11 Using Predefined Variables You can define a substitution variable of datatype NUMBER implicitly through the ACCEPT command You will learn more about the ACCEPT command To delete a substitution variable use the SOL Plus command UNDEFINE followed by the variable name Using Predefined Variables There are eight variables containing SOL Plus information that are defined during SOL Plus installation These variables can be redefined referenced or removed the same as any other variable They are always available from session to session unless you explicitly remove or redefine them See Also Predefined Variables on page 12 45 for a list of the predefined variables and examples of their use Using Substitution Variables Suppose you want to write a query like the one in SALES see Example 5 1 Using a System Editor to Write a SQL Script to list the employees with various jobs not just those whose job is SA_MAN You could do that by editing a di
119. tnsnames ora This is the only reason to set the ORACLE_HOME environment variable for SQL Plus Instant Client If ORACLE HOME is set when running Instant Client applications it must be set to a directory that exists This example assumes the ORACLE_HOME environment variable is set and the ORACLE_HOME network admin tnsnames ora or ORACLE _ HOME network admin tnsnames ora file defines the Net Service Name MYDB3 sqlplus hr MYDB3 The TWO_TASK on UNIX or LOCAL on Windows environment variable can be set to a connection identifier This removes the need to explicitly enter the connection identifier whenever a connection is made in SQL Plus or SOL Plus Instant Client This UNIX example connects to the database known as MYDB4 TNS_ADMIN home user1 export TNS_ADMIN D 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Uninstalling Instant Client TWO_TASK MYDB4 export TWO_TASK sqlplus hr On Windows TNS_ADMIN and LOCAL may be set in the System Properties See Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on Windows on page D 5 AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER Connections with SQL Plus Instant Client To connect AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER to perform DBA tasks you need to set up an Oracle password file on the database server using the database s orapwd utility Once this is configured your SQL Plus Instant Client connection string might look something like sqlplus sys MYDB AS SYSDBA See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information on Oracle pa
120. to aL ni tE Ata a a 5 5 Addinig a New Line aci ia aid 5 6 Deleting LINES Karras ibien aea ea Eei eae Ea a aE aeaa Aaaa baa Dea tabi 5 7 Placing Comments in Scripts reegen iese aa iaeei aini eoig i easi 5 7 Using the REMARK Command ecicccocicncnnnnnnonnnnonncnnnnonononononononononnnnanin no cnn Eai E e ne tei aa 5 7 IATA E EE ste cused Sex csten stss E A E EA E E E db axs tyes coh 5 7 USINE alii aliarse 5 8 Notes on Placing Comments viii ii A a i A id 5 8 RRUMMIN G Seri pes oia Ai A A 5 10 Running a Script as You Start SQL PIUS cece cscs csesesesescscseseseecscsessssseessesssnsseseseees 5 10 Nesting AAA RT 5 11 Exiting from a Script with a Return Code ooociccicinicinnnnnnnoninnnnonnnnoncnnororonno nono ro ron cion ro ron cnn ono ro ran nacio 5 11 Defining Substitution Variables 0 0 0 cc ccc cece eee ce ceeeeseseececesessnenececeseseneseseseseseneseseseenes 5 11 Using Predefined Variables comi id is 5 12 Using Substitution Variables s ccis cccccicstece icc tescecie ca siscsese i a is 5 12 Where and How to Use Substitution Variables cece cece eeeesseeeecssseeeteneesesseneseenags 5 12 Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values ccccceccsssesesescssneesescsesesesescsescsssesescscsssnsneeeesees 5 14 IRESEPICELOMS r tion coven a ATER EAE cies lian Spades va dias detenido dees 5 17 System Variables TAE A Oe A ias 5 17 Passing Parameters through the START Command ocinnicicinnnnnininnnnnnoncnnonononnnninconornnninoncnrorancncnos
121. tracing queries 8 6 8 7 tracing statements for performance statistics 8 3 for query execution path 8 3 with parallel query option 8 6 TRIMOUT variable 12 91 12 158 TRIMSPOOL variable 12 91 12 159 TRUNCATE command disabling 9 3 TRUNCATE variable C 2 C 4 TRUNCATED clause 6 6 12 31 TTITLE clause 12 171 TTITLE command 6 18 12 187 aligning title elements 6 19 12 188 BOLD clause 12 188 CENTER clause 6 20 12 188 COL clause 6 20 12 188 FORMAT clause 6 22 12 188 indenting titles 6 20 12 188 LEFT clause 6 20 12 188 listing current definition 6 22 12 188 OFF clause 6 22 12 187 old form C 4 ON clause 6 23 referencing column value variable 6 23 12 30 restoring current definition 6 23 RIGHT clause 6 20 12 188 SKIP clause 6 20 12 188 suppressing current definition 6 22 12 187 TAB clause 12 188 tuning SET APPINFO OFF 8 8 SET ARRAYSIZE 8 8 SET DEFINE OFF 8 9 Index 16 SET FLUSH OFF 8 9 SET TRIMOUT ON 8 10 SET TRIMSPOOL ON 8 10 SQL Plus 8 1 system variables 8 8 TWO_TASK environment variables 2 2 U UNDEFINE command 5 12 12 190 and DEFINE command 12 43 UNDERLINE variable 12 91 12 160 unicode UNIX ed 12 46 installing SOL Plus Instant Client D 2 SQL Plus Instant Client files to copy D 4 unlocking sample tables 0 xxiii UNTIL CANCEL clause 12 75 UNTIL CHANGE clause 12 75 UNTIL CONTROLEFILE clause 12 75 UNTIL TIME clause 12 75 UPDATE command disabling 9 3 USER
122. used instead of the supplied value SQL Plus Command Reference 12 43 DEFINE Examples Some variables are predefined when SQL Plus starts Enter DEFINE to see their definitions To assign the value MANAGER to the variable POS type DEFINE POS MANAGER If you execute a command containing a reference to amp POS SOL Plus substitutes the value MANAGER for amp POS and will not prompt you for a POS value To assign the CHAR value 20 to the variable DEPARTMENT_ID type DEFINE DEPARTMENT_ID 20 Even though you enter the number 20 SQL Plus assigns a CHAR value to DEPARTMENT_ID consisting of two characters 2 and 0 To list the definition of DEPARTMENT_ID enter DEFINE DEPARTMENT_ID DEFINE DEPARTMENT_ID 20 CHAR This result shows that the value of DEPARTMENT _ID is 20 12 44 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE Predefined Variables There are eight variables defined during SQL Plus installation These variables only differ from user defined variables by having predefined values Table 12 3 Variables Predefined at SQL Plus Installation Variable Name Contains _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER Connection identifier used to make connection where available _DATE Current date or a user defined fixed string _EDITOR Specifies the editor used by the EDIT command _O_VERSION Current version of the installed Oracle Database _O_RELEASE Full release number of the installed Oracle Database _PRIVIL
123. variable named PSWD and suppress the display enter ACCEPT pswd CHAR PROMPT Password HIDE To display the prompt Enter weekly salary and place the reply in a NUMBER variable named SALARY with a default of 000 0 enter ACCEPT salary NUMBER FORMAT 999 99 DEFAULT 000 0 PROMPT Enter weekly salary To display the prompt Enter date hired and place the reply in a DATE variable HIRED with the format dd mm yyyy and a default of 01 01 2003 enter ACCEPT hired DATE FORMAT dd mm yyyy DEFAULT 01 01 2003 PROMPT Enter date hired To display the prompt Enter employee lastname and place the reply ina CHAR variable named LASTNAME enter ACCEPT lastname CHAR FORMAT A20 PROMPT Enter employee lastname SQL Plus Command Reference 12 11 APPEND APPEND Syntax Examples A PPEND text where text represents the text to append Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands To separate text from the preceding characters with a space enter two spaces between APPEND and text To APPEND text that ends with a semicolon end the command with two semicolons SQL Plus interprets a single semicolon as an optional command terminator To append a comma delimiter a space and the column name CITY to the first line of the buffer make that line the current line by listing the line as follows 1 1 SE
124. which in this case has been redirected to the file depart html using the gt operating system redirect command it may be different on your operating system It could be sent to a web browser if SQL Plus was called in a web server CGI script See Suppressing the Display of SOL Plus Commands in Reports on page 7 5 for information about calling SQL Plus from a CGI script Start your web browser and enter the appropriate URL to open depart html DEPARTMENT NAME CITY Executive Seattle Executive Seattle Executive Seattle Sales Oxford Sales Oxford Marketing Toronto 6 rows selected The SOLPLUS command in this example contains three layers of nested quotes From the inside out these are a 2 isa quoted HTML attribute value for BORDER a BORDER 2 is the quoted text argument for the TABLE option a HTML ON TABLE BORDER 2 is the quoted argument for the MARKUP option The nesting of quotes may be different in some operating systems or program scripting languages 7 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus Suppressing the Display of SQL Plus Commands in Reports The SQLPLUS SILENT option is particularly useful when used in combination with MARKUP to generate embedded SQL Plus reports using CGI scripts or operating system scripts It suppresses the display of SQL Plus commands and the SQL Plus banner The HTML output shows only the data resulting
125. width 6 25 8 9 12 90 12 124 deleting all in buffer 12 48 deleting from buffer 5 7 12 48 determining which is current 5 4 editing current 5 4 listing all in buffer 5 3 12 67 removing blanks atend 12 158 LINESIZE variable 6 19 6 25 12 90 12 124 Linux installing SOL Plus Instant Client D 2 SOL Plus Instant Client files to copy D 4 LIST clause 12 13 12 62 LIST command 5 3 12 67 determining current line 5 4 12 67 making last line current 5 4 12 67 using an asterisk 5 3 12 67 LNO clause 12 169 LOBOFFSET variable 12 90 12 125 LOCAL environment variables 2 1 LOCK TABLE command disabling 9 4 LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST parameter 12 13 LOGFILE clause 12 74 logging off conditionally 12 198 12 199 Oracle Database 3 2 12 56 SQL Plus 3 6 12 60 logging on Oracle Database 12 39 SQL Plus 3 5 login user profile 2 4 login sql 2 4 LONG column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 LONG columns changing format 12 28 default format 12 27 setting maximum width 12 90 12 127 setting retrieval size 8 9 12 90 12 128 LONG variable 12 90 12 127 effect on COPY command B 3 B 6 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 6 5 12 27 12 90 12 128 12 129 LONGRAW column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 MARKUP 3 7 7 1 SOLPLUS command clause 3 8 MARKUP 3 7 7 1 12 129 BODY clause 3 8 ENTMAP clause 3 9 HEAD clause 3 8 PREFORMAT clause 3 10 TABLE clause 3 8 MAXDATA variable C 1 C 3 media recovery 12 182 MERGE command
126. you to the database with the specification BOSTONDB as HR Notice that you do not need a semicolon at the end of the command COPY is a SOL Plus command not a SOL command even though it contains a query Since most COPY commands are longer than one line you must use a line continuation hyphen optionally preceded by a space at the end of each line except the last Interpreting the Messages that COPY Displays The first three messages displayed by COPY show the values of SET command variables that affect the COPY operation The most important one is LONG which limits the length of a LONG column s value LONG is a datatype similar to CHAR If the source table contains a LONG column COPY truncates values in that column to the length specified by the system variable LONG The variable ARRAYSIZE limits the number of rows that SOL Plus fetches from the database at one time This number of rows makes up a batch The variable COPYCOMMIT sets the number of batches after which COPY commits changes to the database If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY commits changes only after all batches are copied For more information on SET variables including how to change their settings see the SET command on page 12 88 After listing the three system variables and their values COPY tells you if a table was dropped created or updated during the copy Then COPY lists the number of rows selected inserted and committed Specifying Another User s
127. your customized text or the default indicators This only applies to scalar data types Complex Object data output is not affected ON displays the default indicator in place of column values for users without is unknown The indicators and are filled to the defined column length or the column length defined by a current COLUMN command OFF displays null values in place of column values for users without authorization and in place of column values where the security level is unknown UNAUTH ORIZED text enables you to specify the text to be displayed in a secured column for users without authorization This text appears instead of the default You can specify any alpha numeric text up to the column length or a maximum of 30 characters Longer text is truncated Text containing spaces must be quoted UNK NOWN text enables you to specify the text to be displayed in a column of You can specify any alpha numeric text up to the column length or a maximum of 30 characters Longer text is truncated Text containing spaces must be quoted SET SECUREDCOL ON SELECT empno ename sal FROM emp ORDER BY deptno EMPNO ENAME DEPTNO SAL 7539 KING 10 KR KK KK 7369 SMITH 20 800 7566 JONES 20 2975 7788 SCOTT 20 3000 7521 WARD 30 KKKKKKKE 7499 ALLEN 30 KKK KKK SET SECUREDCOL ON UNAUTH notallow SELECT empno ename sal FROM emp ORDER BY deptno EMPNO ENAME DEPTNO SAL 7539 KING 10 notallow 7369 SMITH 20 800 7566
128. 0 4400 4400 4400 AD_PRES 24000 24000 24000 24000 AD_VP 17000 17000 34000 17000 FI_ACCOUNT 9000 6900 39600 7920 FI_MGR 12000 12000 12000 12000 HR_REP 6500 6500 6500 6500 IT_PROG 9000 4200 28800 5760 MK_MAN 13000 13000 13000 13000 MK_REP 6000 6000 6000 6000 JOB_ID MAXIMUM MINIMUM TOTAL AVERAGE PR_REP 10000 10000 0000 10000 PU_CLERK 3100 2500 3900 2780 PU_MAN 11000 11000 1000 11000 SA_MAN 14000 10500 61000 12200 SA_REP 11500 6100 250500 8350 SH_CLERK 4200 2500 64300 3215 ST_CLERK 3600 2100 55700 2785 ST_MAN 8200 5800 36400 7280 19 rows selected Note that you were prompted for the values of NUMBER_COL and GROUP_COL only once If you were to run STATS2 again during the current session you would be prompted for TABLE because its name has a single ampersand and the variable is therefore not DEFINEd but not for GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL because their names have double ampersands and the variables are therefore DEFINEd Before continuing set the system variable VERIFY back to ON SET VERIFY ON 5 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Passing Parameters through the START Command Restrictions You cannot use substitution variables in the buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE DEL and INPUT nor in other commands where substitution would be meaningless The buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE and INPUT treat text beginning with amp or amp amp literally like any other text string System Variables The foll
129. 0 90 REMARK Includes only salesmen SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW Include only salesmen WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 7 Placing Comments in Scripts Using You can use ANSI ISO style comments within SQL statements PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands Since there is no ending delimiter the comment cannot span multiple lines For PL SQL and SQL enter the comment after a command on a line or on a line by itself Commissions report to be run monthly DECLARE block for reporting monthly sales For SQL Plus commands you can only include style comments if they are on a line by themselves For example these comments are legal set maximum width for LONG to 777 SET LONG 777 This comment is illegal SET LONG 777 set maximum width for LONG to 777 If you enter the following SQL Plus command SQL Plus interprets it as a comment and does not execute the command SET LONG 777 Notes on Placing Comments SOL Plus does not have a SQL or PL SQL command parser It scans the first few keywords of each new statement to determine the command type SQL PL SQL or SQL Plus Comments in some locations can prevent SQL Plus from correctly identifying the command type giving unexpected results The following usage notes may help you to use SQL Plus comments more effectively 1 Do not put comments within the first few keywords of a statement For examp
130. 000 3 Cambrault 11 000 3 Zlotkey 10 500 2 Use a zero in your format model as shown when you use other formats such as a dollar sign and wish to display a zero in place of a blank for zero values Formatting Datatypes When displaying datatypes you can either accept the SOL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one reset the column s format with COLUMN column_name CLEAR or exit from SQL Plus Datatypes in this manual include the following types a CHAR NCHAR a VARCHAR2 VARCHAR a NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING DATE a LONG BLOB BFILE CLOB a NCLOB a XMLIType 6 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns Default Display The default width of datatype columns is the width of the column in the database The column width of a LONG BLOB BFILE CLOB NCLOB or XMLIType defaults to the value of SET LONGCHUNKSIZE or SET LONG whichever is the smaller The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SOL Plus is determined by the database NLS_DATE_FORMAT parameter Otherwise the default format width is A9 See the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command on page 12 26 for more information on formatting DATE columns Left justification is the default for datatypes Changing the Default Display You can change the displayed width of a datatype or DATE by using the COLUMN command with
131. 2 35 CITY NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 STATE_PROVINCE VARCHAR2 25 COUNTRY_NAME VARCHAR2 40 REGION_NAME VARCHAR2 25 4 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Running SQL Commands Note DESCRIBE accesses information in the Oracle Database data dictionary You can also use SQL SELECT commands to access this and other information in the database See your Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for details Listing PL SQL Definitions To see the definition of a function or procedure use the SOL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 4 2 Using the DESCRIBE Command To create and list the definition of a function called AFUNC enter create or replace function afunc f1 varchar2 2 number return number as begin if length f1 gt 2 then return 1 else return 0 end if end FUNCTION created DESCRIBE afunc FUNCTION afunc RETURNS NUMBER Argument Name Type In Out Default F1 VARCHAR2 IN F2 NUMBER IN Running SQL Commands The SOL command language enables you to manipulate data in the database See your Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for information on individual SOL commands Example 4 3 Entering a SQL Command In this example you will enter and execute a SOL command to display the employee number name job and salary of each employee in the EMP_DETAILS_VIEW view 1 At the command prompt enter the first line of the command SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID
132. 2 Make sure the sqlplus executable installed from the RPM is the first found in your PATH To test enter which sqlplus which should return usr bin sqlplus If not remove any other Oracle directories from PATH or put usr bin before other SQL Plus executables in PATH or use an absolute or relative path to start SOL Plus For example to set PATH in the bash shell PATH usr bin PATH export PATH If you install multiple versions of SOL Plus you may need to change the symbolic link usr bin sqlplus to the version of SOL Plus matching the libraries in LD_ LIBRARY_PATH For 12 1 0 1 usr bin sqlplus is a symbolic link to the SQL Plus binary at usr lib oracle 12 1 0 1 client bin sqlplus 3 Set Oracle globalization variables required for your locale A default locale will be assumed if no variables are set See the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide for more information For example NLS_LANG AMERICAN_AMERICA UTF8 export NLS_LANG Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on Linux from Client Media or Zip File and UNIX 1 Add the name of the directory containing the Instant Client files to the appropriate shared library path LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH or SHLIB_PATH Remove any other Oracle directories For example on Solaris in the Bourne or Korn shells LD_LIBRARY_PATH home instantclient12_1 5 LD_LIBRARY PATH export LD_LIBRARY_PATH 2 Add the directory containing the Instant Client files to the PATH environment vari
133. 2 PUP Table Administra miticsns nomian ica iobexa s seit Geasaatuesrave iat odias 9 3 Disabling SOL Plus SOL and PL SQL Commands occociciconnncnnnnnnnnonnononancnnonanananannrnnr arcano conanan acci n 9 3 Creating and Controlling Roles ss ssenari iieiea eesi e E EE aE e at 9 5 Disabling A eera enee AN 9 5 Disabling UserRoles comio rain darte de 9 5 Disabling Commands with SOLPLUS RESTRICT oonnnnicicicococicinnonnninnonocorncncanarancn co nrononancnononono 9 6 Program Argument Security ccccccccceescssesesssenesessesesesessesescssecssseseseceesesesesseseecaeneseseeaeseeneessessnasesees 9 7 Database Administration with SQL Plus ON CEVA CW ie oes dada Pi A A ae Sean ett ae ee eae eae Beet ein ees 10 1 Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown ccc cece ceeeeeee ce ceneeeeeeecesesenenes 10 1 Database Startup es ais ss fete A Id agatucs 10 1 Phiggable Database Startulpisis cic ill citas dalt la he a aaa a idas 10 2 Database Shutdo WN islote lios 10 2 Pluggable Database Shutdown iuris 10 3 Redo LoS Piles oi AAA A a e E SY is 10 3 ARCHIVEEOG Mode ui Ear ida 10 3 Database Recovery iseinean A A A Ra ita 10 4 SQL Plus Globalization Support Configuring Globalization Support in Command line SQL PluS ooconnnnnnicicnnnnonicinnnoninonincncnos 11 1 SOL Plus Clint A ates A eee lt ee UN 11 1 Oracle Databases iii e 11 1 NLS_LANG Environment Variable oooo oononoconnnocccinnnncnonnnncnnnnacinnnncnno coronan na nonnn
134. 2 0833 Package Body created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package body has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0834 Package Body altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package body has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0835 View created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL view has been created but has one or more error messages SQL Plus Error Messages 13 29 SQL Plus Error Messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0836 View altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL view has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0837 Trigger created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL trigger has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0838 Trigger altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL trigger has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0839 Type created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type has been created but has o
135. 2 191 VARIABLE required to store each character for the chosen character set with an upper limit of 2000 bytes The length semantics are determined by the length qualifiers CHAR or BYTE and if not explicitly stated the value of the NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS environment variable is applied to the bind variable Explicitly stating the length semantics at variable definition stage will always take precedence over the NLS_ LENGTH_SEMANTICS setting NCHAR Creates a variable of type NCHAR national character with length one NCHAR n Creates a variable of type NCHAR with length n characters The maximum that n can be is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen national character set with an upper limit of 2000 bytes The only exception to this is when a SQL Plus session is connected to a pre Oracle9 server or the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable is set to a version less than 9 0 0 In this case the length n can be in bytes or characters depending on the chosen national character set with the upper limit of 2000 bytes still retained VARCHARZ n CHAR BYTE Creates a variable of type VARCHAR2 with length of up to n bytes or n characters The maximum that n can be is 32k bytes see note and the minimum is 1 byte or 1 character The maximum n for a VARCHAR variable with character semantics is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen character set with a
136. 2 193 BLOB columns default format 12 27 setting maximum width 12 90 12 127 setting retrieval position 12 90 12 125 setting retrieval size 8 9 12 90 12 128 blocks PL SQL continuing 4 5 editing in buffer 5 2 editing with system editor 5 1 12 57 entering and executing 4 5 listing current in buffer 5 3 saving current 12 87 setting character used toend 12 89 12 98 stored in SQL buffer 4 5 timing statistics 12 157 within SOL commands 4 6 BLOCKTERMINATOR 12 89 12 98 12 144 12 152 BODY clause 3 8 BODY option 3 8 BOLD clause 12 84 12 188 break columns 6 9 12 16 inserting space when value changes 6 10 specifying multiple 6 11 suppressing duplicate values in 6 10 BREAK command 6 9 12 16 and SQL ORDER BY clause 6 9 6 10 6 11 12 17 clearing BREAKS 6 12 displaying column values in titles 6 23 DUPLICATES clause 12 18 inserting space after every row 6 11 inserting space when break column changes 6 10 listing current break definition 6 12 12 18 ON column clause 6 10 12 16 ON expr clause 12 17 ON REPORT clause 6 15 12 17 ON ROW clause 6 11 12 17 printing grand and sub summaries 6 16 printing summary lines at ends of reports 6 15 removing definition 12 24 SKIP clause 6 11 12 17 SKIP PAGE clause 6 10 6 11 12 18 specifying multiple break columns 6 11 12 16 suppressing duplicate values 6 10 used in conjunction with COMPUTE 6 12 used in conjunction with SET COLSEP 12 101 used to format
137. 25 setting dimensions 6 24 PAGESIZE clause in LOGIN SQL 2 5 PAGESIZE variable 4 4 6 25 8 9 12 90 12 135 parameter 5 17 12 5 12 7 12 178 SQLPATH 2 3 parameter files INIT ORA files specifying alternate 12 181 PARAMETERS clause 12 169 12 170 password changing with the PASSWORD command 12 69 in CONNECT command 3 1 12 39 in COPY command B 4 B 5 B 7 in SQLPLUS command 3 5 3 11 viewable warning 3 11 PASSWORD command 12 39 12 69 PATH environment variables 2 2 PAUSE command 5 21 12 70 PAUSE variable 4 9 12 90 12 136 PDBS clause 12 169 performance of SQL statements 8 1 over dial up lines 12 158 period terminating PL SQL blocks 4 5 12 89 12 98 PLAN_TABLE creating 8 2 table 8 2 PL SQL 4 5 blocks PL SQL 4 5 executing 12 59 formatting output in SQL Plus 12 194 listing definitions 4 3 mode in SQL Plus 4 6 within SQL commands 4 6 PLUGGABLE DATABASE clause 12 182 PLUSTRACE creating role 8 2 role 8 2 PNO clause 12 170 pound sign 12 29 predefined variable _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER 2 5 12 45 _DATE 12 45 _EDITOR 5 2 12 45 12 57 12 58 _O_RELEASE 12 45 12 46 _O_VERSION 12 45 12 46 _PRIVILEGE 12 45 12 46 _RC 12 64 _SOLPLUS_RELEASE 12 45 12 46 12 47 _USER 12 45 12 46 PREFORMAT 3 10 PREFORMAT clause 3 10 PRINT clause 12 30 PRINT command 12 71 printing bind variables automatically 12 95 REFCURSOR variables 12 194 SPOOL command 12 176 Product User Profile tabl
138. 4 8 for more information Understanding SQL Command Syntax Just as spoken language has syntax rules that govern the way we assemble words into sentences SOL Plus has syntax rules that govern how you assemble words into commands You must follow these rules if you want SQL Plus to accept and execute your commands Dividing a SQL Command into Separate Lines You can divide your SQL command into separate lines at any points you wish as long as individual words are not split Thus you can enter the query you entered in Example 4 3 Entering a SQL Command on three lines SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 In this guide you will find most SQL commands divided into clauses one clause on each line In Example 4 3 Entering a SOL Command for instance the SELECT and FROM clauses were placed on separate lines Many people find this clearly visible structure helpful but you may choose whatever line division makes commands most readable to you Ending a SQL Command You can end a SQL command in one of three ways a witha semicolon a with a slash on a line by itself a with a blank line 4 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Running PL SQL Blocks A semicolon tells SOL Plus that you want to run the command Type the semicolon at the end of the last line of the command as shown in Example 4 3 Entering a SQL Command and press Return or click Execute SOL Plus proces
139. 5 Creating Stored Procedures iii e tie a A cate 4 6 Running SOL Plus Commands cece cece ce ceceeeescesssssseseesesessseeesesssesesseeseseseseeesesesesasaes 4 6 Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax cccescccccecsessesesesceceseseseansnesescecesesessenenssesesneeneneseees 4 7 System Variables that Affect How Commands RUN oooiocicicinnnnonincnnonnnononnnnorinconicnononinconicnonanancncnons 4 8 Stopping a Command while it is RUNNING ocononnicicnonnnnininnononnnnonconanincnnonnanonon co nncnono nan cn conca ron an canino 4 8 Running Operating System CommManddS oooonicicnnonicininnonnnnenconononnnconinnonin cono nnnno nan cnnncnano nan cnnronanan an cnanons 4 8 Pausing the Display ccoo ia tia a 4 9 Saving Changes to the Database Automatically oninicnicicicinoninnnnnnnncnnncncornnnananonincininnorinancnonono 4 9 Interpreting Error Messages cccccccccsscesssessesescsenseececsesesensesesesesescecsesecessesesesssescssnaeesesseseeneaeaees 4 10 Using Scripts in SQL Plus Editing Scripisii as aa di ack der aa te hi eee E a al BONA CSS Sos 5 1 Writing Scripts with a System Editor ococononicininonicannonarannnononanananononononananonononanononononanonanononononananononos 5 1 Editing Scripts in SOL Plus Command Line occonnicicnnnnonininnnnonnnnninnoninnononnnnonanconnnnono ronca nina ronancnnnons 5 2 Listing the Butter COS tests duces der a E la E Ee 5 3 Editing the Current Lied ii A AA tad E Add E 5 4 Appending Text
140. 55 TO clause cannot contain AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER SQL Plus Error Messages 13 23 SQL Plus Error Messages Cause The COPY command does not support AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER connections Action Remove AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER from the TO clause SP2 0756 FROM clause length clause_len bytes exceeds maximum length max_len Cause The FROM clause is too long Action Reduce the string specified in the FROM clause SP2 0757 TO clause length clause_len bytes exceeds maximum length max_len Cause The TO clause is too long Action Reduce the string specified in the TO clause SP2 0758 FROM clause missing username or connection identifier Cause The COPY command FROM clause must include a username and a connection identifier Action Specify a username and a connection identifier in the FROM clause SP2 0759 TO clause missing username or connection identifier Cause The COPY command TO clause must include a username and a connection identifier Action Specify a username and a connection identifier in the TO clause SP2 0762 Mismatched quotes in SHOW ERRORS object Cause Invalid syntax was found in the object name submitted as an argument to SHOW ERRORS Action If quotes are used check that they are correctly matched Either quote the whole argument or quote the schema and object components separately SP2 0768 Illegal SPOOL command Cause An invalid option was used in the SPOOL command Action Check the syntax of
141. 78 running a series in sequence 5 11 running as you start SQL Plus 3 12 5 10 running in batch mode 5 11 12 60 uniform resource locator 12 5 12 7 12 178 command prompt SET SQLPROMPT 8 9 12 91 12 151 SQL Plus 3 6 command line configuring globalization support 11 1 installing help 2 6 command line interface changing face and size 1 1 commands collecting timing statistics on 8 5 12 186 disabled in schema 13 14 disabling 9 3 echo onscreen 12 107 host running from SQL Plus 4 8 12 64 listing current in buffer 12 67 re enabling 9 3 spaces 4 1 SQL continuing on additional lines 4 4 editing in buffer 5 2 editing with system editor 12 57 ending 44 entering and executing 4 3 entering without executing 4 5 executing current 12 9 12 86 following syntax 4 4 listing current in buffer 5 3 saving current 12 87 setting character used to end and run 12 91 SQL Plus command summary 12 2 continuing on additional lines 4 7 12 1 ending 4 7 12 1 entering and executing 4 6 entering during SQL command entry 12 150 obsolete command alternatives C 1 stopping while running 4 8 tabs 4 1 types of 4 1 variables that affect running 4 8 COMMENT command disabling 9 3 comments including in command files C 1 including in scripts 5 7 12 80 C 1 using tocreate 5 8 using to create 5 7 using REMARK C 1 using REMARK to create 5 7 12 80 C 1 COMMIT clause 12 60 WHENEVER OSERROR 12 198 WHENEVER
142. 8 CENTER clause 6 20 12 84 12 188 CHANGE command 5 3 5 4 12 22 CHAR clause VARIABLE command 12 191 CHAR columns changing format 12 28 default format 6 5 definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 charset SQL Plus Instant Client D 2 CLEAR clause 6 7 12 27 in ATTRIBUTE command 12 14 CLEAR command 12 24 BREAKS clause 6 12 12 24 BUFFER clause 5 2 5 3 12 24 COLUMNS clause 12 24 COMPUTES clause 12 24 SCREEN clause 5 21 12 24 SQL clause 12 24 TIMING clause 12 24 CLOB clause VARIABLE command 12 193 CLOB columns changing format 12 28 default format 12 27 setting maximum width 12 90 12 127 setting retrieval position 12 90 12 125 setting retrieval size 8 9 12 90 12 128 CLOSECURSOR variable C 1 C 3 CMDSEP variable 12 89 12 99 COL clause 6 20 12 83 12 188 COLINVISIBLE variable 12 100 colons bind variables 5 21 COLSEP variable 12 89 12 101 COLUMN command 6 1 12 26 ALIAS clause 12 27 and BREAK command 12 17 and DEFINE command 12 43 CLEAR clause 6 7 12 27 DEFAULT clause C 2 displaying column values in bottom titles 6 24 12 31 displaying column values in top titles 6 23 12 30 entering multiple 12 32 ENTMAP clause 12 27 FOLD_AFTER clause 12 27 FOLD_BEFORE clause 12 27 FORMAT clause 6 3 6 5 12 27 formatting a REFCURSOR variable 12 194 formatting NUMBER columns 6 3 12 28 HEADING clause 6 1 12 30 HEADSEP character 12 30 JUSTIFY clause 12 30 LIKE clause 6 7 12 30 listing col
143. 8 tuning 8 1 who can use 0 xx SQL Plus and OCI packages D 1 SQL Plus command line vs SQL Plus Instant Client D 1 SQL Plus Instant Client D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 basic D 1 installation D 1 Index 14 lightweight D 1 NLS_LANG D 1 NLS_LANG charset parameter D 2 NLS_LANG language parameter D 1 NLS_LANG territory parameter D 1 required files in packages D 3 unsupported charset error D 2 SQLBLANKLINES variable 12 91 12 144 SQLCASE variable 12 91 12 145 SOLCODE clause 12 171 SHOW command 12 171 SOLCONTINUE variable 12 91 12 146 SOL PNO referencing in report titles 6 21 SQL SQLCODE using in EXIT command 12 60 SQLNUMBER variable 12 91 12 147 12 148 SQLPATH environment variables 2 2 registry entry 2 2 2 3 SOLPLUS command 3 5 clause 3 7 clause 3 7 and at sign 3 6 and EXIT FAILURE 3 6 Application Editions 3 12 BODY option 3 8 commands SQLPLUS 3 6 connect identifier 3 12 display syntax 3 7 edition 3 12 ENTMAP option 3 9 HEAD option 3 8 HTML option 3 8 MARKUP clause 3 8 MARKUP option 3 7 NOLOG clause 3 12 nolongontime 3 10 PREFORMAT option 3 10 RESTRICT 3 11 9 6 service name 3 12 SILENT clause 3 11 SILENT option 3 11 7 5 SPOOL clause 3 9 syntax 3 6 SYSASM clause 3 12 SYSBACKUP clause 3 12 SYSDBA clause 3 12 SYSDG clause 3 12 SYSKM clause 3 12 SYSOPER clause 3 12 TABLE option 3 8 unsuccessful connection 3 6 use
144. ABLESPACE clause 12 75 tablespaces recovering 12 73 tag HTML 7 1 TERMOUT variable 8 10 12 91 12 155 using with SPOOL command 12 176 territory SQL Plus Instant Client D 1 text 3 8 adding to current line with APPEND 5 5 12 12 changing old to new with CHANGE 5 4 12 22 clearing from buffer 5 3 12 24 text editor operating system 5 1 12 57 TIME variable 12 91 12 156 TIMING clause 12 24 TIMING command 8 5 12 186 deleting all areas created by 12 24 deleting current area 12 186 SHOW clause 12 186 START clause 12 186 STOP clause 12 186 TIMING variable 12 91 12 157 Index 15 titles aligning elements 6 19 12 188 displaying at bottom of page 6 17 12 20 C 1 displaying at top of page 6 17 12 187 C 2 displaying column values 6 23 12 30 12 31 displaying current date 6 24 12 30 12 32 displaying page number 6 21 12 189 displaying system maintained values 6 21 12 187 formatting elements 12 188 formatting system maintained values in 6 22 indenting 6 20 12 188 listing current definition 6 22 12 20 12 188 restoring definition 6 23 setting at start or end of report 6 17 setting lines from top of page to top title 6 25 12 90 12 131 C 1 setting lines from top title to end of page 8 9 12 90 12 135 setting top and bottom 6 17 12 20 12 187 C 1 C 2 spacing between last row and bottom title 6 20 suppressing definition 6 22 12 187 TNS_ADMIN environment variables 2 2 TO clause B 4
145. ACCEPT command for the correct options SP2 0223 No lines in buffer_name buffer Cause There are no lines stored in the buffer SQL Plus Error Messages 13 7 SQL Plus Error Messages Action Enter SQL statements into the buffer SP2 0224 invalid starting line number Cause The line number specified was incorrect Action Check that the line number is correct and try again SP2 0225 invalid ending line number Cause The line number specified was incorrect Action Check that the line number is correct and try again SP2 0226 Invalid line number current_line_number Cause Invalid line number was specified Action Re enter with a valid line number SP2 0232 Input too long Must be less than number_of_characters characters Cause The input value was too long Action Reduce the size of the value and re enter SP2 0233 Unable to obtain userid after number_of_attempts attempts Retry command Cause SQL Plus was unable to login after three attempts Action Make sure the userid and password is correct and try again SP2 0240 Enter value for variable_name Cause SOL Plus was unable to find a value for a substitution variable Action Enter a value for the substitution variable at the prompt SP2 0241 No room for symbol symbol_name not defined Cause Unable to allocate memory for the symbol Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or b
146. ACEONLY option may be useful to suppress the query data of large queries If STATISTICS is specified SOL Plus still fetches the query data from the server however the data is not displayed The AUTOTRACE report is printed after the statement has successfully completed Information about Execution Plans and the statistics is documented in the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide When SOL Plus produces a STATISTICS report a second connection to the database is automatically created This connection is closed when the STATISTICS option is set to OFF or you log out of SOL Plus The formatting of your AUTOTRACE report may vary depending on the version of the server to which you are connected and the configuration of the server The additional information and tabular output of AUTOTRACE PLAN is supported when connecting to Oracle Database 10g Release 10 1 or later When you connect to an earlier database the older form or AUTOTRACE reporting is used AUTOTRACE is not available when FIPS flagging is enabled See Tracing Statements on page 8 1 for more information on AUTOTRACE SQL Plus Command Reference 12 97 SET BLO CKTERMINATOR c ON OFF SET BLO CKTERMINATOR c ON OFF Sets the character used to end PL SQL blocks to c It cannot be an alphanumeric character or a whitespace To execute the block you must issue a RUN or slash command OFF means that SQL Plus recognizes no PL SQL block terminator ON
147. ANSACTIONAL LOCAL 12 174 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHUTDOWN Performs a planned shutdown of an instance while allowing active transactions to complete first It prevents clients from losing work without requiring all users to log off No client can start a new transaction on this instance Attempting to start a new transaction results in disconnection After completion of all transactions any client still connected to the instance is disconnected Now the instance shuts down just as it would if aSHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE statement was submitted The next startup of the database will not require any instance recovery procedures The LOCAL mode specifies a transactional shutdown on the local instance only so that it only waits on local transactions to complete not all transactions This is useful for example for scheduled outage maintenance Usage SHUTDOWN with no arguments is equivalent to SHUTDOWN NORMAL You must be connected to a database as SYSDBA SYSOPER SYSBACKUPB or SYSDG You cannot connect through a multi threaded server See CONNECT on page 12 39 for more information about connecting to a database Examples If logged into a CDB shutdown closes the CDB instance To shutdown a CDB or non CDB you must be connected to the CDB or non CDB instance that you want to close and then enter SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted Oracle instance shut down To shutdown a PDB you must log into the PD
148. APAN JA16EUC If you have installed the lightweight Instant Client see Lightweight Instant Client on page D 1 for information about supported NLS_LANG settings Connecting to a Database with SQL Plus Instant Client SQL Plus Instant Client is always remote from any database server To connect to a database you must specify the database using an Oracle Net connection identifier An example using an Easy Connection identifier to connect to the HR schema in the MYDB database running on mymachine is sqlplus hr your_password mymachine mydomain port MYDB Alternatively you can use a Net Service Name sqlplus hr your_password MYDB Net Service Names can be stored in a number of places including LDAP The use of LDAP is recommended to take advantage of the new features of Oracle Database 12c See the Oracle Database Net Services Reference for more information If you want to use Net Service Names configured in a local Oracle Net tnsnames ora file then set the environment variable TNS_ADMIN to the directory containing the tnsnames ora file For example on UNIX if your tnsnames ora file is in home user1 and it defines the Net Service Name MYDB2 TNS_ADMIN home user1 export TNS_ADMIN sqlplus hr MYDB2 If TNS_ADMIN is not set then an operating system dependent set of directories is examined to find tnsnames ora This search path includes looking in the directory specified by the ORACLE_HOME environment variable for network admin
149. ARTMENT_ID 6 rows selected 12 86 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SAVE SAVE Syntax Terms Usage Examples SAV E FILE file_namel ex CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Saves the contents of the SQL buffer in an operating system script The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands FILE Keyword to specify that the following argument is the name you want to give to the saved script This optional keyword is usually omitted If you want to save the script with the name file because it is a command keyword you need to put the name file in single quotes file_name ex Specifies the script in which you wish to save the buffer s contents CREATE Creates a new file with the name specified This is the default behavior REP LACE Replaces the contents of an existing file If the file does not exist REPLACE creates the file APP END Adds the contents of the buffer to the end of the file you specify If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL See SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 for information on changing this default extension If you wish to SAVE a file under a name identical to a SAVE command clause CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must specify a file extension When you SAVE the contents of the SQL buffer SAVE adds a line containing a slash to the end of the file To save the con
150. ARTUP SHOW PDBS CON_ID CON_NAME OPEN MODE RESTRICTED 3 CDB1_PDB1 READ WRITE NO To startup a PDB from root enter the following sequence CONNECT AS SYSDBA Connected SHOW CON_NAME CON_NAME CDBSROOT SHOW PDBS CON_ID CON_NAME OPEN MODE RESTRICTED 2 PDBSSEED READ ONLY NO 3 CDB1_PDB1 MOUNTED STARTUP PLUGGABLE DATABASE CDB1_PDB1 Pluggable Database opened SHOW PDBS CON_ID CON_NAME OPEN MODE RESTRICTED 2 PDBSSEED READ ONLY NO 3 CDB1_PDB1 READ WRITE NO 12 184 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STORE STORE Syntax Terms Usage Examples STORE SET file_namel exf CREATE REP LACE APP END Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus environment in a script See SAVE on page 12 87 for information on the other terms and clauses in the STORE command syntax SET Saves the values of the system variables This command creates a script which can be executed with the START command on page 12 178 the at sign command on page 12 5 or the double at sign command on page 12 7 If you want to store a file under a name identical to a STORE command clause that is CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must put the name in single quotes or specify a file extension To store the current SOL Plus system variables in a file named DEFAULTENV with the default command file extension enter STORE SET DEFAULTENV To append the current SQL Plus system variables to an
151. AST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Example 6 19 Placing a Header on a Report To put a report header on a separate page and to center it enter REPHEADER PAGE CENTER PERFECT WIDGETS Now run the current query which displays the following two pages of output with the new REPHEADER displayed on the first page 6 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT PERFECT WIDGETS COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter REPHEADER OFF Positioning Title Elements The report in the preceding exercises might look more attractive if you give the company name more emphasis and place the type of report and the department name on either end of a separate line It may also help to reduce the line size and thus center the titles more closely around the data You can accomplish these changes by adding some clauses to the TTITLE command and by resetting the system variable LINESIZE as the following example shows You can format report headers and footers in t
152. B to issue the SHUTDOWN command SHUTDOWN Pluggable Database closed SQL Plus Command Reference 12 175 SPOOL SPOOL Syntax Terms Usage SPO OL file_name exf CRE ATE REP LACE APP END OFF OUT Stores query results in a file or optionally sends the file to a printer file_name ex Represents the name of the file to which you wish to spool SPOOL followed by file_ name begins spooling displayed output to the named file If you do not specify an extension SPOOL uses a default extension LST or LIS on most systems The extension is not appended to system files such as dev null and dev stderr CRE ATE Creates a new file with the name specified REP LACE Replaces the contents of an existing file If the file does not exist REPLACE creates the file This is the default behavior APP END Adds the contents of the buffer to the end of the file you specify OFF Stops spooling OUT Stops spooling and sends the file to your computer s standard default printer This option is not available on some operating systems Enter SPOOL with no clauses to list the current spooling status To spool output generated by commands in a script without displaying the output on the screen use SET TERMOUT OFF SET TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands that run interactively You must use quotes around file names containing white space To create a valid HTML file using SPOOL APPEND comman
153. BREAKS To produce a report that prints duplicate job values prints the average of SALARY and additionally prints the sum of SALARY you could enter the following commands The example selects departments 50 and 80 and the jobs of clerk and salesman only BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID ON JOB_ID DUPLICATES COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID COMPUTE AVG OF SALARY ON JOB_ID SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID IN SH_CLERK SA_MAN AND DEPARTMENT_ID IN 50 80 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID 12 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID SH_CLERK DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID SH_CLERK KKKKKKKKKK avg DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID KKKKKKKKKK KKK sum 80 SA_MAN SA_MAN SA_MAN SA_MAN SA_MAN KKKKKKKKKK avg DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID KKKKKKKKKKKKK sum 25 rows selected LAST _NAME Taylor Fleaur Gates LAST _NAME Perkins Bell Grant LAST_NAME Russell Partners Errazuriz Cambrault Zlotkey LAST_NAME SQL Plus Command Reference 12 19 BTITLE BTITLE Syntax Terms Usage Examples BTI TLE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text BOLD CE NTER COL n FORMAT text LE FT R IGHT S KIP n TAB n Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each report page
154. CHAR to any character You may wish to wrap whole words to additional lines when a column value wraps to additional lines To do so use the WORD_WRAPPED clause of the COLUMN command as shown COLUMN column_name WORD_WRAPPED Example 6 9 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values To print a line of dashes after each wrapped column value enter the commands SET RECSEP WRAPPED SET RECSEPCHAR Finally enter the following query SELECT LAST_NAME JOB_TITLE CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Now restrict the width of the column JOB_TITLE and tell SQL Plus to wrap whole words to additional lines when necessary COLUMN JOB_TITLE FORMAT A20 WORD_WRAPPED Run the query 6 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines LAST_NAME JOB_TITLE CITY King President Seattle Kochhar Administration Vice Seattle President De Haan Administration Vice Seattle President Russell Sales Manager Oxford Partners Sales Manager Oxford Hartstein Marketing Manager Toronto 6 rows selected If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a line of characters after every row after every department for the above example Before continuing set RECSEP to OFF to suppress the printing of record separators SET RECSEP OFF Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines When you use an ORDER BY clause in your SQL SELECT command rows with the sam
155. COUNT 9000 FI_MGR 12000 HR_REP 6500 IT_PROG 9000 MK_MAN 3000 MK_REP 6000 JOB_ID MAXIMUM PR_REP 10000 PU_CLERK 3100 PU_MAN 11000 SA_MAN 14000 SA_REP 11500 SH_CLERK 4200 ST_CLERK 3600 ST_MAN 8200 19 rows selected If you wish to append characters immediately after a substitution variable use a period to separate the variable from the character For example SELECT SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE EMPLOYEE _ID amp X 5 Enter value for X 20 is interpreted as SELECT SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE EMPLOYEE _ID 205 Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values Suppose you wanted to expand the file STATS to include the minimum sum and average of the number column You may have noticed that SQL Plus prompted you twice for the value of GROUP_COL and once for the value of NUMBER_COL in Example 5 9 Using Substitution Variables and that each GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL had a single ampersand in front of it If you were to add three more functions using a single ampersand before each to the script SQL Plus would prompt you a total of four times for the value of the number column You can avoid being re prompted for the group and number columns by adding a second ampersand in front of each GROUP_COL and NUMBER_COL in STATS SQL Plus automatically DEFINEs any substitution variable preceded by two ampersands but does not DEFINE those preceded by only one ampersand When you have defined a variable SQL Plus will not
156. Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0045 no column_name defined Cause No columns have been defined Action No action required SP2 0046 column_name not defined Cause The column name specified was not defined Action Retry with a valid column name SP2 0047 Invalid number for option_name option Cause An invalid number was used for this option Action Re try the operation with a valid number SP2 0052 like column_name column_name not defined Cause The column which the format is based on was not defined Action Use the COLUMN command to make sure the column the format is based on is defined first SP2 0054 no room to allocate definition_name definition Ignored Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COLUMN command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0055 out of room while allocating portion of new definition_name Old definition if any retained Cause Unable to allocate memory to store the new definition Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0080 no COMPUTES currently defined SQL Plus Error Messages _ 13 3 SQL Plus Error Messages Cause No COMPUTE definition Action Define a COMPUTE Che
157. E U U9999 Displays the dual currency symbol in the specified position V 999199 Displays value multiplied by 10n where n is the number of 9 s after the V X XXXX Displays the hexadecimal value for the rounded value of the XXXX specified number of digits The MI and PR format elements can only appear in the last position of a number format model The S format element can only appear in the first or last position If a number format model does not contain the MI S or PR format elements negative return values automatically contain a leading negative sign and positive values automatically contain a leading space A number format model can contain only a single decimal character D or period but it can contain multiple group separators G or commas A group separator or comma cannot appear to the right of a decimal character or period in a number format model SQL Plus formats NUMBER data right justified A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use COLUMN FORMAT or SET NUMFORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus may round your NUMBER data to fit your format or field width If a value cannot fit in the column SOL Plus displays pound signs instead of the number If a positive value is extremely large and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number the
158. EDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY DIMENSION JAVA CLASS schema name LNO PARAMETERS parameter_name PDBS PNO RECYC LEBIN original_name REL EASE REPF OOTER REPH EADER SGA SPOOIL SPPARAMETER S parameter_name SQLCODE TTI TLE USER XQUERY Shows the value of a SOL Plus system variable or the current SOL Plus environment SHOW SGA requires a DBA privileged login system_variable Represents any system variable set by the SET command ALL Lists the settings of all SHOW options except ERRORS and SGA in alphabetical order CON_ID Displays the id of the Container to which you are connected when connected to a Consolidated Database If issued when connected to a non Consolidated Database this command returns 0 CON_NAME Displays the name of the Container to which you are connected when connected to a Consolidated Database For non consolidated database it will return Non Consolidated EDITION 12 168 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW Shows the edition attribute of the existing database BTI TLE Shows the current BTITLE definition ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY DIMENSION JAVA CLASS schema name Shows the compilation errors of a stored procedure includes stored functions procedures and packages After you use the CREATE command to create a stored procedure a message
159. EEN clause 5 21 12 24 screens clearing 5 21 12 24 scripts extension 12 87 12 153 12 185 registering 8 8 scripts authenticating users in 3 2 SECUREDCOL variable 12 139 security changing password 12 69 nolongontime 3 10 password viewable 3 11 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table 9 1 RESTRICT 3 11 9 6 SELECT command and BREAK command 6 9 12 17 and COLUMN command 12 26 and COMPUTE command 6 9 and COPY command B 3 B 4 and DEFINE command 12 43 and ORDER BY clause 6 9 disabling 9 4 formatting results 5 22 5 25 semicolon in PL SQL blocks 4 5 in SOL commands 4 4 4 5 in SQL Plus commands 4 7 12 1 not stored in buffer 5 3 SERVEROUTPUT variable 12 140 service name in COPY command B 4 B 5 B 7 Session Editions 12 40 SET AUTOTRACE 8 1 SET clause 12 185 SET command 2 5 4 8 12 88 APPINFO variable 8 8 12 92 ARRAYSIZE variable 8 8 12 89 12 93 B 6 AUTOCOMMIT variable 12 89 12 94 AUTOPRINT variable 12 89 12 95 12 193 AUTORECOVERY variable 12 89 12 96 AUTOTRACE variable 12 89 12 97 BLOCKTERMINATOR variable 12 89 12 98 BUFFER variable C 2 CLOSECURSOR variable C 1 C 3 CMDSEP variable 12 89 12 99 COLINVISIBLE variable 12 100 COLSEP variable 6 27 12 89 12 101 COMPATIBILITY variable C 1 C 3 CONCAT variable 5 17 12 89 12 102 COPYCOMMIT variable 12 89 12 103 B 6 COPYTYPECHECK variable 12 89 12 104 DEFINE clause 5 17 DEFINE variable 12 89 DESCRIBE variable 12 89 12 106 DOCU
160. EGE Privilege level of the current connection _SOLPLUS_RELEASE Full release number of installed SOL Plus component _USER User name used to make connection _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER _DATE _EDITOR Contains the INSTANCE_NAME SERVICE_NAME or ORACLE_SID from the connection identifier If a connection identifier is not supplied by the user during connection the _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER contains the ORACLE_SID Contains either the current date as a dynamic variable or a fixed string The current date is the default and is formatted using the value of NLS_DATE_FORMAT Because _DATE can be used as a normal substitution variable users may put it in TTITLE If _DATE is dynamic and is used in TTITLE it will have all the normal variable semantics If it is used with an ampersand than the value will be set to the time when the TTITLE command is executed If it is used without an ampersand prefix it will be re evaluated for each page For long reports with _DATE in the TTITLE or with multiple references to amp DATE different times may be displayed for each occurrence of the variable Users using _DATE in TTITLEs will almost certainly want to use an ampersand amp _ DATE so that each page of the report has exactly the same timestamp This is especially true when the current date format contains a seconds component A DEFINE with no arguments or dereference using amp DATE will give the cu
161. EL PAUSE SPOOL ARCHIVE LOG DESCRIBE PRINT START ATTRIBUTE DISCONNECT PROMPT STARTUP BREAK EDIT RECOVER STORE BTITLE EXECUTE REMARK TIMING CHANGE EXIT QUIT REPFOOTER TTITLE CLEAR GET REPHEADER UNDEFINE COLUMN HELP RUN VARIABLE COMPUTE HOST SAVE WHENEVER OSERROR CONNECT INPUT SET WHENEVER SQLERROR COPY LIST SHOW XQUERY SQL Commands That Can Be Disabled ALTER DELETE MERGE SET CONSTRAINTS ANALYZE DISASSOCIATE NOAUDIT SET ROLE ASSOCIATE DROP PURGE SET TRANSACTION AUDIT EXPLAIN RENAME TRUNCATE CALL FLASHBACK REVOKE UPDATE COMMENT GRANT ROLLBACK VALIDATE SQL Plus Security 9 3 Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands SQL Commands That Can Be Disabled COMMIT INSERT SAVEPOINT na CREATE LOCK SELECT na You can disable the following PL SQL commands PL SQL Commands That Can Be Disabled BEGIN DECLARE na na Note a Disabling HOST disables the operating system alias for HOST such as on Windows and on UNIX Disabling LIST disables and numbers numbers entered to go to that line in a script You must disable HELP and separately to disable access to command line help Disabling the SQL Plus SET command also disables SQL SET CONSTRAINTS SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION a Disabling SOL Plus START also disables and a Disabling BEGIN and DECLARE does not prevent the use of SQL Plus EXECUTE to run PL SQL EXECUTE must be disabled separately a Disabling EXIT QUIT is no
162. ER_PROFILE table 9 1 Index 5 cursor variables 12 194 D database administrator 10 1 connect identifier 12 39 mounting 12 181 opening 12 181 database changes saving automatically 12 89 12 94 DATABASE clause 12 75 database files recovering 12 73 database name at startup 12 180 database schema 8 2 DESCRIBE parameter 12 50 SHOW 12 168 12 169 databases connecting to default 12 39 connecting to remote 12 39 copying data between B 1 B 3 copying data between tables on a single B 7 disconnecting without leaving SOL Plus 3 2 12 56 mounting 10 2 opening 10 2 recovering 10 4 12 73 shutting down 10 1 10 2 starting 10 1 DATAFILE clause 12 75 DATE column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 DATE clause 12 10 DATE columns changing format 12 28 12 33 default format 6 5 date storing current in variable for titles 6 24 12 30 12 32 DB2 12 104 DBA 10 1 mode 12 181 privilege 12 181 DBMS output 8 9 12 140 DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package 8 8 12 89 12 92 DECLARE command disabling 9 4 PL SQL 4 5 DEFAULT clause 12 11 DEFINE command 5 11 12 43 and system editor 5 2 12 46 and UNDEFINE command 5 12 12 190 CHAR values 12 43 SET DEFINE ON OFF 12 89 12 105 substitution variables 12 43 DEFINE variable See substitution variable DEL command 5 3 5 7 12 48 using an asterisk 5 3 12 48 DELETE command Index 6 disabling 9 3 DESCRIBE command SQL Plus 4 2 12 50 connect_identifie
163. ES CO NM a aia 3 3 Full Connection Identifier ci ina 3 3 Easy Connection Identifier posses ona aeea a aat ae ep Krea a PAEAS EEE SEARE 3 4 Connectionless Session with NOLOG sessseesseeesreessessssessrressrrssritssretssresertessretsrteesressereessressressre 3 4 Starting SQL Plus cocoa Gees p e a N a nisin ei a aE 3 4 Starting Command line SQU PIUS iiis scicccstcnsecsscstssshocdestesseseucutiestotiealacdvstecsezedvediestielvcsstsoesdes scsssesee 3 5 Getting Command line Help criticada tii Ai a A e RAE ta dein 3 6 Exiting SOL Plus Command line oonocicicnnnnnninnonnnnoncnnononnnnoninnonoranconinnonon anno nino non cnnncnono nan co nranaen cn rnnnns 3 6 SOLPLUS Program Synt x iise decisorio seini sacs shes daa do ini a rad 3 6 Opt iia iros tenida bici dales 3 7 LORO olaaa is 3 11 A A E ad 3 12 Part Il Using SQL Plus 4 SQL Plus Basics Entering and Executing Commands coooocncnnncccononanicinonanononcnononnnnnonon coco nononn corn cn nana rn raro oran recono aaron 4 1 TESORO OS e S N 4 2 Executing Commands isinsi esgere a para ia ea iaa roana aaa EA E initiate 4 2 Listing Table Definition ienee eunana n Atii 4 2 Listing PL SQL De finitions nornos ririo aeee e a E E aE Ee tetee Eia narco naranannnnos 4 3 Running SOL Commands isisa s eken E eae Eneas EMEA EA ie EAE Ee Aee AAEE EE EA a e AES ESS 4 3 Understanding SQL Command Syntax isisisi niceai iseeessri iite 4 4 Running PL SOQL Blocksant aeisi er aa a a E E E E EE E 4
164. EY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE HOMEO registry subkey or the HOMEn directory for the associated ORACLE_HOME contains the SQLPATH registry entry SOLPATH is created with a default value of ORACLE_HOME DBS You can specify any directories on any drive as valid values for SOLPATH When setting the SOLPATH registry entry you can concatenate directories with a semicolon For example c oracle oral2 database c oracle oral2 dbs See the Registry Editor s help system for instructions on how to edit the SQLPATH registry entry SQL Plus Configuration You can set up your SOL Plus environment to use the same settings with each session There are two operating system files to do this a The Site Profile file glogin sql for site wide settings a Additionally the User Profile login sql sets user specific settings The exact names of these files is system dependent Note The Site Profile and User Profile files are run after a successful Oracle Database connection from a SQLPLUS or CONNECT command or where NOLOG is specified The Site Profile and User Profile files are not run when you switch to another PDB using ALTER SESSION SET CONTAINER Some privileged connections may generate errors if SET SERVEROUTPUT or SET APPINFO commands are put in the Site Profile or User Profile The following tables show the profile scripts and some commands and settings that affect the Command line user interface
165. F HEAD text The HEAD text option enables you to specify content for the lt HEAD gt tag By default text includes a default in line cascading style sheet and title If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SOL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt HEAD gt tag This gives you the flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs BODY text The BODY text option enables you to specify attributes for the lt BODY gt tag By default there are no attributes If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt BODY gt tag This gives you the flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs TABLE text The TABLE text option enables you to enter attributes for the lt TABLE gt tag You can use TABLE text to set HTML lt TABLE gt tag attributes such as BORDER 3 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax CELLPADDING CELLSPACING and WIDTH By default the lt TABLE gt WIDTH attribute is set to 90 and the BORDER attribute is set to 1 If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SOL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt TABLE gt tag This gives you th
166. For more information refer to the Oracle Net manual or contact your DBA SQL Plus does not prompt for a service name but uses your default database if you do not include a connect identifier SQL Plus Command Reference 12 39 CONNECT Usage Examples A connect_identifier is also used to connect to a pluggable database PDB See Oracle Database Administrator s Guide edition value The value for the Oracle Session Edition An edition enables two or more versions of an object in a database It provides a staging area where changed objects can be loaded into the database compiled and executed during uptime This is particularly useful to reduce downtime associated with patching an application edition value overrides any edition value specified in the ORA_EDITION environment variable For more detailed information see Oracle Database Administrator s Guide slash Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a connect_identifier if you use a default logon In a default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication In SOL Plus command line where applications use password credentials to connect to databases it is possible to store the credentials in a client side Oracle wallet When you configure a client to use th
167. G columns that you copy If any LONG columns contain data longer than the value of LONG COPY truncates the data SQL Plus performs a commit at the end of each successful COPY If you set the SQL Plus SET COPYCOMMIT variable to a positive value n SQL Plus performs a commit after copying every n batches of records The SQL Plus SET ARRAYSIZE variable determines the size of a batch Some operating environments require that service names be placed in double quotes The following command copies the entire EMPLOYEES table to a table named WESTEMPLOYEES Note that the tables are located in two different databases If WESTEMPLOYEES already exists SQL Plus replaces the table and its contents The columns in WESTEMPLOYEES have the same names as the columns in the source table EMPLOYEES COPY FROM HR HQ TO JOHN WEST REPLACE WESTEMPLOYEES USING SELECT FROM EMPLOYEES The following command copies selected records from EMPLOYEES to the database to which SQL Plus is connected SOL Plus creates SALESMEN through the copy SQL Plus copies only the columns EMPLOYEE_ID and LAST_NAME and at the destination names them EMPLOYEE_ID and SA_MAN COPY FROM HR ORACLEO1 CREATE SALESMEN EMPLOYEE_ID SA_MAN USING SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN Copying Data from One Database to Another Use the SQL Plus COPY command to copy CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER or VARCHAR data between databases and between tables on the sa
168. HAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 is Table created To describe the table EMPLOYEE to a depth of two levels and to indent the output and display line numbers enter SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 LINENUM ON INDENT ON DESCRIBE employee Name Null Type 1 LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 2 EMPADDR ADDRESS 3 2 STREET VARCHAR2 20 4 2 CITY VARCHAR2 20 5 JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 6 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 12 106 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET ECHO ON OFF Controls whether or not to echo commands in a script that is executed with or START ON displays the commands on screen OFF suppresses the display ECHO does not affect the display of commands you enter interactively or redirect to SQL Plus from the operating system SQL Plus Command Reference 12 107 SET EDITF ILE file_name ext SET EDITF ILE file_name ex Sets the default filename for the EDIT command See EDIT on page 12 57 for more information about the EDIT command The default filename for the EDIT command is afiedt buf which is the SOL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SOL Plus commands You can include a path and or file extension See SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 for information on changing the default extension The default filename and maximum filename length are operating system specific 12 108 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference
169. ID NUMBER 6 DEPARTMENT _ID NUMBER 4 LOCATION_ID NUMBER 4 COUNTRY_ID CHAR 2 FIRST _NAME VARCHAR2 20 LAST_NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 25 SALARY NUMBER 8 2 COMMISSION_PCT NUMBER 2 2 DEPARTMENT _ NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 JOB_TITLE NOT NULL VARCHAR2 35 CITY NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 STATE_PROVINCE VARCHAR2 25 COUNTRY_NAME VARCHAR2 40 REGION_NAME VARCHAR2 25 To describe a procedure called CUSTOMER_LOOKUP enter DESCRIBE customer_lookup PROCEDURE customer_lookup Argument Name Type In Out Default CUST_ID NUMBER IN CUST_NAME VARCHAR2 OUT To create and describe the package APACK that contains the procedures aproc and bproc enter CREATE PACKAGE apack AS PROCEDURE aproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER PROCEDURE bproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER END apack Package created DESCRIBE apack SQL Plus Command Reference 12 51 DESCRIBE PROCEDURE APROC Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 NUMBER IN PROCEDURE BPROC Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 NUMBER IN To create and describe the object type ADDRESS that contains the attributes STREET and CITY enter CREATE TYPE ADDRESS AS OBJECT STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 i Type created DESCRIBE address STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the object type EMPLOYEE that contains the attributes LAST_ NAME EMPADDR JOB_ID and SALARY enter
170. ITLE and BTITLE commands 6 23 ON column clause in BREAK command 12 16 in COMPUTE command 6 12 12 35 ON expr clause in BREAK command 12 17 in COMPUTE command 12 35 ON REPORT clause in BREAK command 6 15 12 17 in COMPUTE command 6 15 12 35 ON ROW clause in BREAK command 6 11 12 17 in COMPUTE command 12 35 online help 12 63 OPEN clause 12 181 opening a database 12 181 operating system editor 5 1 12 46 12 57 file loading into buffer 12 62 running commands from SQL Plus 4 8 12 64 text editor 5 1 ORA_EDITION environment variables 2 2 ORA_NLS10 environment variables 2 2 Oracle Application Editions edition 3 12 Oracle Database Client D 1 Oracle Net configuring 2 7 connect identifier 12 39 Oracle Session Editions edition 12 40 ORACLE_HOME environment variables 2 1 ORACLE_ PATH environment variables 2 2 ORACLE_SID environment variables 2 2 Oracle10g globalization support 11 3 ORDER BY clause displaying column values in titles 6 23 displaying values together in output 6 9 ORDERING variable 12 91 ORDERING XQUERY option 12 165 Index 10 OUT clause 6 27 12 176 output formatting white space in 8 10 12 154 pausing during display 4 9 12 136 P packages SQL Plus and OCI for Instant Client D 1 PAGE clause 12 83 page number including in titles 6 11 6 21 pages changing length 6 25 8 9 12 90 12 135 default dimensions 6 24 matching to screen or paper size 6
171. KERR RRR RRR RK as Dept Average 19333 3333 Dept Maximum 24000 To sum salaries for departments lt 20 without printing the compute label enter COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID lt 20 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY pa 10 waalen 00 ar 4400 20 Hartstein 13000 20 Fay 6000 E 19000 To total the salary at the end of the report without printing the compute label enter COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SELECT NULL DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID lt 30 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID SQL Plus Command Reference 12 37 COMPUTE 10 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME Whalen Hartstein Fay Raphaely Khoo Baida Tobias Himuro Colmenares 9 rows selected 12 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CONNECT CONNECT Syntax Terms CONNECT ogon proxy AS SYSASM ISYSBACKUP ISYSDBA ISYSDG ISYSOPER ISYSKM edition value where logon has the syntax username password O connect_identifier where proxy has the syntax proxyusel username password O connect_identifier Note The brackets around username in proxy are required syntax not an indication of an optional t
172. L Plus without connecting to a database This is useful for performing some database administration tasks writing transportable scripts or to use SQL Plus editing commands to write or edit scripts You use the NOLOG argument to the SQLPLUS command to start a connectionless command line session After SOL Plus has started you can connect to a database with the CONNECT command Example 3 6 Start a connectionless SQL Plus session with NOLOG SOLPLUS NOLOG Starting SQL Plus If you are connecting to a remote Oracle database make sure your Oracle Net software is installed and working properly For more information see the Oracle Database Net Services Administrator s Guide 3 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus When you start a SQL Plus command line session and after a CONNECT command in that session the site profile glogin sql and the user profile file Jogin sql are processed After SOL Plus starts and connects and prior to displaying the first prompt After SOL Plus starts and connects and prior to running a script specified on the command line Prior to the first prompt when NOLOG is specified on the command line and no connection is made The site profile file glogin sql is processed first then the user profile file login sql Behavior in SQL Plus 10 1 may be unexpected depending on the setting of SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY For example processing glogin sql and login sql after a CONNECT com
173. L procedure successfully completed PRINT pcv EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 Example 5 16 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Functions Create a stored function containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION EmpInfo_fn RETURN cv_types EmpInfo IS resultset cv_types EmpInfoTyp BEGIN 5 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Fetching Iterative Results from a SELECT inside a PL SQL Block PEN resultset FOR SELECT EMPLOYEE ID SALARY ROM EMP DETAILS VIEW HERE JOB_ID SA_MAN ETURN resultset ND Ds yo Function created Execute the function VARIABLE rc REFCURSOR EXECUTE rc EmpInfo_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable PRINT rc EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 The function can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable EXECUTE rc EmpInfo_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed Fetching Iterative Results from a SELECT inside a PL SQL Block SQL Plus can iteratively fetch and format the results of a SELECT statement contained in a PL SQL block or stored procedure You do not need to define local REFCURSOR variables Example 5 17 Creating a PL SQL Procedure Create a PL SQL procedure P4 which calls two statements create procedure p4 as cl sys_refcursor c2 sys_r
174. LECT DEPARTMENT_ID Now enter APPEND APPEND CITY 1 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID CITY To append a semicolon to the line enter APPEND SQL Plus appends the first semicolon to the line and interprets the second as the terminator for the APPEND command 12 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG Syntax Terms Usage ARCHIVE LOG LIST Displays information about redo log files LIST Requests a display that shows the range of redo log files to be archived the current log file group s sequence number and the current archive destination specified by either the optional command text or by the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST If you are using both ARCHIVELOG mode and automatic archiving the display might appear like ARCHIVE LOG LIST Database log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 Since the log sequence number of the current log group and the next log group to archive are the same automatic archival has archived all log groups up to the current one If you are using ARCHIVELOG but have disabled automatic archiving the last three lines might look like Oldest online log sequence 222 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 225 If you are using NOARCHIVELOG mode the next log sequence to archive line is
175. LS VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT _ID amp NEWDEPT Assume you run the file using START or ASKFORDEPT SQL VAL1 HTTP machine_name domain port ASKFORDEPT SQL VAL1 Please enter a valid department For example 10 Department ID gt You can enter a department number at the prompt Department ID gt By default SOL Plus lists the line containing NEWDEPT before and after substitution and then displays the department name corresponding to the number entered at the Department ID gt prompt You can use SET VERIFY OFF to prevent this behavior 12 72 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER RECOVER Syntax RECOVER general managed BEGIN BACKUP END BACKUP where the general clause has the following syntax AUTOMATIC FROM location full_database_recovery partial_database_recovery LOGFILE filename TEST ALLOW integer CORRUPTION parallel_clause TEST ALLOW integer CORRUPTION parallel_clause CONTINUE DEFAULT CANCEL where the full_database_recovery clause has the following syntax STANDBY DATABASE UNTIL CANCEL TIME date CHANGE integer USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE SNAPSHOT TIME date where the partial_database_recovery clause has the following syntax TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE filename filenumber filename filenumber STANDBY TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE filename filenumber filename fil
176. MENT variable C 1 C 3 ECHO variable 12 89 12 107 EDITFILE variable 12 89 12 108 EMBEDDED variable 12 89 12 109 ERRORLOGGING variable 12 110 ESCAPE variable 5 17 12 89 12 115 ESCCHAR variable 12 116 EXITCOMMIT variable 12 89 12 117 FEEDBACK variable 12 90 12 118 FLAGGER variable 12 90 12 119 FLUSH variable 8 9 12 90 12 120 HEADING variable 12 121 HEADSEP variable 6 2 12 90 12 122 INSTANCE variable 12 90 12 123 LINESIZE variable 6 19 6 25 12 90 12 124 LOBOFFSET variable 12 90 12 125 LOGSOURCE variable 12 90 12 126 LONG variable 12 90 12 127 B 6 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 12 90 12 128 MARKUP clause 12 129 MAXDATA variable C 1 C 3 NEWPAGE variable 6 25 12 90 12 131 NULL variable 12 90 12 132 NUMFORMAT clause 2 5 NUMFORMAT variable 12 90 12 133 NUMWIDTH variable 6 3 12 29 12 90 12 134 PAGESIZE clause 2 5 PAGESIZE variable 4 4 6 25 8 9 12 90 12 135 PAUSE variable 12 90 12 136 RECSEP variable 6 8 12 90 12 138 RECSEPCHAR variable 6 8 12 90 12 138 SCAN variable C 1 C 4 SECUREDCOL variable 12 139 SERVEROUTPUT variable 12 140 SHIFTINOUT variable 12 90 12 142 SPACE variable C 1 C 4 SQLBLANKLINES variable 12 144 SQLCASE variable 12 91 12 145 SQLCONTINUE variable 12 91 12 146 SQLNUMBER variable 12 91 12 147 SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY variable 12 91 12 148 SQLPREFIX variable 12 91 12 150 SQLPROMPT variable 8 9 12 91 12 151 SQLTERMINATOR variable 12 91 12 152 subst
177. MWIDTH SQL Plus rounds the number up or down to the maximum number of characters allowed if possible or displays hashes if the number is too large You can choose a different format for any NUMBER column by using a format model ina COLUMN command A format model is a representation of the way you want the numbers in the column to appear using 9s to represent digits Changing the Default Display The COLUMN command identifies the column you want to format and the model you want to use as shown COLUMN column_name FORMAT model Use format models to add commas dollar signs angle brackets around negative values and leading zeros to numbers in a given column You can also round the values to a given number of decimal places display minus signs to the right of negative values instead of to the left and display values in exponential notation Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 3 Formatting Columns To use more than one format model for a single column combine the desired models in one COLUMN command see Example 6 4 See COLUMN on page 12 26 for a complete list of format models and further details Example 6 4 Formatting a NUMBER Column To display SALARY with a dollar sign a comma and the numeral zero instead of a blank for any zero values enter the following command COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 990 Now rerun the current query LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14 000 4 Partners 13 500 3 Errazuriz 12
178. ND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table 13 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY Command Messages CPY 0009 Fewer column list names than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table CPY 0012 Datatype cannot be copied Cause An attempt was made to copy a datatype that is not supported in the COPY command Datatypes supported by the COPY command are CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER and VARCHAR2 Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the unsupported datatype column is removed For more information see Appendix B SQL Plus COPY Command Re specify the COPY command making sure that the unsupported datatype column is removed For more information see the SOL Plus COPY Command SQL Plus Error Messages 13 35 COPY Command Messages 13 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part IV SQL Plus Appendixes Part IV contains the following SOL Plus a
179. OLUMN FORMAT command to adjust the column width When you use SQL functions like TO_CHAR Oracle Database automatically enables a very wide column The default column width may also depend on the character sets in use in SQL Plus and in the database To maximize script portability if multiple characters sets are used Oracle Database recommends using COLUMN FORMAT for each column selected To change the width of a DATE column to n use the COLUMN command with FORMAT An If you specify a width shorter than the column heading the heading is truncated NUMBER Columns For numeric columns COLUMN FORMAT settings take precedence over SET NUMFORMAT settings which take precedence over SET NUMWIDTH settings See SET NUMF ORMAT format on page 12 133 and SET NUM WIDTH 10 n on page 12 134 To change a NUMBER column s width use FORMAT followed by an element as specified in Table 12 1 Number Formats Table 12 1 Number Formats Element Examples Description comma 9 999 Displays a comma in the specified position period 99 99 Displays a period decimal point to separate the integral and fractional parts of a number 9999 Displays a leading dollar sign 0 0999 Displays leading zeros 9990 Displays trailing zeros 9 9999 Displays a value with the number of digits specified by the number of 9s Value has a leading space if positive a leading minus sign if negative Blanks are displayed for leading zeroes A zero 0 is di
180. OLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OLD_VALUE variable_name SQL Plus prints the bottom title as part of the process of breaking to a new page after finding the new value for the master column Therefore if you simply referenced the NEW_VALUE of the master column you would get the value for the next set of details OLD_VALUE remembers the value of the master column that was in effect before the page break began Displaying the Current Date in Titles You can of course date your reports by simply typing a value in the title This is satisfactory for ad hoc reports but if you want to run the same report repeatedly you would probably prefer to have the date automatically appear when the report is run You can do this by creating a variable to hold the current date You can reference the predefined substitution variable _DATE to display the current date in a title as you would any other variable The date format model you include in your LOGIN file or in your SELECT statement determines the format in which SQL Plus displays the date See your Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for more information on date format models See Modifying Your LOGIN File on page 2 4 for more information about the LOGIN file You can also enter these commands interactively See COLUMN on page 12 26 for more information Setting Page Dimensions Typically a page of a report contains the number of blank line s set in the NEWPAGE varia
181. ON OFF Displays the number of records returned by a script when a script selects at least n records ON or OFF turns this display on or off Turning feedback ON sets n to 1 Setting feedback to zero is equivalent to turning it OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF also turns off the statement confirmation messages such as Table created and PL SQL procedure successfully completed that are displayed after successful SQL or PL SQL statements 12 118 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL Checks to make sure that SOL statements conform to the ANSI ISO SQL92 standard If any non standard constructs are found the Oracle Database Server flags them as errors and displays the violating syntax This is the equivalent of the SQL language ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER command You may execute SET FLAGGER even if you are not connected to a database FIPS flagging will remain in effect across SQL Plus sessions until a SET FLAGGER OFF or ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER OFF command is successful or you exit SOL Plus When FIPS flagging is enabled SQL Plus displays a warning for the CONNECT DISCONNECT and ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER commands even if they are successful SQL Plus Command Reference 12 119 SET FLU SH ON OFF SET FLU SH ON OFF Controls when output is sent to the user s display device OFF enables the operating system to buffer output ON disable
182. ORACLE SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 12 1 E18404 11 April 2013 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 12 1 E18404 11 Copyright 1996 2013 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Primary Author Simon Watt Contributor Luan Nim Andrei Souleimanian Senthilprabhu Dhamotharan Mahantesh Savanur Contributor The Database 12c documentation is dedicated to Mark Townsend who was an inspiration to all who worked on this release This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT END USERS Oracle programs including any operating system integrated softw
183. OYEES 6 204 3 0 00 00 01 3 TABLE ACCESS FULL JOBS 19 494 2 0 00 00 01 1 access E JOB_ID J JOB_ID 2 filter E SALARY gt 12000 dynamic sampling used for this statement Statistics 0 recursive calls 0 db block gets 10 consistent gets 0 physical reads 0 redo size 706 bytes sent via Oracle Net Services to client 496 bytes received via Oracle Net Services from client 2 Oracle Net Services roundtrips to from client sorts memory sorts disk rows processed nA OO This option is useful when you are tuning a large query but do not want to see the query report Note Your output may vary depending on the server version and configuration Collecting Timing Statistics Use the SQL Plus TIMING command to collect and display data on the amount of computer resources used to run one or more commands or blocks TIMING collects data for an elapsed period of time saving the data on commands run during the period in a timer See the TIMING command on page 12 186 and Tracing Statements on page 8 1 for information about using AUTOTRACE to collect statistics To delete all timers enter CLEAR TIMING Tuning SQL Plus 8 5 Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries When you trace a statement in a parallel or distributed query the Execution Plan output depends on the statement you use Example 8 6 Tracing Statements With Parall
184. Oracle Database Administrator s Guide 12 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CONNECT To connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged user named HR enter CONNECT HR AS SYSDBA To connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged default user enter CONNECT AS SYSDBA You can use the CONNECT command to connect to a CDB or a non CDB using easy connect or a net service name This statement connects to the hr user using the hrapp service The hrapp service has a PDB property for the hrpdb PDB This example assumes that the client is configured to have a Net Service Name for the hrapp service CONNECT hr hrapp SQL Plus Command Reference 12 41 COPY COPY The COPY command is not being enhanced to handle datatypes or features introduced with or after Oracle8i The COPY command is likely to be deprecated in a future release For COPY command details and syntax see Appendix B SQL Plus COPY Command 12 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE DEFINE Syntax Terms Usage DEF INE variable variable text Specifies a user or predefined variable and assigns a CHAR value to it or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables variable Represents the user or predefined variable whose value you wish to assign or list text Represents the CHAR value you wish to assign to variable Enclose text in single quotes if it contains punctuati
185. PUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B END If there is nothing left to do shall we continue with plan B To set the output to TRUNCATED enter SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT TRUNCATED SET LINESIZE 20 BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B END If there is nothing shall we continue wi SQL Plus Command Reference 12 141 SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE Example Enables correct alignment for terminals that display shift characters The SET SHIFTINOUT command is useful for terminals which display shift characters together with data for example IBM 3270 terminals You can only use this command with shift sensitive character sets for example JA16DBCS Use VISIBLE for terminals that display shift characters as a visible character for example a space or a colon INVISIBLE is the opposite and does not display any shift characters To enable the display of shift characters on a terminal that supports them enter SET SHIFTINOUT VISIBLE SELECT LAST_NAME JOB_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 LAST_NAME JOB_ID JJOO AABBCC AA abc DDEE e where visible shift character uppercase represents multibyte characters lowercase represents singlebyte characters 12 142 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary
186. PY command making sure that the column names and their respective order in the destination table match the column names and column order in the optional column list or in the SELECT command CPY 0005 Source and destination column attributes don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column in the destination table does not have the same datatype as the corresponding column in the SELECT command Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the data types for items being selected agree with the destination Use TO_DATE TO_CHAR and TO_ NUMBER to make conversions CPY 0006 Select list has more columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table CPY 0007 Select list has fewer columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table CPY 0008 More column list names than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPE
187. Plus Reports You can stop the printing of a file through your operating system For more information see your operating system s installation and user s guide Running Operating System Commands You can execute an operating system command from the SOL Plus command prompt This is useful when you want to perform a task such as listing existing operating system files 4 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Changes to the Database Automatically To run an operating system command enter the SQL Plus command HOST followed by the operating system command For example this SOL Plus command runs the command DIRECTORY SQL HOST DIRECTORY SQL When the command finishes running the SQL Plus command prompt appears again Note Operating system commands entered from a SQL Plus session using the HOST command do not affect the current SQL Plus session For example setting an operating system environment variable does not affect the current SOL Plus session but may affect SOL Plus sessions started subsequently You can suppress access to the HOST command For more information about suppressing the HOST command see Chapter 9 SOL Plus Security Pausing the Display You can use the PAUSE system variable to stop and examine the contents of the screen after each page during the display of a long report or during the display of a table definition with many columns You can use SET PAUSE to pause output a
188. QL Plus see Chapter 9 SQL Plus Security Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown An Oracle database may not always be available to all users To open or close a database or to start up or shut down an instance you must have DBA privileges or be connected as SYSOPER or SYSDBA Other users cannot change the current status of an Oracle database Database Startup To start a database 1 Start an instance An instance controls the background processes and the allocation of memory area to access an Oracle database 2 Mount the database Mounting the database associates it with a previously started instance Database Administration with SQL Plus 10 1 Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown 3 Open the database Opening the database makes it available for normal database operations For more information about database startup see the Oracle Database Concepts guide For more information about starting a database see the STARTUP command on page 12 180 Example 10 1 Starting an Instance To start an Oracle Database instance without mounting the database enter STARTUP NOMOUNT Example 10 2 Mounting the Database To start an instance mount the database but leave the database closed enter STARTUP MOUNT Example 10 3 Opening the Database To start an instance using the Oracle Database Server parameter file INITSALES ORA mount and open the database named SALES and restrict access to database administrato
189. QL blocks and to format and print query results SQL Plus treats SQL Plus commands differently than SQL commands or PL SQL blocks 4 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Running SQL Plus Commands To speed up command entry you can abbreviate many SQL Plus commands For information on and abbreviations of all SQL Plus commands see Chapter 12 SOL Plus Command Reference Example 4 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command This example shows how you might enter a SQL Plus command to change the format used to display the column SALARY of the sample view EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 1 Enter this SOL Plus command COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 999 HEADING MONTHLY SALARY If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you have entered the line press Return SOL Plus notes the new format and displays the SOL Plus command prompt again ready for a new command 2 Enter the following query and press Return to run it SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 EMPLOYEE _ID LAST NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 100 King AD_PRES 24 000 101 Kochhar AD_VP 17 000 102 De Haan AD_VP 17 000 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 201 Hartstein MK_MAN 13 000 6 rows selected The COLUMN command formatted the column SALARY with a dollar sign and a comma and gave it a new heading Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax SQL Plus commands have a different syntax fr
190. RCHAR2 15 ENCRYPT COL3 CHAR 5 COL4 CHAR 20 For more information on using the CREATE TYPE command see your Oracle Database SQL Language Reference For information about using the SET DESCRIBE and SHOW DESCRIBE commands see the SET command on page 12 88 and the SHOW command on page 12 168 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 55 DISCONNECT DISCONNECT Syntax DISC ONNECT Commits pending changes to the database and logs the current username out of Oracle Database but does not exit SOL Plus Usage Use DISCONNECT within a script to prevent user access to the database when you want to log the user out of Oracle Database but have the user remain in SQL Plus In SQL Plus command line use EXIT or QUIT to log out of Oracle Database and return control to your computer s operating system Examples Your script might begin with a CONNECT command and end with a DISCONNECT as shown later CONNECT HR SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW DISCONNECT SET INSTANCE FIN2 CONNECT HR2 12 56 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EDIT EDIT Syntax Usage ED IT file_name exf where file_namel ext represents the file you wish to edit typically a script Invokes an operating system text editor on the contents of the specified file or on the contents of the buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands Enter EDIT with no filename to edit the con
191. RDER BY LAST_NAME LIST 2 ensures that line 2 is the current line INPUT adds a new line containing the ORDER BY clause after the current line The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY COMMISSION_PCT 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 ORDER BY LAST_NAME To add a two line WHERE clause enter LIST 2 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW INPUT 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN SQL Plus Command Reference 12 65 INPUT 4 AND COMMISSION_PCT 25 5 INPUT prompts you for new lines until you enter an empty line or a period The SQL buffer now contains the following lines SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN AND COMMISSION_PCT 25 ORDER BY LAST_NAME 12 66 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference LIST LIST Syntax Terms Examples LIST n n m n nLAST 1 n1 LAST LAST Lists one or more lines of the SOL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SOL Plus commands In SQL Plus command line you can also use to list all the lines in the SOL buffer Term Description n Lists line n nm Lists lines n through m n Lists line n through the current line n LAST Lists line n through the last line E Lists the current line n Lists the current line through line n LAST Lists the current line through the last line LAST Lists the last line mn Enter LIST with
192. RINT turns off the screen output and printing of the column PRINT turns the printing of the column ON 12 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Usage NULIL text Controls the text SOL Plus displays for null values in the given column The default is a white space SET NULL controls the text displayed for all null values for all columns unless overridden for a specific column by the NULL clause of the COLUMN command When a NULL value is selected a variable s type always becomes CHAR so the SET NULL text can be stored in it OLD_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the variable in BTITLE commands Use OLD_VALUE to display column values in the bottom title You must include the column in a BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action OLD_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause Variables specified with OLD_V ALUE are expanded before BTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the BTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of the report the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a BTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for OLD_V ALUE variables that are to be substituted on each page of the report If you want to use a su
193. Reference 12 89 SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET FEEDBACK 6 InlON OFF on Displays the number of records returned by a query when page 12 118 a query selects at least n records SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY on Checks to make sure that SOL statements conform to the INTERMEDIATE FULL page 12 119 ANSI ISO SQL92 standard SET FLUSH ON OFF on Controls when output is sent to the user s display device page 12 120 SET HEADING ON OFF on Controls printing of column headings in reports page 12 121 SET HEADSEP 1 Icl ON OFF on Defines the character you enter as the heading separator page 12 122 character SET INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL on Changes the default instance for your session to the page 12 123 specified instance path SET LINESIZE 80 n on Sets the total number of characters that SOL Plus displays page 12 124 on one line before beginning a new line SET LOBOFFSET n 1 on Sets the starting position from which BLOB BFILE CLOB page 12 125 and NCLOB data is retrieved and displayed SET LOGSOURCE pathname on Specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved page 12 126 during recovery SET LONG 80 n on Sets maximum width in bytes for displaying LONG page 12 127 BLOB BFILE CLOB NCLOB and XMLType values and for copying LONG values SET LONGCHUNKSIZE 80 n on Sets the size in bytes of the increments in which SQL Plus page 12 128 retrieves a LONG
194. Running Operating System Commands Pausing the Display Saving Changes to the Database Automatically Interpreting Error Messages Entering and Executing Commands Unless stated otherwise descriptions of commands are applicable to all user interfaces In the command line type commands at the SOL Plus prompt and press Return to execute them Usually you separate the words in a command with a space or a tab You can use additional spaces or tabs between words to make your commands more readable Case sensitivity is operating system specific For the sake of clarity all table names column names and commands in this guide appear in capital letters You can enter three kinds of commands SQL commands for working with information in the database a PL SQL blocks also for working with information in the database SQL Plus commands for formatting query results setting options and editing and storing SQL commands and PL SQL blocks The manner in which you continue a command on additional lines end a command or execute a command differs depending on the type of command you wish to enter SQL Plus Basics 4 1 Listing a Table Definition and run Examples of how to run and execute these types of commands are found on the following pages The SQL Buffer The SQL buffer stores the most recently entered SQL command or PL SQL block but not SQL Plus commands The command or block remains in the buffer until replaced by t
195. SET COLSEP el ctenet ys iii ta ia tia aros ects 12 101 SET GONIGAT 4 te FON OFE Scorsese melee 12 102 SEL COPYC OMMITIAO l Aries 12 103 SET COPYTYPECHECK ON KORF nc 12 104 SET DEF INE amp e ON OFF eenn e e a E E 12 105 SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF 12 106 SELECHOTON OF E ic a whee aed Waseda A acts 12 107 SET EDITE ILE file namel ett coaocinotniccia iia lecedsvtensassestbsedysddcehin a aaRS 12 108 SET EMB EDDED ON MOE E sia sandia 12 109 SET ERRORL OGGING ON OFF TABLE schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER identifier 12 110 SET ESCAPE Nel es ON POPE ia ts a ds 12 115 SET ESCCHARY 22 1962 NAO a aa 12 116 SET EXITC OMMIT ON LOPP ferreo iternm i ir aia a a A RNR 12 117 SET FEED BACK 6 1 ON OFF arresteert oi erein AE KA EE Sia 12 118 SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL oooncioninicnicicninionininnoninnnnos 12 119 SEL FLUISHI ON OFF A a 12 120 SET HEATDING ON OF Etica ii a lada 12 121 SET HEADS ER 4 Te TON ORF ic a did 12 122 SET INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL ceeceecssesesecesesseseecseseeeeeeseceneeceececaeeeeeeeeseeeneeaeees 12 123 SET LIN ESIZE 80 iii A bende stk tenes teas Sieve avs sande ested bev dese eee OS 12 124 SET LOBOE FSET 1 lAs iii iii lides 12 125 SET LOGSOURGE pathnameluuinai taba bool 12 126 SET TONG 480 Momia iia ela rd dd Ei iia 12 127 SET LONGC HUNKSIZE 180 tabeccisissn cits
196. SKIP n clause at the beginning of the BTITLE command For example to skip one line before the bottom title in the example above you could enter the following command BTITLE SKIP 1 CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Indenting a Title Element You can use the COL clause in TTITLE or BTITLE to indent the title element a specific number of spaces For example COL 1 places the following values in the first character position and so is equivalent to LEFT or an indent of zero COL 15 places the title element in the 15th character position indenting it 14 spaces Example 6 21 Indenting a Title Element To print the company name left aligned with the report name indented five spaces on the next line enter TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET SKIP 1 COL 6 SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query to see the results 6 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Entering Long Titles If you need to enter a title greater than 500 characters in length you can use the SQL Plus command DEFINE to place the text of each line of the title in a separate substitution variable DEFINE LINE1 This is the first line DEFINE LINE2 This is
197. SOLCASE does not change the SQL buffer itself SQL Plus Command Reference 12 145 SET SQLCO NTINUE gt text SET SQLCO NTINUE gt text Sets the character sequence SQL Plus displays as a prompt after you continue a SQL Plus command on an additional line using a hyphen Example To set the SQL Plus command continuation prompt to an exclamation point followed by a space enter SET SQLCONTINUE SQL Plus will prompt for continuation as follows TTITLE MONTHLY INCOME RIGHT SQL PNO SKIP 2 CENTER PC DIVISION The default continuation prompt is gt 12 146 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET SOLN UMBER ON OFF Sets the prompt for the second and subsequent lines of a SQL command or PL SQL block ON sets the prompt to be the line number OFF sets the prompt to the value of SQLPROMPT SQL Plus Command Reference 12 147 SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY x y z SET SQLPLUSCOMPAT IBILITY x y z Sets the behavior to that of the release or version specified by x y z Where x is the version number y is the release number and z is the update number For example 8 1 7 9 0 1 or 10 2 The features affected by SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY are tabulated in the SQL Plus Compatibility Matrix shown You can also set the value of SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY using the C OMPATIBILITY argument of the SQLPLUS command when starting SOL Plus from the command line The defau
198. SOR A REFCURSOR bind variable may not be PRINTed more than once without re executing the PL SQL OPEN FOR statement The following example illustrates creating a bind variable changing its value and displaying its current value To create a bind variable enter VARIABLE ret_val NUMBER To change this bind variable in SOL Plus you must use a PL SQL block BEGIN ret_val 4 END PL SQL procedure successfully completed To display the value of the bind variable in SQL Plus enter PRINT ret_val RET_VAL The following example illustrates creating a bind variable and then setting it to the value returned by a function VARIABLE id NUMBER BEGIN id EMP_MANAGEMENT HIRE BLAKE MANAGER KING 2990 SALES END The value returned by the stored procedure is being placed in the bind variable id It can be displayed with the PRINT command or used in subsequent PL SQL subprograms The following example illustrates automatically displaying a bind variable SET AUTOPRINT ON VARIABLE a REFCURSOR BEGIN 12 194 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE OPEN a FOR SELECT LAST_NAME CITY DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID END PL SQL procedure successfully completed LAST_NAME CITY DEPARTMENT_ID Hartstein Toronto 20 Russell Oxford 80 Partners Oxford 80 King Seattle 90 Kochhar Seattle 90 De Haan Seattle 90 6 r
199. SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 11 SQL Plus Globalization Support Globalization support enables the storing processing and retrieval of data in native languages The languages that can be stored in an Oracle database are encoded by Oracle Database supported character sets Globalization support ensures that database utilities error messages sort order and date time monetary numeric and calendar conventions adjust to the native language and locale Topics a Configuring Globalization Support in Command line SQL Plus a NLS_LANG Environment Variable For more information on globalization support see the Oracle Technology Network globalization notes at http www oracle com technetwork products globalization and see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide Configuring Globalization Support in Command line SQL Plus SOL Plus supports multiple languages through the NLS_LANG environment variable To display another language in SOL Plus before starting SOL Plus you must configure a NLS LANG in the SOL Plus client environment The Oracle Database during installation SQL Plus Client The SOL Plus client environment is configured by setting the NLS_LANG environment variable which is read by SOL Plus at startup Oracle Database The Oracle Database environment is configured by creating the database with the required character set NLS_LANG Environment Variable The NLS_LANG environment variable has th
200. T DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID 30 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 Himuro 2600 Tobias 2800 Baida 2900 Khoo 3100 Raphaely 11000 TRATARE O AAA avg 4150 sum 24900 6 rows selected Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions You can list your current COMPUTE definitions by entering the COMPUTE command with no clauses COMPUTE Example 6 17 Removing COMPUTE Definitions To remove all COMPUTE definitions and the accompanying BREAK definition enter the following commands CLEAR BREAKS breaks cleared CLEAR COMPUTES computes cleared You may wish to place the commands CLEAR BREAKS and CLEAR COMPUTES at the beginning of every script to ensure that previously entered BREAK and COMPUTE commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions The word page refers to a screen full of information on your display or a page of a spooled printed report You can place top and bottom titles on each page set the number of lines per page and determine the width of each line The word report refers to the complete results of a query You can also place headers and footers on each report and format them in the same way as top and bottom titles on pages Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 17 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Setting the Top and B
201. TE command 12 14 ALIAS clause 12 14 and CLEAR COLUMN command 12 15 CLEAR clause 12 14 clearing columns 12 24 12 27 controlling display characteristics 12 15 display characteristics 12 14 entering multiple 12 15 FORMAT clause 12 14 LIKE clause 12 14 listing attribute display characteristics 12 14 OFF clause 12 14 ON clause 12 14 restoring column display attributes 12 14 suppressing column display attributes 12 14 AUDIT command disabling 9 3 AUTOCOMMIT variable 4 9 12 89 12 94 AUTOMATIC clause 12 74 AUTOPRINT variable 12 89 12 95 AUTORECOVERY variable 12 89 12 96 autotrace report 8 1 AUTOTRACE variable 8 1 12 89 12 97 background process startup after abnormal termination 12 174 BASEURI variable 12 91 BASEURI XQUERY option 12 164 basic OCI package D 1 batch jobs authenticating users in 3 2 batch mode 12 60 BEGIN command 4 5 disabling 9 4 BFILE clause VARIABLE command 12 193 BINARY_DOUBLE clause ACCEPT command 12 10 12 193 VARIABLE command 12 193 BINARY_FLOAT clause ACCEPT command 12 10 12 193 VARIABLE command 12 193 Index 2 bind variables 5 21 creating 12 191 displaying 12 71 displaying automatically 12 95 12 193 in PL SQL blocks 12 193 in SQL statements 12 193 in the COPY command 12 193 blank line in PL SQL blocks 4 5 in SOL commands 4 5 preserving inSQL commands 12 91 12 144 BLOB column width 6 5 formating in reports 6 4 BLOB clause VARIABLE command 1
202. TML to a spool file The following SPOOL command triggers the writing of the lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags to the named file SPOOL report html After the SPOOL command anything entered or displayed on standard output is written to the spool file report html Enter a SQL query SELECT lt A HREF http oracle com DEPARTMENT_NAME htm1 gt DEPARTMENT_ NAME lt A gt DEPARTMENT NAME CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Enter the SPOOL OFF command SPOOL OFF The lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt tags are appended to the spool file report html before it is closed The output from report sql is a file report html that can be loaded into a web browser Open report html in your web browser It should appear something like the following 7 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus SQL gt SELECT lt A HREF https oracle com DEPARTMENT_NAME html gt DEPARTMENT_NAME lt A gt DEPARTMENT NAME CITY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE SALARY gt 12000 DEPARTMENT CITY Sales Marketing Toronto 6 rows selected SQL gt SPOOL OFF In this example the prompts and query text have not been suppressed Depending on how you invoke a script you can use SET ECHO OFF or command line SILENT options to do this The SQL Plus commands in this example contain several items of usage worth noting The hyphen used to continue lines
203. TNS and PLS generated by Oracle Database see the Oracle Database Error Messages guide SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0002 ACCEPT statement must specify a variable name Cause Required variable name was missing after the ACCEPT command Action Re enter the ACCEPT command with a variable argument to store the input value SP2 0003 Ill formed ACCEPT command starting as command_string Cause An invalid option was used in the ACCEPT command Action Check the syntax of the ACCEPT command for the correct option SP2 0004 Nothing to append Cause There was no specified text entered after the APPEND command Action Re enter the APPEND command with the specified text SP2 0006 not enough room to format computations Cause Unable to allocate memory to format computations Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0015 no break s defined Cause There was no break defined Action Define a break Check the syntax of the BREAK command for the correct options SP2 0016 break specification must start with ON BY or ACROSS keyword Cause An invalid option was used in the BREAK command Action Check the syntax of the BREAK command for the correct options SP2 0017 missing column name after keyword_name keyword SQL Plus Error Messages 13 1 SQL Plus Error Messages Cause There was no column name af
204. TO clause the destination defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must use a TO clause to specify a destination database other than the default The COPY command TO clause does not support SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged connections database Specifies usernamel password connect_identifier of the Oracle Database source or destination database you wish to COPY FROM or COPY TO The COPY command does not support SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged connections You must include a username SQL Plus prompts you for the password associated with the username specified in the COPY FROM or COPY TO clauses SQL Plus suppresses the display of your password response You must include the connect_identifier clause to specify the source or destination database The exact syntax depends on the Oracle Net configuration For more information refer to the Oracle Net manual or contact your DBA APPEND Inserts the rows from query into destination_table if the table exists If destination_table does not exist COPY creates it CREATE Inserts the rows from query into destination_table after first creating the table If destination_table already exists COPY returns an error INSERT Inserts the rows from query into destination_table If destination_table does not exist COPY returns an error When using INSERT the USING query must select one column for each column in destination_table
205. T_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID IN AC_MGR SA_MAN ORDER BY JOB_ID SALARY SQL Plus Command Reference 12 35 COMPUTE JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY AC_MGR Higgins 12000 o 98 8 Daaa TOTAL 12000 SA_MAN Zlotkey 10500 Cambrault 11000 Errazuriz 12000 Partners 13500 Russell 14000 WR RRRORIRR C ait a iy ee ea ath TOTAL 61000 6 rows selected To calculate the total of salaries greater than 12 000 on a report enter COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON REPORT BREAK ON REPORT COLUMN DUMMY HEADING SELECT DUMMY SALARY EMPLOYEE_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY SALARY SALARY EMPLOYEE_ID 13000 201 13500 146 14000 145 17000 101 17000 102 24000 100 sum 98500 6 rows selected To calculate the average and maximum salary for the executive and accounting departments enter BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_NAME SKIP 1 COMPUTE AVG LABEL Dept Average MAX LABEL Dept Maximum OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_NAME SELECT DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_NAME IN Executive Accounting ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_NAME 12 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY Accounting Higgins 12000 Gietz 8300 KEKE KKK KR KKK KEK RK KERR KERR RRR RRR KK aa Dept Average 10150 Dept Maximum 12000 Executive King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 KEK KKK KKK KK KE KKK KERR
206. Table You can refer to another user s table in a COPY command by qualifying the table name with the username just as you would in your local database or in a query with a database link For example to make a local copy of a table named DEPARTMENT owned by the username ADAMS on the database associated with the Oracle Net connect identifier BOSTONDB you would enter COPY FROM HR BOSTONDB CREATE EMPLOYEE_COPY2 USING SELECT FROM ADAMS DEPARTMENT Of course you could get the same result by instructing COPY to log in to the remote database as ADAMS You cannot do that however unless you know the password associated with the username ADAMS B 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data between Tables on One Database Copying Data between Tables on One Database You can copy data from one table to another in a single database local or remote To copy between tables in your local database specify your own username and the service name for your local database in either a FROM or a TO clause omit the other clause COPY FROM HR MYDATABASE INSERT EMPLOYEE_COPY2 USING SELECT FROM EMPLOYEE_COPY To copy between tables on a remote database include the same username and service name in the FROM and TO clauses COPY FROM HR BOSTONDB TO HR BOSTONDB INSERT EMPLOYEE _COPY2 USING SELECT FROM EMPLOYEE_COPY SQL Plus COPY Command B 7 Copying Data between Tables on One Database B 8 SQL Plus User
207. Table 2 2 Profile Scripts affecting SQL Plus User Interface Settings This script is run in the Command line Site Profile glogin sql After successful Oracle Database connection from a SQLPLUS or CONNECT command Can contain any content that can be included in a SQL Plus Where NOLOG is specified script such as system variable settings or other global settings the DBA wants to implement User Profile login sql Immediately after the Site Profile Can contain any content that can be included in a SOL Plus script but the settings are only applicable to the user s sessions Configuring SQL Plus 2 3 SQL Plus Configuration Table 2 3 Commands in Profile scripts affecting SQL Plus User Interface Settings In a profile script this command affects the Command line by SET Setting the SQL Plus compatibility mode to obtain the SOLPLUSCOMPATTIBILITY behavior the DBA wants for this site x y z Also see the SOL Plus Compatibility Matrix on page 12 148 SOLPLUS command As for SET SOLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY but set with the COMPATIBILITY Option SOLPLUS command COMPATIBILITY option SOLPLUS command RESTRICT Starting SOL Plus with the RESTRICT option set to 3 Option prevents the User Profile script from being read Site Profile A Site Profile script is created during installation It is used by the database administrator to configure site wide behavior for SOL Plus Command line co
208. These terms and clauses also apply to the REPFOOTER command PAGE Begins a new page after printing the specified report header or before printing the specified report footer text The report header or footer text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line The default is NULL variable A substitution variable or any of the following system maintained values SQL LNO is the current line number SQL PNO is the current page number SQL CODE is the current error code SOL RELEASE is the current Oracle Database release number and SOL USER is the current username To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the report header or footer You can use the FORMAT clause to format variable OFF Turns the report header or footer off suppresses its display without affecting its definition COL n Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Column in this context means print position not table column S KIP n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line TAB n SQL Plus Command Reference 12 83 REPHEADER Usage Examples Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for 1 Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER A IGHT Left align center and right align data on the cur
209. W ET MA ET CO ELECT HERE RKUP HTML PREFORMAT ON LSEP LAST_NAME JOB_ID DEPARTMENT_ID ROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW DEPARTMENT_ID 20 LAST_NAME JOB_ID DEPARTMENT_ID pa aye ci a ora es AAA sa Hartstein MK_MAN 20 Fay MK_REP 20 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 101 SET CON CAT c ON OFF SET CON CAT c ON OFF Sets the character used to terminate a substitution variable reference when SQL Plus would otherwise interpret the next character as a part of the variable name SQL Plus resets the value of CONCAT to a period when you switch CONCAT on 12 102 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET COPYC OMMIT 0 n Controls the number of rows after which the COPY command commits changes to the database COPY commits rows to the destination database each time it copies n row batches Valid values are zero to 5000 You can set the size of a batch with the ARRAYSIZE variable If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY performs a commit only at the end of a copy operation SQL Plus Command Reference 12 103 SET COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF SET COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF Sets the suppression of the comparison of datatypes while inserting or appending to tables with the COPY command This is to facilitate copying to DB2 which requires that a CHAR be copied to a DB2 DATE 12 104 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary
210. Z cieciu 12 148 SET SOLPRELEDG E oeno a ais 12 150 SET SOLP ROMPT SQL gt text conocieran cer 12 151 SET SQLT ERMINATOR c ON OFP cuccccccsssssssssssessessecccssssssssssusessseceeceessssssnsensesssecees 12 152 SET SUF FPIX SOL ll fertier n ae tine cule e e Aa 12 153 SET PAB AON OBE a ute aia 12 154 SET TERM OUT ON LOBE ar ad il E c 12 155 SANVI ONMO S Is 12 156 13 SET TIMING ON TORF caca lia esas ANE E S SEA Ein ERRE 12 157 SET TRIM OUT ON OFF k tn kn a en n aus an anann annann 12 158 SET TRIMS POOL ON OFF neninn 12 159 SET UND ERLINE c ON Oda iia 12 160 SET VER IFY ON LORA Sz cestode cata enika eds ats n ann n A Ea oss ie Dies tet Apacer 12 161 STWR AT PON AOE a a bl Moc thle Shh etl estes 12 162 SET XMLOPT IMIZATIONCHECK ON OBE ssessssscssssssecsccessssssscsssesssssssesesesssssseeesseesen 12 163 SET XQUERY BASEURI text coccion nana 12 164 SET XQUERY ORDERING UNORDERED ORDERED DEFAULT coccion 12 165 SET XQUERY NODE BYVALUE BYREFERENCE DEFAULT 12 166 SET XQUERY CONTEXT text cecccccsssscsecssccsssssecesescsssssssesssscessssseseeecesssssusesecsessssneesscesssssnsesseseee 12 167 SHOW eo e tro ANN tc tant er etn oie 12 168 O ttl aaah 12 174 SPOOL wares teste a adas ls Sd 12 176 A NCS a ee 12 178 ENEE N D EEEE AEE E le tact EO E 12 180 STORE aes a E E E niece A tek E NES 12 185 A a Lies Goh See ed ac ened ate 12 186 ME WE See ee A Seen ee Tee mee mer cent name 12 187 UNEN c
211. ZE to avoid printing headings frequently or set it to O to prevent headings being displayed SET SERVEROUTPUT SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF suppresses the display output DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_ LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SOL Plus Setting SERVEROUTPUT OFF stops internal SOL Plus calls to the DBMS_OUTPUT package done after user SOL statements SET SQLPROMPT Sets the SQL Plus command prompt Use the default prompt SQL gt to stop variable substitution occurring each time the prompt is displayed Tuning SQL Plus 8 9 SQL Plus Script Tuning SET TAB Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal output Setting TAB ON causes multiple spaces to be compressed in terminal output Unless this significantly reduces the written data the processing required may marginally outweigh any benefit SET TERMOUT SET TERMOUT OFF suppresses the display so that you can spool output from a script without seeing it on the screen If both spooling to file and writing to terminal are not required use SET TERMOUT OFF in SQL scripts to disable terminal output SET TRIMOUT ON SET TRIMSPOOL ON UNDEFINE SET TRIMOUT ON or SET TRIMSPOOL ON removes trailing blanks at the end of each displayed or spooled line Setting these variables ON can reduce the amount of data written However if LINESIZE is optimal it may be faster to set the variables OFF The SQL Plus output line is blank filled throughout the query processing rou
212. able 5 2 12 45 12 57 12 58 _EDITOR substitution variable 12 46 _EDITOR in EDIT command 5 2 12 46 12 57 _O_RELEASE predefined variable 12 45 12 46 _O_VERSION predefined variable 12 45 12 46 _PRIVILEGE predefined variable 12 45 12 46 _RC predefined variable 12 64 _SOLPLUS_RELEASE predefined variable 12 45 12 46 12 47 _USER predefined variable 12 45 12 46 infinity sign 12 29 negative infinity sign 12 29 Numerics 0 number format 6 4 9 number format 6 4 A ABORT mode 12 174 abort query 4 8 ACCEPT command 5 19 12 10 and DEFINE command 12 43 BINARY_DOUBLE clause 12 10 12 193 BINARY_FLOAT clause 12 10 12 193 customizing prompts for value 5 20 DATE clause 12 10 DEFAULT clause 12 11 FORMAT clause 12 10 HIDE clause 12 11 NOPROMPT clause 12 11 NUMBER clause 5 20 PROMPT clause 5 19 12 11 access denying and granting 9 1 alias 3 3 ALIAS clause 12 27 in ATTRIBUTE command 12 14 ALL clause 12 168 ALTER command disabling 9 3 ampersands amp in parameters 5 17 12 5 12 7 12 178 Index 1 substitution variables 5 12 ANALYZE command disabling 9 3 APPEND clause in COPY command _ B 2 B 5 in SAVE command 12 87 12 176 APPEND command 5 3 5 5 12 12 APPINFO clause 8 8 12 92 ARCHIVE LOG command 10 3 12 13 mode 10 3 argument in START command 5 17 ARRAYSIZE variable 8 8 12 89 12 93 relationship to COPY command B 3 B 6 ASSOCIATE command disabling 9 3 ATTRIBU
213. able If it is not set then an absolute or relative path must be used to start SQL Plus Remove any other Oracle directories from PATH For example PATH home instantclient12_1 PATH export PATH 3 Set Oracle globalization variables required for your locale A default locale will be assumed if no variables are set See the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide for more information For example NLS_LANG AMERICAN_AMERICA UTF8 export NLS_LANG Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on Windows The environment may be configured using SET commands in a Windows command prompt or made permanent by setting Environment Variables in System Properties For example to set environment variables in Windows 2000 using System Properties open System from the Control Panel click the Advanced tab and then click Environment Variables SQL Plus Instant Client D 5 Connecting to a Database with SQL Plus Instant Client 1 Add the directory containing the Instant Client files to the PATH system environment variable Remove any other Oracle directories from PATH For example add c instantclient12_1 to the beginning of PATH 2 Set Oracle globalization variables required for your locale A default locale will be assumed if no variables are set See the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide for more information For example to set NLS_LANG for a Japanese environment create a user environment variable NLS_LANG set to JAPANESE _J
214. about stopping a database see the SHUTDOWN command on page 12 174 Example 10 4 Shutting Down the Database To shut down the database normally after it has been opened and mounted enter SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted ORACLE instance shut down Pluggable Database Shutdown To shutdown a pluggable database PDB 1 Connect to the PDB with the required privileges 2 Run the SHUTDOWN command Note a When the current container is a PDB the SHUTDOWN command only closes the PDB not the CDB instance a There is no SHUTDOWN command for a PDB that is equivalent to SHUTDOWN TRANSACTIONAL or SHUTDOWN ABORT fora non CDB For more information about PDB shutdown see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide guide For more information about starting a database see the STARTUP command Redo Log Files Every Oracle database has a set of two or more redo log files The set of redo log files for a database is collectively referred to as the database s redo log The redo log is used to record changes made to data If for example there is a database failure the redo log is used to recover the database To protect against a failure involving the redo log itself Oracle Database has a mirrored redo log so that two or more copies of the redo log can be maintained on different disks ARCHIVELOG Mode Operating a database in ARCHIVELOG mode enables the archiving of the online redo log
215. acters are used in filenames if you have legacy files that do use them it might be useful to include a SET ESCCHAR command in your GLogin file to implement it across your site If not escaped the characters O and have significance when interpreted and cause errors for the SPOOL START RUN and EDIT commands SET ESCCHAR is set OFF by default Example If you include the character in your filename then SET ESCCHAR RUN MYFILES behaves normally 12 116 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET EXITC OMMIT ON OFF Specifies whether the default EXIT behavior is COMMIT or ROLLBACK The default setting is ON which means that work is committed on exit whether you expected it to be committed or not Set EXITCOMMIT OFF to rollback work on exit Table 12 5 shows the exit action associated with combinations of SET commands AUTOCOMMIT amp EXITCOMMIT and the EXIT command Table 12 5 Exit Behavior AUTOCOMMIT EXITCOMMIT EXIT AUTOCOMMIT EXITCOMMIT EXIT Exit Behavior ON ON COMMIT ON OFF COMMIT OFF ON COMMIT OFF OFF z ROLLBACK ON ON COMMIT COMMIT ON ON ROLLBACK COMMIT ON OFF COMMIT COMMIT ON OFF ROLLBACK COMMIT OFF ON COMMIT COMMIT OFF ON ROLLBACK ROLLBACK OFF OFF COMMIT COMMIT OFF OFF ROLLBACK ROLLBACK SQL Plus Command Reference 12 117 SET FEED BACK 6 n ON OFF SET FEED BACK 6 n
216. after the script has finished The at sign and double at sign commands function similarly to START Disabling the START command in the Product User Profile also disables the and commands See at sign on page 12 5 and double at sign on page 12 7 for further information on these commands See Disabling SOL Plus SOL and PL SQL Commands on page 9 3 for more information The EXIT or QUIT command in a script terminates SQL Plus 12 178 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference START Examples A file named PROMOTE with the extension SQL used to promote employees might contain the following command SELECT FIRST NAME LAST NAME JOB_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 AND SALARY gt amp 2 To run this script enter START PROMOTE ST_MAN 7000 or if it is located on a web server enter a command in the form START HTTP machine_name domain port PROMOTE SOL ST_MAN 7000 Where machine_name domain must be replaced by the host domain name and port by the port number used by the web server where the script is located The following command is executed SELECT LAST NAME LAST_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID ST_MAN AND SALARY gt 7000 and the results displayed SQL Plus Command Reference 12 179 STARTUP STARTUP Syntax STARTUP db_options cdb_options upgrade_options where db options has the following syntax FORCE RESTRICT PFILE filename QUIET MOUNT dbn
217. age ORA 00942 ERROR at line 2 ORA 6550 line 2 column 29 PLS 00201 ORA 00942 O P ERROR at line 3 table or view does not exist open u for select from dept RA 6550 line 2 column 16 L SQL SQL Statement ignored ORA 00907 missing right parenthesis SP2 0158 unknown SET option garbage table or view does not exist To view the errror log written to the default error log table SPERRORLOG enter SELECT TIMESTAMP USERNAME SCRIPT IDENTIFIER STATEMENT MESSAGE FROM SPERRORLOG which produces the following output TIMESTAM STATEMEN P USERNAME SCRIPT T MESSAGE Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for ORA 06550 line 2 21 30 03 2006 select from column 27 dept Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for PL SQL ORA 00942 21 30 05 2006 select from table or view does dept not exist Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for ORA 06550 line 2 21 30 05 2006 select from column 13 dept Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for PL SQL SQL 21 30 05 2006 select from Statement ignored dept Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql show errors ORA 00907 missing 21 30 06 2006 procedure right parenthesis ggg Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql set garbage SP2 0158 unknown 21 30 09 2006 SET option garbage Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql garbage ORA 00942 table or 21 30 10 2006 view does not exist To use a user defined error log table to record query errors fr
218. aged standby recovery after the final end of redo archival indicator THROUGH NEXT SWITCHOVER Terminates managed standby recovery after recovering the next end of redo archival indicator CANCEL managed clause Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file Session control returns when the recovery process terminates CANCEL IMMEDIATE Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first Session control returns when the recovery process terminates CANCEL IMMEDIATE WAIT Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first Session control returns when the managed standby recovery terminates CANCEL IMMEDIATE cannot be issued from the same session that issued the RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE statement SQL Plus Command Reference 12 77 RECOVER Usage Examples CANCEL IMMEDIATE NOWAIT Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first Session control returns immediately CANCEL NOWAIT Terminates managed standby recovery after the next redo log file read and returns session control immediately FINISH Recovers the current standby online logfiles of the standby database This clause may be useful if the prim
219. aks in LAST_NAME cause no action because LAST_NAME does not appear in the BREAK command In BREAK commands nulls are considered equal to each other but not equal to anything else This is different to the treatment of nulls in WHERE clauses ON expr action action When you include actions specifies actions for SQL Plus to take when the value of the expression changes When you omit actions BREAK ON expr suppresses printing of duplicate values of expr and marks where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can use an expression involving one or more table columns or an alias assigned to a report column in a SQL SELECT or SQL Plus COLUMN command If you use an expression in a BREAK command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b in a BREAK command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command The information given for ON column also applies to ON expr ON ROW action action When you include actions specifies actions for SOL Plus to take when a SOL SELECT command returns a row The ROW break becomes the innermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command You should always specify an action when you BREAK on a row ON REPORT action Marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE
220. ame OPEN open_db_options dbname NOMOUNT where open_db_options has the following syntax READ ONLY WRITE RECOVER RECOVER where cdb_options has the following syntax root_connection_options pdb_connection_options where root_connection_options has the following syntax PLUGGABLE DATABASE pdbname FORCE RESTRICT OPEN open_pdb_options where pdb_connection_options has the following syntax FORCE RESTRICT OPEN open_pdab_options where open_pdb_options has the following syntax READ WRITE READ ONLY and where upgrade_options has the following syntax PFILE filename UPGRADE DOWNGRADE QUIET Starts an Oracle Database instance with several options including mounting and opening a database Prerequisites fora PDB STARTUP When the current container is a pluggable database PDB the STARTUP command can only be used if The current user has SYSDBA SYSOPER SYSBACKUP or SYSDG system privilege a The privilege is either commonly granted or locally granted in the PDB The current user exercises the privilege using AS SYSDBA AS SYSOPER SYSBACKUP or AS SYSDG at connect time The PDB is in MOUNTED mode excluding the use of the FORCE option The PDB must be in READ ONLY or READ WRITE mode to be in mounted mode For more information see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide 12 180 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP Terms Note Only use db_opt
221. an operating system file with no escape characters headings or extra characters embedded For example if you do not have Oracle Net you need to create a flat file for use with SQL Loader when moving data from Oracle9i to Oracle Database 10g 6 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results To create a flat file with SOL Plus you first must enter the following SET commands SET NEWPAGE 0 SET SPACE 0 SET LINESIZE 80 SET PAGESIZE 0 SET ECHO OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET VERIFY OFF SET HEADING OFF SET MARKUP HTML OFF SPOOL OFF After entering these commands you use the SPOOL command as shown in the previous section to create the flat file The SET COLSEP command may be useful to delineate the columns For more information see the SET command on page 12 88 Sending Results to a File To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file_name SQL Plus stores all information displayed on the screen after you enter the SPOOL command in the file you specify Sending Results to a Printer To print query results spool them to a file as described in the previous section Then instead of using SPOOL OFF enter the command in the following form SPOOL OUT SQL Plus stops spooling and copies the contents of the spooled file to your computer s standard default printer SPOOL OUT does not delete the spo
222. and where command represents an operating system command Executes an operating system command without leaving SOL Plus Enter HOST without command to display an operating system prompt You can then enter multiple operating system commands For information on returning to SQL Plus refer to the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system Note Operating system commands entered from a SQL Plus session using the HOST command do not affect the current SQL Plus session For example setting an operating system environment variable only affects SOL Plus sessions started subsequently You can disable HOST For more information about disabling HOST see SQL Plus Security on page 9 1 Usage In some operating systems you can use a character in place of HOST such as in Windows or in UNIX or you may not have access to the HOST command See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system or ask your DBA for more information On some platforms an _RC substitution variable may be created with a HOST return value that is operation system dependent It is recommended that you do not use the _ RC substitution variable in scripts as it is not portable SQL Plus removes the SOLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the HOST command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SOLTERMINATOR See SET SOLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 12 152 for more informa
223. and Use of PUP Columns The following list describes each column in the PUP table PUP Column Description PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMERIC_ VALUE CHAR_VALUE DATE_VALUE LONG_VALUE Must contain the product name in this case SQL Plus You cannot enter wildcards or NULL in this column Must contain the username uppercase of the user for whom you wish to disable the command To disable the command for more than one user use SQL wild cards or make multiple entries Thus all of the following entries are valid HR a CLASS1 a CLASS all users whose names start with CLASS a all users Must contain the name in uppercase of the SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command to disable for example RUN If you are disabling a role it must contain the character string ROLES You cannot enter a wildcard See PUP Table Administration on page 9 3 for a list of SQL and SQL Plus commands you can disable See Creating and Controlling Roles on page 9 5 for information on how to disable a role Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store specific file restrictions or other data in this column Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store numeric values in this column Must contain the character string DISABLED to disable a SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command If you are disabling a role it must contain the name of the role you wish to disable You
224. arameter in the Oracle Database initialization file init ora Using the SET LOGSOURCE command without a pathname restores the default location Example To set the default location of log files for recovery to the directory usr oracle10 dbs arch enter SET LOGSOURCE usr oraclel0 dbs arch RECOVER DATABASE 12 126 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET LONG 80 n Example Sets maximum width in bytes for displaying BLOB BFILE CLOB LONG NCLOB and XMLType values and for copying LONG values Querying LONG columns requires enough local memory to store the amount of data specified by SET LONG irrespective of the value of the SET LONGCHUNKSIZE command This requirement does not apply when querying LOBs It is recommended that you do not create tables with LONG columns LONG columns are supported only for backward compatibility Use LOB columns BLOB BFILE CLOB NCLOB instead LOB columns have fewer restrictions than LONG columns and are still being enhanced The maximum value of n is 2 000 000 000 bytes It is important to check that the memory required by your SET LONG command is available on your machine for example SET LONG 2000000000 assumes that available RAM random access memory on the machine exceeds 2 gigabytes To set the maximum number of bytes to fetch for displaying and copying LONG values to 500 enter SET LONG 500 The LONG data will wrap on your screen SOL
225. are any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation delivered to U S Government end users are commercial computer software pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs No other rights are granted to the U S Government This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications Itis not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications that may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure its safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trade
226. argument is quoted check that only double quotes are used Either quote the whole argument or quote the schema and object components separately SP2 0778 Script filename and arguments too long Cause The combined length of the script filename and script arguments is too long for SQL Plus Action Reduce the length of the script name and path Reduce the number and or size of the script arguments SP2 0780 Value entered is not a valid datatype Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not valid for the specified datatype Action Enter a valid number within a valid range for the datatype SP2 0781 command option option_name out of range min through max Cause Attempted to enter a value outside the allowed range for the command option Action Check the limits for the command option and enter a value within the allowed range SP2 0782 Prelim connection established Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0783 Cannot SET variable while connected to a database Cause Attempted to set a system variable that cannot be set while still connected to a database instance Action Disconnect from the database instance before attempting to set the system variable SP2 0784 Invalid or incomplete character beginning byte returned Cause Attempted to return a string from the database that contained an invalid or incomplete character Action Replace the invalid or incomplete string in the database with a valid or co
227. ariable 12 90 12 132 UMBER column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 UMBER clause 5 20 VARIABLE command 12 191 UMBER columns changing format 6 3 12 28 default format 6 3 12 29 number formats 6 4 0 6 4 9 6 4 comma 6 4 setting default 5 17 12 90 12 133 NUMFORMAT clause in LOGIN SQL 2 5 NUMFORMAT variable 12 90 12 133 NUMWIDTH variable 12 90 12 134 effect on NUMBER column format 6 3 12 29 NVARCHAR2 columns changing format 12 28 default format 6 5 12 27 O objects describing 12 106 obsolete commands BTITLE C 2 COLUMN command DEFAULT clause C 2 DOCUMENT C 1 C 2 NEWPAGE C 1 C 2 SET command BUFFER variable C 2 SET command CLOSECURSOR variable C 1 C 3 SET command COMPATIBILITY variable C 1 C 3 SET command DOCUMENT variable C 1 C 3 SET command MAXDATA variable C 1 C 3 SET command SCAN variable C 1 C 4 SET command SPACE variable C 1 C 4 SET command TRUNCATE variable C 2 C 4 SHOW command LABEL variable C 2 TTITLE command old form C 4 OCI Instant Client D 1 OCI package Index 9 basic D 1 lightweight D 1 OF clause 6 12 OFF clause 12 31 in ATTRIBUTE command 12 14 in COLUMN command 6 8 12 31 in REPFOOTER commands 12 83 in REPHEADER commands 12 83 in SPOOL command 6 26 12 176 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 6 22 12 187 OLD_VALUE clause 6 24 12 31 ON clause in ATTRIBUTE command 12 14 in COLUMN command 6 8 12 31 in TT
228. ariables in stored procedures This enables you to store SELECT statements in the database and reference them from SQL Plus A REFCURSOR bind variable can also be returned from a stored function Example 5 14 Creating Referencing and Displaying REFCURSOR Bind Variables To create reference and display a REFCURSOR bind variable first declare a local bind variable of the REFCURSOR datatype create procedure p4 as cl sys_refcursor c2 sys_refcursor begin open cl for SELECT FROM DEPT dbms_sql return_result c1 open c2 for SELECT FROM EMP dbms_sql return_result c2 end 5 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables create procedure p4 as cl sys_refcursor c2 sys_refcursor begin open cl for SELECT FROM DEPT dbms_sql return_result c1l open c2 for SELECT FROM EMP dbms_sql return_result c2 end Next enter a PL SQL block that uses the bind variable in an OPEN FOR SELECT statement This statement opens a cursor variable and executes a query See the Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference for information on the OPEN command and cursor variables In this example we are binding the SOL Plus employee_info bind variable to the cursor variable BEGIN OPEN employee_info FOR SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN END PL SQL procedure successfully completed The results from the SELECT statement can now be displayed in SQL Plu
229. artners 13500 EREAREAKAKA RARA KERR O a sum 27500 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY E 90 AD PRES King 24000 AD_VP Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 kkkkkkkkkkkkk KK RK Ke sum 58000 6 rows selected To compute the sum of salaries for departments 10 and 20 without printing the compute label COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 13000 80 Russell 14000 80 Partners 13500 27500 90 King 24000 90 Kochhar 17000 90 De Haan 17000 58000 6 rows selected To compute the salaries just at the end of the report 6 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SELECT NULL DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 80 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 90 Kochhar 17000 90 De Haan 17000 98500 6 rows selected When you establish the format of a NUMBER column you must allow for the size of the sums included in the report Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report You can calculate and print sum
230. ary database fails It overrides any delays specified for archivelogs so that logs are applied immediately FINISH cannot be issued if you have also specified TIMEOUT DELAY EXPIRE or NEXT clauses You must have the OSDBA role enabled You cannot use the RECOVER command when connected through the multi threaded server To perform media recovery on an entire database all tablespaces the database must be mounted and closed and all tablespaces requiring recovery must be online To perform media recovery on a tablespace the database must be mounted or open and the tablespace must be offline To perform media recovery on a datafile the database can remain open and mounted with the damaged datafiles offline unless the file is part of the SYSTEM tablespace Before using the RECOVER command you must have restored copies of the damaged datafiles from a previous backup Be sure you can access all archived and online redo log files dating back to when that backup was made When another log file is required during recovery a prompt suggests the names of files that are needed The name is derived from the values specified in the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT You should restore copies of the archived redo log files needed for recovery to the destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST if necessary You can override the initialization parameters by setting the LOGSOURCE variable with the SET LOGSOURCE command
231. assword When you start SOL Plus you need a username and password to login to an Oracle Database schema Your username and password identify you as an authorized user of the Oracle Database schema The database administrator DBA is responsible for creating your database account with the necessary privileges and giving you the username and password that enables you to access your account Default logins are created and you are prompted for associated passwords during Oracle Database installation Some of the default login usernames created are a SYS a SYSTEM HR Logins are created and displayed in messages during Oracle Database installation For further information about the default logins see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide Once you have logged in you can connect under a different username using the CONNECT command The username and password must be valid for the database For example to connect the username TODD to the default database using the password FOX you could enter CONNECT TODD You are prompted to enter the password FOX Starting SQL Plus 3 1 Connecting to a Database In the command line interface if you omit the username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them Because CONNECT first disconnects you from your current database you will be left unconnected to any database if you use an invalid username and password in your CONNECT command If you log on or connect as a user whose accoun
232. at entering a line number followed by a string will replace the line regardless of what text follows the line number For example 2 CHANGE OLD NEW will change the second line of the buffer to be 2 C OLD NEW SQL Plus Command Reference 12 23 CLEAR CLEAR Syntax Terms Examples CL EAR option where option represents one of the following clauses BRE AKS BUFF ER COL UMNS COMP UTES SCR EEN SQL TIMI NG Resets or erases the current value or setting for the specified option BRE AKS Removes the break definition set by the BREAK command BUFF ER Clears text from the buffer CLEAR BUFFER has the same effect as CLEAR SQL unless you are using multiple buffers See SET BUF FER buffer SOL obsolete on page C 2 for more information about the obsolete form of this command COL UMNS Resets column display attributes set by the COLUMN command to default settings for all columns To reset display attributes for a single column use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTEs for that column COMP UTES Removes all COMPUTE definitions set by the COMPUTE command SCR EEN Clears your screen SQL Clears the text from SOL buffer CLEAR SOL has the same effect as CLEAR BUFFER unless you are using multiple buffers See SET BUF FER buffer SQL obsolete on page C 2 for more information about the obsolete form of this command TIMI NG Deletes al
233. atabase REMARK on Begins a comment in a script page 12 80 REPFOOTER on Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of page 12 81 each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition REPHEADER on Places and formats a specified report header at the top of page 12 83 each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition RUN on Lists and runs the SQL command or PL SQL block page 12 86 currently stored in the buffer SAVE on Saves the contents of the buffer in an operating system file a page 12 87 script SET on Sets a system variable to alter the SOL Plus environment for page 12 88 your current session SHOW on Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the page 12 168 current SQL Plus environment SHUTDOWN on Shuts down a currently running Oracle Database instance page 12 174 SPOOL on Stores query results in an operating system file and page 12 176 optionally sends the file to a printer SQL Plus Command Reference 12 3 SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description START on Runs the SQL Plus statements in the specified script The page 12 178 script can be called from the local file system or a web server in SQL Plus command line STARTUP on Starts an Oracle Database instance and optionally mounts page 12 180 and opens a database STORE on Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus environment in an page 12 185 operating system script TIMING on Records timing data for an elapsed period of time
234. atabase 10g gt 10 1 SPOOL Options CREATE REPLACE SAVE were added which 10 1 may affect filename parsing on some platforms gt 10 1 SET SOLPROMPT 10 1 gt 10 1 Whitespace characters are allowed in Windows file names that 10 1 are enclosed in quotes Some other special punctuation characters are now disallowed in Windows gt 10 1 Glogin login files are called for each reconnect 10 1 lt 10 1 Uses the obsolete DOC gt prompt when echoing comments 10 1 gt 9 2 A wide column defined FOLD_AFTER may be displayed at the 9 2 start of a new line Otherwise it is incorrectly put at the end of the preceding line with a smaller width than expected gt 9 0 Whitespace before a slash in a SOL statement is ignored and 9 0 1 4 the slash is taken to mean execute the statement Otherwise the slash is treated as part of the statement for example as a division sign 12 148 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary Table 12 6 Cont Compatibility Matrix Value Consequence When available gt 9 0 The length specified for NCHAR and NVARCHAR2 types is 9 0 1 characters Otherwise the length may represent bytes or characters depending on the character set SQL Plus Command Reference 12 149 SET SQLPRE FIX c SET SQLPRE FIX c Sets the SQL Plus prefix character While you are entering a SQL command or PL SQL block you can enter a SQL Plus command on a separate line prefixed by the
235. ble of the SET command a top title column headings your query results and a bottom title SOL Plus displays a report that is too long to fit on one page on several consecutive pages each with its own titles and column headings The amount of data SOL Plus displays on each page depends on the current page dimensions The default page dimensions used by SQL Plus are shown underneath a number of lines before the top title 1 6 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions number of lines per page from the top title to the bottom of the page 14 number of characters per line 80 You can change these settings to match the size of your computer screen or for printing the size of a sheet of paper You can change the page length with the system variable PAGESIZE For example you may wish to do so when you print a report To set the number of lines between the beginning of each page and the top title use the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command SET NEWPAGE number_of_lines If you set NEWPAGE to zero SOL Plus skips zero lines and displays and prints a formfeed character to begin a new page On most types of computer screens the formfeed character clears the screen and moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line When you print a report the formfeed character makes the printer move to the top of a new sheet of paper even if the overall page length is less than that of the paper
236. bles web browsers to identify and correctly display your HTML files If no extension is specified the default SQL Plus file extension is used You use SPOOL OFF or EXIT to append final HTML tags to the spool file and then close it If you enter another SPOOL filename command the current spool file is closed as for SPOOL OFF or EXIT and a new HTML spool file with the specified name is created You can use the SET MARKUP command to enable or disable HTML output as required Example 7 1 Creating a Report Interactively You can create HTML output in an interactive SQL Plus session using the SET MARKUP command You can include an embedded style sheet or any other valid text in the HTML lt HEAD gt tag Open a SQL Plus session and enter the following SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON PREFORMAT OFF ENTMAP ON HEAD lt TITLE gt Department Report lt TITLE gt lt STYLE type text css gt lt BODY background FFFFC6 gt lt STYLE gt BODY TEXT FFOOF TABLE WIDTH 90 BORDER 5 You use the COLUMN command to control column output The following COLUMN commands create new heading names for the SQL query output The first command also turns off entity mapping for the DEPARTMENT_NAME column to allow HTML hyperlinks to be correctly created in this column of the output data COLUMN DEPARTMENT_NAME HEADING DEPARTMENT ENTMAP OFF COLUMN CITY HEADING CITY SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON enables SQL Plus to write H
237. boundaries SQL Plus left justifies each line skipping all leading whitespace When TRUNCATED is enabled each line of server output is truncated to the line size specified by SET LINESIZE For detailed information about using UTL_FILE and associated utilities see the Oracle Database PL SQL Packages and Types Reference For more information on DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE see your Oracle Database Advanced Application Developer s Guide To enable text display in a PL SQL block using DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE enter SET SERVEROUTPUT ON The following example shows what happens when you execute an anonymous procedure with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete END Task is complete PL SQL procedure successfully completed The following example shows what happens when you create a trigger with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON CREATE TABLE SERVER_TAB Letter CHAR CREATE TRIGGER SERVER_TRIG BEFORE INSERT OR UPDATE 12 140 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary OR DELETE ON SERVER_TAB BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete END Trigger Created INSERT INTO SERVER_TAB VALUES M DROP TABLE SERVER_TAB Remove SERVER_TAB from database Task is complete 1 row created To set the output to WORD_WRAPPED enter SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT WORD_WRAPPED SET LINESIZE 20 BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do DBMS_OUT
238. bstitution variable to insert unchanging text in a BIITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once For information on displaying a column value in the top title see NEW_V ALUE variable For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE command on page 12 187 ON OFF Controls the status of display attributes for a column OFF disables the attributes for a column without affecting the attributes definition ON reinstates the attributes WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Specifies how SQL Plus will treat a datatype or DATE string that is too wide for a column WRAPPED wraps the string within the column bounds beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAP is enabled SQL Plus left justifies each new line skipping all leading whitespace for example returns newline characters tabs and spaces including embedded newline characters Embedded whitespace not on a line boundary is not skipped TRUNCATED truncates the string at the end of the first line of display NCLOB BLOB BFILE or multibyte CLOB columns cannot be formatted with the WORD_WRAPPED option If you format an NCLOB BLOB BFILE or multibyte CLOB column with COLUMN WORD_WRAPPED the column data behaves as though COLUMN WRAPPED was applied instead The COLUMN commands you enter can control a column s display attributes for multiple SQL SELECT commands You can enter any number of COLUMN commands for one or more columns Al
239. called blocks to manipulate data in the database See your Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference for information on individual PL SQL statements SQL Plus treats PL SQL subprograms in the same manner as SQL commands except that a semicolon or a blank line does not terminate and execute a block Terminate PL SQL subprograms by entering a period by itself on a new line You can also terminate and execute a PL SQL subprogram by entering a slash by itself on a new line You enter the mode for entering PL SQL statements when a You type DECLARE or BEGIN After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the remainder of your PL SQL subprogram You type a SQL command such as CREATE PROCEDURE that creates a stored procedure After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the stored procedure you want to create SOL Plus stores the subprograms you enter in the SOL buffer Execute the current subprogram with a RUN or slash command A semicolon is treated as part of the PL SQL subprogram and will not execute the command SOL Plus sends the complete PL SQL subprogram to Oracle Database for processing as it does SQL commands See your Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference for more information You might enter and execute a PL SQL subprogram as follows SQL Plus Basics 4 5 Running SQL Plus Commands DECLARE x NUMBER 100 BEGIN FOR i IN 1 10 LOOP IF MOD i 2 0 THEN i is even INSERT INTO temp VALUES
240. cape sequences in the PAUSE command These sequences allow you to create inverse video messages or other effects on terminals that support such characteristics 12 136 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF RECSEP tells SQL Plus where to make the record separation For example if you set RECSEP to WRAPPED SQL Plus prints a record separator only after wrapped lines If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a record separator following every row If you set RECSEP to OFF SOL Plus does not print a record separator SQL Plus Command Reference 12 137 SET RECSEPCHAR c SET RECSEPCHAR c Defines the character to display or print to separate records A record separator consists of a single line of the RECSEPCHAR record separating character repeated LINESIZE times The default is a single space 12 138 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET SECUREDCOL OFF ON UNAUTH ORIZED text UNK NOWN text Example Sets how secure column values are displayed in SOLPLUS output for users without permission to view a column and for columns with unknown security You can choose either the default text or specify the text that is displayed The default is OFF When column level security is enabled and SET SECUREDCOL is set ON output from SQLPLUS for secured columns or columns of unknown security level is replaced with either
241. changes the value of c back to the default period not the most recently used character 12 98 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET CMDS EP cl ON OFF Example Sets the non alphanumeric character used to separate multiple SOL Plus commands entered on one line to c ON or OFF controls whether you can enter multiple commands on a line ON automatically sets the command separator character to a semicolon To specify a title with TTITLE and format a column with COLUMN both on the same line enter SET CMDSEP TTITLE LEFT SALARIES COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 999 SELECT LAST_NAME SA WHERE JOB_ID SH_C LERK LARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SALARIES LAST_NAME Dellinger Cabrio Chung Dilly Gates Perkins Bell Everett McCain Jones SALARIES LAST_NAME Feeney OConnell Grant 20 rows selected SQL Plus Command Reference 12 99 SET COLINVI SIBLE ON OFF SET COLINVI SIBLE ON OFF Example ON sets the DESCRIBE command to enable the display of information about an invisible column OFF the default option means an invisible column is not displayed using the DESCRIBE command SET COLINVISIBLE has no effect on query statments that contain invisible columns To retrieve data in an invisible column explicitly specify the column in your query For more detailed information see the Oracle Database SQL Language Refere
242. ck the syntax of the COMPUTE command for the correct options SP2 0081 maximum of number COMPUTE functions allowed at a time Cause The maximum number of COMPUTE functions has been exceeded Action Reduce the number of COMPUTE functions SP2 0082 no COMPUTE functions requested Cause No COMPUTE functions requested Action No action required SP2 0083 warning COMPUTE option function_name specified number times Cause A label or a function was specified more than once Action Remove the unnecessary labels or functions SP2 0084 COMPUTE ON keyword specified already Cause The ON keyword was specified more than once Action Specify the ON keyword once in the command SP2 0085 COMPUTE OF keyword specified already Cause The OF keyword was specified more than once Action Specify the OF keyword once in the command SP2 0087 no room to allocate COMPUTE control block for column_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0088 missing keyword_name keyword Usage STORE SET filename ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Cause Missing a keyword in the statement Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options and use the keyword in the appropriate place SP2 0092 missing columns for keyword_name k
243. column NUMBER Number of rows in the column The function you specify in the COMPUTE command applies to all columns you enter after OF and before ON The computed values print on a separate line when the value of the ordered column changes Labels for ON REPORT and ON ROW computations appear in the first column otherwise they appear in the column specified in the ON clause You can change the compute label by using COMPUTE LABEL If you do not define a label for the computed value SOL Plus prints the unabbreviated function keyword The compute label can be suppressed by using the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column See the COMPUTE command on page 12 34 for more details If you use the NOPRINT option for the column on which the COMPUTE is being performed the COMPUTE result is also suppressed Example 6 13 Computing and Printing Subtotals To compute the total of SALARY by department first list the current BREAK definition BREAK which displays current BREAK definitions break on DEPARTMENT_ID page nodup on JOB_ID skip 1 nodup Now enter the following COMPUTE command and run the current query COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 13 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 MK_MAN Hartstein 13000 RIM R RARER AAA 8 aaa ath a sum 13000 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 80 SA_MAN Russell 14000 P
244. columns and scale if any for a numeric column When you do a DESCRIBE VARCHAR columns are returned with a type of VARCHAR2 The DESCRIBE command enables you to describe objects recursively to the depth level set in the SET DESCRIBE command You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types For more information see the SET command To control the width of the data displayed use the SET LINESIZE command Columns output for the DESCRIBE command are typically allocated a proportion of the linesize currently specified Decreasing or increasing the linesize with the SET LINESIZE command usually makes each column proportionally smaller or larger This may give unexpected text wrapping in your display For more information see the SET command The description for functions and procedures contains the following information the type of PL SQL object function or procedure a the name of the function or procedure 12 50 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE Examples a the type of value returned for functions the argument names types whether input or output and default values if any a the ENCRYPT keyword to indicate whether or not data in a column is encrypted To describe the view EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW Name Null Type EMPLOYEE_ID NOT NULL NUMBER 6 JOB_ID NOT NULL VARCHAR2 10 MANAGER_
245. command Use BREAK ON REPORT in conjunction with COMPUTE to print grand totals or other grand computed values The REPORT break becomes the outermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command Note that SOL Plus will not skip a page at the end of a report so you cannot use BREAK ON REPORT SKIP PAGE SKI P n Skips n lines before printing the row where the break occurred BREAK SKIP n does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode unless PREFORMAT is SET ON SQL Plus Command Reference 12 17 BREAK Usage Examples SKI P PAGE Skips the number of lines that are defined to be a page before printing the row where the break occurred The number of lines per page can be set with the PAGESIZE clause of the SET command Note that PAGESIZE only changes the number of lines that SQL Plus considers to be a page Therefore SKIP PAGE may not always cause a physical page break unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Note also that if there is a break after the last row of data to be printed in a report SQL Plus will not skip the page NODUPILICATES Prints blanks rather than the value of a break column when the value is a duplicate of the column s value in the preceding row DUP LICATES Prints the value of a break column in every selected row Enter BREAK with no clauses to list the current break definition Each new BREAK command you enter replaces the preceding one To remove the BREAK command use CLEAR
246. command defines the parameters with the values given by the arguments If you run the script again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the current values For more information on using parameters see Using Substitution Variables on page 5 12 All previous settings like COLUMN command settings stay in effect when the script starts If the script changes any setting the new value stays in effect after the script has finished You can include in a script any command you would normally enter interactively typically SOL or SOL Plus commands If the START command is disabled see Disabling SQL Plus SOL and PL SQL Commands on page 9 3 this will also disable the command For more information see the SPOOL command on page 12 176 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 7 double at sign Examples SQL Plus removes the SOLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SOLTERMINATOR See SET SOLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 12 152 for more information Suppose that you have the following script named PRINTRPT SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 EMPRPT SQL WKRPT SQL When you START PRINTRPT and it reaches the command it looks for the script named EMPRPT in the current working directory and runs it When PRINTRPT reaches the command it looks for the script named WKRPT in the same
247. command with a valid identifier string SP2 1515 Invalid identifier identifier for SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER Cause Either no identifier string was entered or an invalid identifier string was entered with the SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER command The identifier string cannot contain special characters Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER command with a valid identifier string SP2 1516 Unmatched quotes in identifier identifier for SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER Cause An invalid string was found in the SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER command The identifier string must be contained in single or double quotes Action Check string quotes in the identifier before reentering the SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER command SP2 1517 Unable to flush the error log table schema table Cause User may have insufficient privileges to flush the error log table Action Check the privileges granted to access the error log table See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about how to grant privileges SP2 1518 Errorlogging table table_name does not exist in schema schema_name Cause Attempted to write to a non existent error log table Action See elgsetup txt in the sqlplus doc directory for information about how to create a non default error log table SP2 1519 Unable to write to the error log table schema table Cause User may have insufficient privileges to write to the error log table Action Check t
248. cripts in SQL Plus Command Line it but it is not part of the SQL command and SQL Plus does not store it in the SQL buffer Editing the Current Line The SQL Plus CHANGE command enables you to edit the current line Various actions determine which line is the current line LIST a given line to make it the current line When you LIST or RUN the command in the buffer the last line of the command becomes the current line Note that using the slash command to run the command in the buffer does not affect the current line If you get an error the error line automatically becomes the current line Example 5 3 Making an Error in Command Entry Suppose you try to select the JOB_ID column but mistakenly enter it as JO_ID Enter the following command purposely misspelling JOB_ID in the first line SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JO_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN You see this message on your screen SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JO_ID SALARY ERROR at line 1 ORA 00904 invalid column name Examine the error message it indicates an invalid column name in line 1 of the query The asterisk shows the point of error the mis typed column JOB_ID Instead of re entering the entire command you can correct the mistake by editing the command in the buffer The line containing the error is now the current line Use the CHANGE command to correct the mistake This command has three parts
249. cter TAB settings are every eight characters The default value for TAB is system dependent 12 154 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET TERM OUT ON OFF Controls the display of output generated by commands in a script that is executed with or START OFF suppresses the display so that you can spool output to a file without displaying the output on screen ON displays the output on screen TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands you enter interactively or redirect to SQL Plus from the operating system SQL Plus Command Reference 12 155 SET TI ME ON OFF SET TI ME ON OFF Controls the display of the current time ON displays the current time before each command prompt OFF suppresses the time display 12 156 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET TIMI NG ON OFF Example Controls the display of timing statistics ON displays timing statistics on each SQL command or PL SQL block run OFF suppresses timing of each command See TIMING on page 12 186 for information on timing multiple commands The format of timing statistics is dependent on the operating system In Linux and Windows the timing statistics are in 24 hour format displaying hours minutes seconds and hundredths of seconds HH MM SS ss If you enter SET TIMING ON SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE SALARY lt 1700 SOL Plus displays output like no
250. ction Check the syntax of the VARIABLE command for the correct usage SP2 0549 Usage PRINT lt variable gt Cause Incorrect syntax for the PRINT command was entered Action Check the syntax of the PRINT command for the correct usage 13 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0550 Usage SHOW ERRORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY DIMENSION JAVA SOURCE JAVA CLASS schema name Cause Incorrect syntax for the SHOW ERRORS command was entered Action Check the syntax of the SHOW ERRORS command for the correct options SP2 0552 Bind variable variable_name not declared Cause The specified bind variable was not declared Action Run the VARIABLE command to check that the bind variables you used in your SQL statement exist Before running a SQL statement with bind variables you must use the VARIABLE command to declare each variable SP2 0556 Invalid file name Usage STORE SET filenamel ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END or Unable to complete EDIT command Cause Missing file name or an invalid file name specified Action Make sure that a file name was specified SP2 0559 Usage EXEC UTE statement Cause Incorrect syntax for the EXECUTE command was entered Action Check the syntax of the EXECUTE command for the correct usage SP2 0560 Usage DESCRIBE schema object subobject db_link column Cause Incorrect syn
251. ctory SQL Plus Instant Client D 7 Uninstalling Instant Client 2 Reset environment variables such as PATH SOLPATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH and TNS_ADMIN 3 Remove tnsnames ora if necessary D 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Symbols comment delimiter 5 8 hyphen clause 3 7 continuing a long SQL Plus command 4 7 12 1 period 4 5 slash command default logon 3 12 12 40 entered at buffer line number prompt 4 5 12 9 entered at command prompt 12 9 executing current PL SQL block 4 5 similar to RUN 12 9 12 86 usage 12 9 pound sign overflow indication 12 29 SET SQLPREFIX character 12 150 number format 6 4 amp ampersand disabling substitution variables 5 17 substitution variables 5 12 amp amp 5 14 asterisk in DEL command 5 3 12 48 in LIST command 5 3 12 67 comment delimiters 5 7 colon bind variables 5 21 BindVariable clause EXIT command 12 60 semicolon 4 4 5 3 12 67 at sign command 2 5 5 10 12 5 command arguments 12 5 12 7 in CONNECT command 12 39 in COPY command B 1 B 4 in SOLPLUS command 3 6 passing parameters to a script 12 5 12 7 script 5 10 12 5 similar to START 5 10 12 178 Q at sign similar to START 12 5 double at sign command 2 5 12 7 script 12 7 similar to START 12 7 12 178 _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER predefined variable 2 5 Index 12 45 _DATE predefined variable 12 45 _EDITOR predefined vari
252. cuted SOL command or PL SQL block EXIT SQL SQLCODE SQL Plus Command Reference 12 61 GET GET Syntax Terms Usage Examples GET FILE file_name exf LIST NOLIST Loads an operating system file into the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands FILE Keyword to specify that the following argument is the name of the script you want to load This optional keyword is usually omitted If you want to load a script with the name file because it is a command keyword you need to put the name file in single quotes file_name ex Represents the file you wish to load typically a script LIST Lists the contents of the file after it is loaded This is the default NOLIST Suppresses the listing If you do not specify a file extension SOL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 If the filename you specify contains the word list or the word file the name must be in double quotes SQL Plus searches for the file in the current working directory The operating system file should contain a single SOL statement or PL SQL block The statement should not be terminated with a semicolon If a SOL Plus command or more than one SQL statement or PL SQL block is loaded into the SOL buffer from an operating system file an error occurs when the RUN or slash
253. d The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command For example to stop the PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP column being displayed enter COLUMN PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP NOPRINT The Execution Plan output is generated using the EXPLAIN PLAN command When you trace a statement in a parallel or distributed query the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates of the number of rows the cardinality In general the cost cardinality and bytes at each node represent cumulative results For Tuning SQL Plus 8 7 SQL Plus Script Tuning example the cost of a join node accounts for not only the cost of completing the join operations but also the entire costs of accessing the relations in that join Lines marked with an asterisk denote a parallel or remote operation Each operation is explained in the second part of the report See the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide for more information on parallel and distributed operations The second section of this report consists of three columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step OTHER_TAG_PLUS_ Describes the function of the SOL statement in the OTHER_PLUS_ EXP EXP column OTHER_PLUS_EXP pate the text of the query for the parallel server or remote atabase The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command SQL Plus Script Tuning Most performance be
254. d features SQL Plus Quick Start These instructions are to enable you to login and connect to a database after you have installed SOL Plus You can connect to the default database you created during installation or to another existing Oracle database a SQL Plus Resources a SQL Plus Overview a SQL Plus Prerequisites Starting SQL Plus Command line Starting SQL Plus Instant Client Connecting to a Different Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus Running your first Query a Exiting SOL Plus SQL Plus Resources a SQL Plus Discussion Forum at https forums oracle com forums forum jspa forumID 144 Oracle Documentation Library at http www oracle com technetwork SQL Plus Overview SQL Plus is an interactive and batch query tool that is installed with every Oracle Database installation It has a command line user interface There is also the SOL Plus Instant Client which is a standalone command line interface available on platforms that support the OCI Instant Client SOL Plus Instant Client connects to any available Oracle database but does not require its own Oracle database installation See the Oracle Call Interface Programmer s Guide for more information on the OCI Instant Client SOL Plus has its own commands and environment and it provides access to the Oracle Database It enables you to enter and execute SOL PL SQL SOL Plus and operating system commands to perform the following a Format perf
255. de and Reference Formatting Columns For more information about the createXML extract text and getString Val functions and about creating and manipulating XMLType data see Oracle Database PL SQL Packages and Types Reference Copying Column Display Attributes When you want to give more than one column the same display attributes you can reduce the length of the commands you must enter by using the LIKE clause of the COLUMN command The LIKE clause tells SOL Plus to copy the display attributes of a previously defined column to the new column except for changes made by other clauses in the same command Example 6 7 Copying a Column s Display Attributes To give the column COMMISSION_PCT the same display attributes you gave to SALARY but to specify a different heading enter the following command COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT LIKE SALARY HEADING BONUS Rerun the query LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY BONUS Russell 14 000 0 Partners 13 500 0 Errazuriz 12 000 0 Cambrault 11 000 0 Zlotkey 10 500 0 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes To list the current display attributes for a given column use the COLUMN command followed by the column name only as shown COLUMN column_name To list the current display attributes for all columns enter the COLUMN command with no column names or clauses after it COLUMN To reset the display attributes for a column to their default values use the CLEAR clause of th
256. dexste E N Sita londas coos oabict a E gecisnesecscand 12 63 A NO 12 64 INPUT citrico nd Se vin aren Gas iria pe E E ewe E sana 12 65 DIST A O LAA EA AO aba ae AE AAA 12 67 PASSWORD iaa libido ooo 12 69 PAUSE trio alada Too ar LAS 12 70 PRIN ici di A a Pe alate Ue aaa Beeches 12 71 A NN endte ectesess 12 72 RECOVER ica it E EE AA Ad 12 73 REMARK iii ld E EE E R AT A 12 80 REPFOOTER ci laa eE Deck Tas E OE basta Ale ia Lacasa 12 81 REPHEADER coo 12 83 RUN on ese ech e ii eh sasha ES ENEE A A ADR be AA a aci 12 86 SAVE ia A A Reh sade Ate aed Bld aa 12 87 SEE sa as 12 88 SET System Variable SumMMary y pnpa r aeea a a EE ERER E aa AEE 12 89 SET APPIINFONON HOER T text 4 ce sr ra T EE EE E EE O A R E sees 12 92 SET ARRAY SIZE 15 l ta ssc ccssccessesateceecsssescsenssseesucseceancossancecbensetonnegensdodevssacsedaecadeataccbantasdesesaees 12 93 SET AUTO COMMITI ON OFF IMM EDIATE 11 oo cecesescsteneneseseaneeseseees 12 94 SET AUTOP RINT ON QFE sueeos eepe e a o E ERE rE TE ieoa 12 95 SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF era ea rea pe n oa aeiaaeeao aeeaiei 12 96 SET AUTOT RACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS 12 97 SET BLO CKTERMINATOR c ON OFF cceccccccessceceneneesesneneesescecesesesesneneneseees 12 98 SET CMDS EP He be FON VOFF Jo meree e ada es cite ede da Lia intents 12 99 SET COLINVI SIBLE ON OFE cccccsccccscsssseesesesesescececesesesnensneseseseeeseseecenesesssesnaeneseses 12 100
257. ds you must use PROMPT or a similar command to create the HTML page header and footer The SPOOL APPEND command does not parse HTML tags SET SOLPLUSCOMPATTIBILITY to 9 2 or earlier to disable the CREATE APPEND and SAVE parameters See SOL Plus Compatibility Matrix on page 12 148 to determine what functionality is controlled by the SET SQLPLUSCOMPAT IBILITY command Examples of SPOOL Command To record your output in the new file DIARY using the default file extension enter SPOOL DIARY CREATE 12 176 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SPOOL To append your output to the existing file DIARY enter SPOOL DIARY APPEND To record your output to the file DIARY overwriting the existing content enter SPOOL DIARY REPLACE To stop spooling and print the file on your default printer enter SPOOL OUT SQL Plus Command Reference 12 177 START START Syntax Terms Usage STA RT url file_namel exf arg Runs the SQL Plus statements in the specified script The script can be called from the local file system or from a web server url Specifies the Uniform Resource Locator of a script to run on the specified web server SQL Plus supports HTTP and FIP protocols but not HTTPS HTTP authentication in the form http username password machine_name domain is not supported in this release file_name ex The script you wish to execute The file can contain any command that you can run interact
258. e 9 1 prompt SET SQLPROMPT 8 9 12 91 12 151 PROMPT clause 5 19 12 11 PROMPT command 5 19 12 72 customizing prompts for value 5 20 prompts for value bypassing with parameters 5 17 customizing 5 20 through ACCEPT 5 19 through substitution variables 5 12 PUPBLD SQL 9 1 PURGE command disabling 9 3 Q queries in COPY command B 3 B 4 show number of records retrieved 4 4 12 90 12 118 tracing 8 6 8 7 query execution path including in report 12 97 query results displaying on screen 4 4 sending to a printer 6 27 12 176 storing in a file 6 27 12 176 QUIT command 12 60 See also EXIT R RAW column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 record separators printing 6 8 12 90 12 138 RECOVER clause 12 182 RECOVER command 12 73 and database recovery 10 4 AUTOMATIC clause 12 74 CANCEL clause 12 75 12 77 CONTINUE clause 12 74 DATABASE clause 12 75 FROM clause 12 74 LOGFILE clause 12 74 NOPARALLEL clause 12 76 SNAPSHOT TIME date clause 12 75 STANDBY DATABASE clause 12 75 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 12 75 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 12 75 UNTIL CANCEL clause 12 75 UNTIL CONTROLFILE clause 12 75 UNTIL TIME clause 12 75 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 12 75 recovery RECOVER command 12 73 RECSEP variable 6 8 12 90 12 138 RECSEPCHAR variable 6 8 12 90 12 138 REFCURSOR bind variables in a stored function 5 22 REFCURSOR clause VARIABLE command 12 193 registry editor 2 3 reg
259. e script name possibly truncated to the length allowed by the DBMS_APPLICATION_ INFO package interface For more information on the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide To display the value of APPINFO as it is SET OFF by default enter SET APPINFO ON SHOW APPINFO APPINFO is ON and set to SQL Plus To change the default text enter SET APPINFO This is SQL Plus To make sure that registration has taken place enter VARIABLE MOD VARCHAR2 50 VARIABLE ACT VARCHAR2 40 EXECUTE DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO READ_MODULE MOD ACT PL SQL procedure successfully completed PRINT MOD This is SOL Plus To change APPINFO back to its default setting enter SET APPINFO OFF 12 92 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET ARRAY SIZE 15 n Sets the number of rows that SOL Plus will fetch from the database at one time Valid values are 1 to 5000 A large value increases the efficiency of queries and subqueries that fetch many rows but requires more memory Values over approximately 100 provide little added performance ARRAYSIZE has no effect on the results of SQL Plus operations other than increasing efficiency SQL Plus Command Reference 12 93 SET AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE n SET AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE n Controls when Oracle Database commits pending changes to the database after SQL or PL SQL com
260. e 12 4 Cont SQL Plus Error Log Column Definitions Column Type Description script VARCHAR 1024 Name of the originating script if applicable identifier VARCHAR 256 User defined identifier string message CLOB ORA PLA or SP2 error message No feed back messages are included For example PL SQL Block Created is not recorded statement CLOB The statement causing the error Using User Defined Error Log Tables To use a user defined log table you must have permission to access the table and you must issue the SET ERRORLOGGING command with the TABLE schema tablename option to identify the error log table and the schema if applicable Querying Error Log Tables To view the records recorded in an error log table you query the columns you want to view as for any table The columns available are shown in Table 12 4 SOL Plus Error Log Column Definitions Example To use the default error log table to record query errors from a script myfile sql which contains the following VARIABLE U REFCURSOR BEGIN OPEN U FOR SELECT FROM DEPT END SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE SSS SET GARBAGE SELECT FROM GARBAGE Enter the following SET ERRORLOGGING ON myfile which produces the following output SQL Plus Command Reference 12 111 SET ERRORL OGGING ON OFF TABLE schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER identifier Example 2 12 112 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ERROR garb
261. e COLUMN command as shown COLUMN column_name CLEAR Example 6 8 Resetting Column Display Attributes to their Defaults To reset all column display attributes to their default values enter CLEAR COLUMNS columns cleared Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 7 Formatting Columns Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes You can suppress and restore the display attributes you have given a specific column To suppress a column s display attributes enter a COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OFF OFF tells SOL Plus to use the default display attributes for the column but does not remove the attributes you have defined through the COLUMN command To restore the attributes you defined through COLUMN use the ON clause COLUMN column_name ON Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values As you have seen by default SOL Plus wraps column values to additional lines when the value does not fit the column width If you want to insert a record separator a line of characters or a blank line after each wrapped line of output or after every row use the RECSEP and RECSEPCHAR variables of the SET command RECSEP determines when the line of characters is printed you set RECSEP to EACH to print after every line to WRAPPED to print after wrapped lines and to OFF to suppress printing The default setting of RECSEP is WRAPPED RECSEPCHAR sets the character printed in each line You can set RECSEP
262. e COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0515 Maximum number of columns max_num_columns exceeded Cause The maximum number of columns was exceeded in the COPY command Action Reduce the number of columns and try again SP2 0516 Invalid command_name name NULL encountered Cause An invalid or null column name was specified in either the COLUMN or the ATTRIBUTE command Action Retry the operation with a valid column name SP2 0517 Missing comma or right parenthesis Cause A missing right parenthesis was identified in the COPY command Action Retry the operation with a comma or right parenthesis SP2 0518 Missing USING clause Cause USING keyword is missing in the USING clause of the COPY command Action Specify the USING keyword before the USING clause of the COPY command SQL Plus Error Messages 13 13 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0519 FROM string missing Oracle Net database specification Cause Missing connect string for the database that contains the data to be copied from in the COPY command Action Include a FROM clause to specify a source database other than the default SP2 0520 TO string missing Oracle Net database specification Cause Missing connect string for the database containing the destination table in the COPY command Action Include a TO clause to specify a source database other than the default SP2 0526 Misplaced INSERT keyword Cause T
263. e Database Administrator s Guide Disabling User Roles To disable a role for a given user insert a row in the PUP table containing the user s username in the Userid column ROLES in the Attribute column and the role name in the Char_Value column Note When you enter PUBLIC or for the Userid column you disable the role for all users You should only use or PUBLIC for roles which are granted to PUBLIC If you try to disable a role that has not been granted to a user none of the roles for that user are disabled SQL Plus Security 9 5 Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMERIC CHAR DATE LONG VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE SQL Plus HR ROLES ROLE1 SQL Plus PUBLIC ROLES ROLE2 During login these table rows are translated into the command SET ROLE ALL EXCEPT ROLE1 ROLE2 To ensure that the user does not use the SET ROLE command to change their roles after login you can disable the SET ROLE command To re enable roles delete the row containing the restriction See Disabling SET ROLE on page 9 5 for more information Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT Like the Product User Profile table the RESTRICT option enables you to disable certain commands that interact with the operating system However commands disabled with the RESTRICT option are disabled even wh
264. e Database SQL Language Reference for information on AS SYSDBA and AS SYSOPER privileges _SQLPLUS_RELEASE _USER Contains the full release number of the installed SQL Plus component in the form 1201000100 Contains the user name connected to the current connection You can view the value of each of these variables with the DEFINE command These variables can be accessed and redefined like any other substitution variable They can be used in TTITLE in amp substitution variables or in your SQL Plus command line prompt You can use the DEFINE command to view the definitions of these eight predefined variables in the same way as you view other DEFINE definitions You can also use the DEFINE command to redefine their values or you can use the UNDEFINE command to remove their definitions and make them unavailable 12 46 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE To view a specific variable definition enter DEFINE variable where variable is the name of the substitution variable whose definition you want to view To view all predefined and user defined variable definitions enter DEFINE All predefined and all user defined variable definitions are displayed You can use UNDEFINE to remove a substitution variable definition and make it unavailable Examples of Use of Predefined Variables To change your SQL Plus prompt to display your connection identifier enter SET SQLPROMPT _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt To view
265. e Oracle wallet applications can use the following syntax to connect to databases that use password authentication CONNECT database_alias For information about configuring your client to use secure external password store and for information about managing credentials in it see the Oracle Database Security Guide AS SYSASM ISYSBACKUP ISYSDBA ISYSDG ISYSOPER ISYSKM The AS clause enables privileged connections by users who have been granted that system privileges You can use any one of these privileged connections with the default logon For information about system privileges see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide CONNECT commits the current transaction to the database disconnects the current username from Oracle Database and reconnects with the specified username If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection into that account as that user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA For more information about user account management refer to the CREATE USER ALTER USER and the CREATE PROFILE commands in the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference To connect across Oracle Net with username HR to the database known by the Oracle Net alias as FLEETDB enter CONNECT HR FLEETDB For more information about setting up your password file refer to the
266. e PLUSTRACE role has been granted SP2 0619 Error while connecting Cause An error occurred while AUTOTRACE attempted to make a second connection to the database instance Action Check that the database limit on number of active sessions has not been exceeded SP2 0620 Error while disconnecting Cause An error occurred while AUTOTRACE attempted to disconnect from the database instance Action Check that the database is still available SP2 0621 Error ORA error_number while gathering statistics Cause No data was found in the PLAN_TABLE while gathering statistics using AUTOTRACE Action Refer to the Oracle Database Error Messages for the specified ORA error message 13 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0622 Starting line number must be less than ending line number Cause The starting line number specified is larger than the ending number Action Re enter the starting line number with a smaller line number SP2 0623 Error accessing PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Warning Product user profile information not loaded You may need to run PUPBLD SOL as SYSTEM Cause The PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table has not been built in the SYSTEM account Action The exact format of the file extension and location of the file are system dependent See the SQL Plus installation guide provided for your operating system The script must be run as user SYSTEM SP2 0625 Error printing variable variable_name Cause Erro
267. e and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Cause The FROM and TO clauses were missing from the COPY statement Action Specify at least one clause Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0496 Misplaced FROM clause Cause The FROM keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0497 Misplaced TO clause Cause The TO keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0498 Missing parenthetical column list or USING keyword Cause A parenthetical list was missing in the column list or the USING keyword is missing in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0499 Misplaced APPEND keyword Cause The APPEND keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0501 Error in SELECT statement Oracle_database_error_message Cause Invalid SELECT statement found in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0513 Misplaced CREATE keyword Cause The CREATE keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0514 Misplaced REPLACE keyword Cause The REPLACE keyword was in the wrong position in th
268. e and Reference TTI TLE text obsolete old form If you want to use CENTER with TTITLE and put more than one word on a line you should use the new form of TTITLE For more information see the TTITLE command on page 12 187 Example To use the old form of TTITLE to set a top title with a left aligned date and right aligned page number on one line followed by SALES DEPARTMENT on the next line and PERSONNEL REPORT on a third line enter TTITLE SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT Obsolete SQL Plus Commands C 5 TTI TLE text obsolete old form C 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference D SQL Plus Instant Client SOL Plus Instant Client is a standalone product with all the functionality of SOL Plus command line It connects to existing remote Oracle databases but does not include its own database It is easy to install and uses significantly less disk space than the full Oracle Database Client installation required to use SOL Plus command line SQL Plus Instant Client is available on platforms that support the OCI Instant Client See the Oracle Call Interface Programmer s Guide for more information on the OCI Instant Client To install SOL Plus Instant Client you need two packages a SQL Plus Instant Client package a Either the Basic OCI Instant Client package or the lightweight OCI Instant Client package Choosing the SQL Plus Instant Client to Install SQL Plus Instant Client can be installed in two ways a
269. e flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs ENTMAP ONIOFF ENTMAP ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus replaces special characters lt gt and amp with the HTML entities amp lt amp gt amp quot and amp amp respectively ENTMAP is set ON by default You can turn ENTMAP ON and OFF as required during a session For example with ENTMAP OFF SQL Plus screen output is SOL gt PROMPT A gt B A gt B With ENTMAP ON SOL Plus screen output is SOL amp gt PROMPT A gt B A amp gt B As entities in the lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tags are not mapped you must ensure that valid entities are used in the MARKUP HEAD and BODY options If entities are not mapped web browsers may treat data as invalid HTML and all subsequent output may display incorrectly ENTMAP OFF enables users to write their own HTML tags to customize output Note ENTMAP only takes effect when the HTML option is set ON For more information about using entities in your output see the COLUMN command on page 12 26 SPOOL ONIOFF SPOOL ON or OFF specifies whether or not SOL Plus writes the HTML opening tags lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt and the closing tags lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt to the start and end of each file created by the SQL Plus SPOOL filename command The default is OFF You can turn SPOOL ON and OFF as required during a session Note It is important to distinguish between
270. e messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0818 Type Body created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type body has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type body Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0819 Type Body altered with compilation warnings SQL Plus Error Messages 13 27 SQL Plus Error Messages Cause The PL SQL type body has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type body Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0820 Library created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL library has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL library Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0821 Library altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL library has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL library Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages
271. e order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it The length of the title you specify with TTITLE cannot exceed 2400 characters 12 188 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE Examples The continuation character a hyphen will not be recognized inside a single quoted title text string To be recognized the continuation character must appear outside the quotes as follows TTITLE CENTER Summary Report for gt the Month of May To define Monthly Analysis as the top title and to left align it to center the date to right align the page number with a three digit format and to display Data in Thousands in the center of the next line enter TTITLE LEFT Monthly Analysis CENTER 01 Jan 2003 RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP CENTER Data in Thousands Monthly Analysis 01 Jan 2003 Page 1 Data in Thousands To suppress the top title display without changing its definition enter TTITLE OFF SQL Plus Command Reference 12 189 UNDEFINE UNDEFINE Syntax UNDEF INE variable where variable represents the name of the substitution variable you want to delete Deletes one or more substitution variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command Examples To undefine a substitution variable named POS enter UNDEFINE POS To undefine two
272. e the SOL Plus SAVE GET and START commands to create and use external files Obsolete Obsolete Obsolete Obsolete Sets the character used to prefix substitution variables Sets the text to be printed between SELECTed columns Obsolete SQL Plus Commands C 1 BTI TLE text obsolete old form Obsolete Alternative Description of Alternative Command Command Command SET TRUNCATE SET WRA P ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus truncates page 12 162 a SELECTed row if it is too long for the current line width SHOW LABEL none Obsolete TTITLE TTITLE on page 12 187 Places and formats a title at the top of old form each report page or lists the current TTITLE definition BTI TLE text obsolete old form Displays a title at the bottom of each report page The old form of BTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SQL Plus The old form defines the bottom title as an empty line followed by a line with centered text See TTI TLE text obsolete old form on page C 4 for more details COL UMN co umnlexpr DEF AULT obsolete Resets the display attributes for a given column to default values Has the same effect as COLUMN CLEAR DOC UMENT obsolete Begins a block of documentation in a script For information on the current method of inserting comments in a script see the section Placing Comments in Scripts on pa
273. e the command line help 1 Login to SQL Plus as the SYSTEM user with SQLPLUS SYSTEM You are prompted to enter the password you have defined for the SYSTEM user 2 In UNIX run the SQL script HELPDROP SQL from SQL Plus with SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HELPDROP SQL In Windows run the SQL script HELPDROP SQL from SQL Plus with ORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HELPDROP SQL The HELPDROP SQL script drops the help tables and then disconnects Configuring Oracle Net Services If you plan to connect to a database other than the default whether on the same computer or another computer you need to ensure that Oracle Net is installed and the database listener is configured and running Oracle Net services are used by SOL Plus Oracle Net services and the database listener are installed by default during Oracle Database installation For further information about installing and configuring Oracle Net see the Oracle Database documentation at http www oracle com technology documentation Configuring SQL Plus 2 7 SQL Plus Configuration 2 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 3 Starting SQL Plus This chapter describes how to start login and connect to a database how to get help and how to exit SOL Plus Specific topics discussed are Login Username and Password Connecting to a Database Starting SQL Plus a Exiting SOL Plus Command line a SQLPLUS Program Syntax Login Username and P
274. e value in the ordered column or expression are displayed together in your output You can make this output more useful to the user by using the SQL Plus BREAK and COMPUTE commands to create subsets of records and add space or summary lines after each subset The column you specify ina BREAK command is called a break column By including the break column in your ORDER BY clause you create meaningful subsets of records in your output You can then add formatting to the subsets within the same BREAK command and add a summary line containing totals averages and so on by specifying the break column in a COMPUTE command SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 80 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 90 Kochhar 17000 90 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected To make this report more useful you would use BREAK to establish DEPARTMENT_ ID as the break column Through BREAK you could suppress duplicate values in DEPARTMENT_ID and place blank lines or begin a new page between departments You could use BREAK in conjunction with COMPUTE to calculate and print summary lines containing the total salary for each department and for all departments You Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 9 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines could also print summary lines containing the average maximum
275. efcursor begin open cl for SELECT FROM DEBT dbms_sql return_result c1 open c2 for SELECT FROM EMP dbms_sql return_result c2 end Procedure created Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 25 Fetching Iterative Results from a SELECT inside a PL SQL Block Next run the procedure to retrieve results iteratively from the SELECT statements in the procedure exec pl PL SQL procedure successfully completed The results from the SELECT statements are displayed ResultSet 1 DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON 4 rows selected ResultSet 2 EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO 7369 SMITH CLERK 7902 17 DEC 80 800 20 7499 ALLEN SALESMAN 7698 20 FEB 81 1600 300 30 7521 WARD SALESMAN 7698 22 FEB 81 1250 500 30 7566 JONES MANAGER 7839 02 APR 81 2975 20 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 7698 28 SEP 81 1250 1400 30 7698 BLAKE MANAGER 7839 01 MAY 81 2850 30 7782 CLARK MANAGER 7839 09 JUN 81 2450 10 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 05 APR 11 3000 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17 NOV 81 5000 10 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 7698 08 SEP 81 1500 0 30 7876 ADAMS CLERK 7788 09 MAY 11 1100 14 rows selected 5 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 6 Formatting SQL Plus Reports This chapter explains how to format your query results to produce a finished report This chapter does not discuss HTML output but covers the following topics a Formatting Columns
276. eir own objects as they have their own user_recyclebin view REL EASE Shows the release number of Oracle Database that SQL Plus is accessing REPF OOTER Shows the current REPFOOTER definition REPH EADER Shows the current REPHEADER definition SPOOIL Shows whether output is being spooled SGA Displays information about the current instance s System Global Area You need SELECT ON V_ SGA object privileges otherwise you will receive a message ORA 00942 table or view does not exist SPPARAMETERS parameter_name As for SHOW PARAMETERS except that SHOW SPPARAMETERS displays current values for initialization parameters for all instances You can use a string after the command to see a subset of parameters whose names include that string The SHOW SPPARAMETERS command without any string following the command displays all initialization parameters for all instances 12 170 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW Your output may vary depending on the version and configuration of the Oracle Database server to which you are connected You need SELECT ON V_ PARAMETER object privileges to use the SPPARAMETERS clause SQLCODE Shows the value of SOL SOLCODE the SQL return code of the most recent operation TTI TLE Shows the current TTITLE definition USER Shows the username you are currently using to access SQL Plus If you connect as AS SYSDBA then the SHOW USER command displays USER is SYS XQUERY S
277. el Query Option To trace a parallel query running the parallel query option create table D2_t1 uniquel number parallel degree 6 Table created create table D2_t2 uniquel number parallel degree 6 Table created create unique index d2_i_uniquel on d2_t1 uniquel Index created set long 500 longchunksize 500 SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN SELECT INDEX B D2_I UNIQUE1 USE_NL B ORDERED COUNT A UNIQUE1 FROM D2_T2 A D2_T1 B WHERE A UNIQUE1 B UNIQUE1 Execution Plan Plan hash value 107954098 Id Operation Name Rows Bytes Cost CPU Time TO IN OUT PQ Distrib 0 SELECT STATEMENT 26 1 0 00 00 01 1 SORT AGGREGATE 26 2 PX COORDINATOR 3 PX SEND QC RANDOM TO10001 26 01 01 P gt S QC RAND 4 SORT AGGREGATE 26 Q1 0 PCWP 5 NESTED LOOPS 26 1 0 00 00 01 01 0 PCWP 6 PX RECEIVE Q1 01 PCWP 7 PX SEND BROADCAST TQ10000 Q1 00 P gt P BROADCAST 8 PX BLOCK ITERATOR 13 0 0 00 00 01 Q1 PCWC 9 TABLE ACCESS FULL D2_T2 13 0 0 00 00 01 Q1 00 PCWP 10 PX BLOCK ITERATOR 13 2 0 00 00 01 Q1 0 PCWC Lae ES TABLE ACCESS FULL D2_T1 13 2 0 00 00 01 Q1 0 PCWP Predicate Information identified by operation id dynamic sampling used for this statement 8 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Execution Plan Output in Earlier Databases Example 8 7 To monitor disk reads and buffer gets SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY
278. elp Command line help is usually installed during Oracle Database installation If not the database administrator can create the SQL Plus command line help tables and populate them with SQL Plus help data by running a supplied SQL script from SOL Plus The database administrator can also remove the SQL Plus command line help tables by running a SQL script from SQL Plus Before you can install or remove SOL Plus help ensure that a SQL Plus is installed a The ORACLE_HOME environment variable is set The SQL Plus help script files exist HLPBLD SQL to drop and create new help tables HELPDROP SOL to drop existing help tables HELPUS SQL to populate the help tables with the help data Running the hipbld sql Script to Install Command line Help Run the provided SQL script HLPBLD SQL to load command line help 1 Login to SQL Plus as the SYSTEM user with SQLPLUS SYSTEM You are prompted to enter the password you have defined for the SYSTEM user 2 In UNIX run the SQL script HLPBLD SQL from SQL Plus with SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HLPBLD SQL HELPUS SQL In Windows run the SQL script HLPBLD SQL from SQL Plus with 2 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Configuration ORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HLPBLD SQL HELPUS SQL The HLPBLD SQL script creates and loads the help tables Running the helpdrop sql Script to Remove Command line Help Run the provided SQL script HELPDROP SQL to remov
279. en no connection to a server exists and remain disabled until SQL Plus terminates The following table shows which commands are disabled in each restriction level Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 EDIT disabled disabled disabled GET disabled HOST disabled disabled disabled SAVE disabled disabled SPOOL disabled disabled START disabled STORE disabled disabled Note a Disabling HOST also disables your operating system s alias for HOST such as on Windows and on UNIX Disabling the SOL Plus START command will also disable the SOL Plus and commands For more information about the RESTRICT option see the SQLPLUS RESTRICT Option on page 3 11 9 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Program Argument Security Program Argument Security Some operating systems allow any user to see what programs are being run If the display also shows command line arguments it may be possible to view the usernames and passwords of other SOL Plus users For example on many UNIX or Linux systems the ps command shows program arguments To stop passwords being displayed depends on how you use SQL Plus To run SQL Plus interactively always wait for SQL Plus to prompt for connection information particularly your password To run a batch SQL script from a UNIX shell script set environment variables MYUSERNAME and MYPASSWORD to the appropriate values Run a shell script containing sqlplus nolog lt lt EOF c
280. enable 32k maximum length you must add the MAX_STRING_ SIZE extended parameter to your init ora file 12 192 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE Usage BLOB Creates a variable of type BLOB BFILE Creates a variable of type BFILE CLOB Creates a variable of type CLOB NCLOB Creates a variable of type NCLOB REFCURSOR Creates a variable of type REF CURSOR BINARY_FLOAT Creates a variable of type BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_FLOAT is a floating point number that conforms substantially with the Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic IEEE Standard 754 1985 BINARY_DOUBLE Creates a variable of type BINARY_DOUBLE BINARY_DOUBLE is a floating point number that conforms substantially with the Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic IEEE Standard 754 1985 Bind variables may be used as parameters to stored procedures or may be directly referenced in anonymous PL SQL blocks To display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the PRINT command See PRINT on page 12 71 for more information To automatically display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the SET AUTOPRINT command See SET AUTOP RINT ON OFF on page 12 95 for more information Bind variables cannot be used in the COPY command or SQL statements except in PL SQL blocks Instead use substi
281. enumber UNTIL CONSISTENT WITH CONTROLFILE where the parallel clause has the following syntax NOPARALLEL PARALLEL integer where the managed clause has the following syntax MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE recover_clause cancel_clause finish_clause where the recover_clause has the following syntax DISCONNECT FROM SESSION TIMEOUT integer NOTIMEOUT NODELAY DEFAULT DELAY DELAY integer NEXT integer EXPIRE integer NO EXPIRE parallel_clause USING CURRENT LOGFILE UNTIL CHANGE integer THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer ALL ARCHIVELOG ALL LAST NEXT SWITCHOVER where the cancel_clause has the following syntax CANCEL IMMEDIATE WAIT NOWAIT where the finish_clause has the following syntax DISCONNECT FROM SESSION parallel_clause FINISH SKIP STANDBY LOGFILE WAIT NOWAIT where the parallel_clause has the following syntax NOPARALLEL PARALLEL integer Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or more datafiles or the entire database For more information on the RECOVER command see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide the ALTER DATABASE RECOVER command in the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference and the Oracle Database Backup and Recovery User s Guide guide SQL Plus Command Reference 12 73 RECOVER Terms AUTOMATIC Automatically generates the name of the next
282. er s Guide and Reference Using Bind Variables When SQL Plus prompts you to enter an Employee ID enter the word one instead of a number Enter a valid employee ID For Example 145 206 Employee ID one SP2 0425 one is not a valid number Sending a Message and Accepting Return as Input If you want to display a message on the user s screen and then have the user press Return after reading the message use the SQL Plus command PAUSE For example you might include the following lines in a script PROMPT Before continuing make sure you have your account card PAUSE Press RETURN to continue Clearing the Screen If you want to clear the screen before displaying a report or at any other time include the SOL Plus CLEAR command with its SCREEN clause at the appropriate point in your script using the following format CLEAR SCREEN Before continuing to the next section reset all columns to their original formats and headings by entering the following command CLEAR COLUMNS Using Bind Variables Bind variables are variables you create in SOL Plus and then reference in PL SQL or SQL If you create a bind variable in SQL Plus you can use the variable as you would a declared variable in your PL SQL subprogram and then access the variable from SQL Plus You can use bind variables for such things as storing return codes or debugging your PL SQL subprograms Because bind variables are recognized by SOL Plus yo
283. erm For example to connect to scott through proxy user hr with password welcomel CONNECT hr scott welcome1 Connects a given username to the Oracle Database When you run a CONNECT command the site profile glogin sql and the user profile login sql are executed CONNECT does not reprompt for username or password if the initial connection does not succeed Warning Including your password in plain text is a security risk You can avoid this risk by omitting the password and entering it only when the system prompts for it To connect to a database using an enterprise user proxy you must first configure the proxy For information about configuring an enterprise user proxy see the Oracle Database Enterprise User Security Administrator s Guide username password The username and password you use to connect to Oracle Database If you omit username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you enter a slash or enter Return or click Execute when prompted for username SQL Plus logs you in using a default logon See slash on page 12 9 for more information If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SOL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen See the PASSWORD command on page 12 69 for information about changing your password in SQL Plus connect_identifier An Oracle Net connect identifier The exact syntax depends on the Oracle Net configuration
284. es You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SOL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it Note If SET EMBEDDED is ON the report footer is suppressed To define END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report footer on a separate page and to center it enter REPFOOTER PAGE CENTER END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 81 REPFOOTER LAST_NAME SALARY King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Hartstein 13000 sum 98500 Page 2 END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT 6 rows selected To suppress the report footer without changing its definition enter REPFOOTER OFF 12 82 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER REPHEADER Syntax Terms REPH EADER PAGE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n SIKIP n TAB n LE FT CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Places and formats a specified report header at the top of each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition Enter REPHEADER with no clauses to list the current REPHEADER definition
285. es a staging area where changed objects can be loaded into the database compiled and executed during uptime This is particularly useful to reduce downtime associated with patching an application edition value overrides any edition value specified in the ORA_EDITION environment variable For more detailed information see Oracle Database Administrator s Guide Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a connect identifier if you use a default logon In a default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username Note that the prefix OPS can be set to any other string of text For example you may wish to change the settings in your INIT ORA parameters file to LOGONname or USERIDname See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication AS SYSASM SYSBACKUP SYSDBA SYSDG SYSOPER SYSKM The AS clause enables privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSASM SYSBACKUP SYSDBA SYSDG SYSOPER or SYSKM system privileges For more detailed information see Oracle Database Administrator s Guide NOLOG Establishes no initial connection to Oracle Database Before issuing any SQL commands you must issue a CONNECT command to establish a valid logon Use NOLOG when you want to have a SQL Plus script prompt for the username password or database specification The
286. eyword Cause The column name was not specified for the keyword Action Specify the column name and try again SP2 0096 no more room to allocate INTO variable variable_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0097 no storage to allocate ON column column_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records 13 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0098 no storage to allocate COMPUTE block for column_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0103 Nothing in SOL buffer to run Cause Nothing was in the SOL buffer to run Action Enter a valid SOL command SQL Plus commands are not stored in the SQL buffer SP2 0105 Illegal or missing entity name Cause File name was not specified in the GET or SAVE commands Action Specify a file name and try again SP2 0107 Nothing to save Cause Nothing in the SQL buffer w
287. f us acme com Starting SQL Plus 3 3 Starting SQL Plus An INSTANCE_NAME is the name you give to the database instance during creation It defaults to the SID you entered during database creation An Oracle System Identifier SID identifies a specific Oracle release 8 0 database instance You can optionally use an INSTANCE_NAME in place of the SERVICE_NAME phrase Use a SID in place of the SERVICE_NAME when connecting to an Oracle release 8 0 or earlier database Example 3 3 Full connection identifier for SALES1 SQLPLUS hr DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST sales server PORT 1521 CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME sales us acme com Easy Connection Identifier The easy or abbreviated connection identifier has the syntax 1host port service_name Example 3 4 Start a command line session to the sales database using the easy connection identifier sqlplus hr sales server 1521 sales us acme com Example 3 5 CONNECT to the sales database using the easy connection identifier When the password is omitted the connect string needs to be quoted connect hr sales server 1521 sales us acme com The easy connection identifier can be used wherever you can use a full connection identifier or a net service name The easy syntax is less complex and no tnsnames ora entry is required Connectionless Session with NOLOG In the command line interface it is possible to start SQ
288. fferent value into the WHERE clause each time you run the command but there is an easier way By using a substitution variable in place of the text SA_MAN in the WHERE clause you can get the same results you would get if you had written the values into the command itself A substitution variable is preceded by one or two ampersands amp When SQL Plus encounters a substitution variable in a command SQL Plus executes the command as though it contained the value of the substitution variable rather than the variable itself For example if the variable SORTCOL has the value JOB_ID and the variable MYTABLE has the value EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW SOL Plus executes the commands SELECT amp SORTCOL SALARY FROM amp MYTABLE WHERE SALARY gt 12000 as if they were SELECT JOB_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Where and How to Use Substitution Variables You can use substitution variables anywhere in SQL and SQL Plus commands except as the first word entered When SOL Plus encounters an undefined substitution variable in a command SQL Plus prompts you for the value You can enter any string at the prompt even one containing blanks and punctuation If the SQL command containing the reference should have quote marks around the variable and you do not include them there the user must include the quotes when prompted 5 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Substitution Variables SQL Plus reads your res
289. first line of this script is not assumed to contain a logon O url file_namel ext arg Specifies the name of a script and arguments to run The script can be called from the local file system or from a web server SOL Plus passes the arguments to the script as if executing the file using the SOL Plus START command If no file suffix file extension is specified the suffix defined by the SET SUFFIX command is used The default suffix is sql See the START command on page 12 178 for more information 3 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part Il Using SQL Plus Part II helps you learn how to use SQL Plus how to tune SQL Plus for better performance how to restrict access to tables and commands and provides overviews of database administration tools and globalization support Part II contains the following chapters SQL Plus Basics Using Scripts in SOL Plus Formatting SOL Plus Reports Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus Tuning SQL Plus SOL Plus Security Database Administration with SOL Plus SOL Plus Globalization Support 4 SQL Plus Basics This chapter helps you learn the basics of using SQL Plus It has the following topics a Entering and Executing Commands Listing a Table Definition Listing PL SQL Definitions Running SQL Commands Running PL SQL Blocks Running SQL Plus Commands a System Variables that Affect How Commands Run a Stopping a Command while it is Running
290. follows BOLD Prints data in bold print SOL Plus represents bold print on your terminal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operating systems SOL Plus may instruct your printer to print bold text on three consecutive lines instead of bold FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of following data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See the COLUMN command on page 12 26 for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SOL Plus prints NUMBER values using the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values according to the default format Enter TTITLE with no clauses to list the current TTITLE definition If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text TTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets TTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name See COLUMN on page 12 26 for information on printing column and DATE values in the top title You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SOL Plus displays them in th
291. from your SQL query You can also use SET ECHO OFF to suppress the display of each command ina script that is executed with the START command HTML Entities Certain characters lt gt and have a predefined meaning in HTML In the previous example you may have noticed that the gt character was replaced by amp gt as soon as you entered the SET MARKUP HTML ON command To enable these characters to be displayed in your web browser HTML provides character entities to use instead Table 7 1 Equivalent HTML Entities Character HTML Entity Meaning lt amp lt Start HTML tag label gt amp gt End HTML tag label i amp quot Double quote amp amp amp Ampersand The web browser displays the gt character but the actual text in the HTML encoded file is the HTML entity amp gt The SET MARKUP option ENTMAP controls the substitution of HTML entities ENTMAP is set ON by default It ensures that the characters lt gt and amp are always replaced by the HTML entities representing these characters This prevents web browsers from misinterpreting these characters when they occur in your SQL Plus commands or in data resulting from your query You can set ENTMAP at a global level with SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP ON or at a column level with COLUMN column_name ENTMAP ON Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 7 5 Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus 7 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 8 Tu
292. fter displaying each screen of a query or report See SET PAU SE ON OFF text on page 12 136 for more information Saving Changes to the Database Automatically You can specify changes you wish to make to the information stored in the database using the SOL Database Manipulation Language DML commands UPDATE INSERT and DELETE which can be used independently or within a PL SQL block These changes are not made permanent until you enter a SOL COMMIT command or a SQL Database Control Language DCL or Database Definition Language DDL command such as CREATE TABLE or use the autocommit feature The SQL Plus autocommit feature causes pending changes to be committed after a specified number of successful SQL DML transactions A SQL DML transaction is either an UPDATE INSERT or DELETE command or a PL SQL block You control the autocommit feature with the SOL Plus AUTOCOMMIT system variable Regardless of the AUTOCOMMIT setting changes are committed when you exit SQL Plus successfully See Also SET EXITC OMMIT ON OFF on page 12 117 Example 4 5 Turning Autocommit On To turn the autocommit feature on enter SET AUTOCOMMIT ON Alternatively you can enter the following to turn the autocommit feature on SET AUTOCOMMIT IMMEDIATE Until you change the setting of AUTOCOMMIT SQL Plus automatically commits changes from each SOL DML command that specifies changes to the database After each autocommit SQL Plus displays the f
293. ge 5 7 and the REMARK command on page 12 80 After you type DOCUMENT and enter Return SOL Plus displays the prompt DOC gt in place of SQL gt until you end the documentation The pound character on a line by itself ends the documentation If you have set DOCUMENT to OFF SOL Plus suppresses the display of the block of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command For more information see SET DOC UMENT ON OFF obsolete on page C 3 NEWPAGE 1In obsolete Advances spooled output n lines beyond the beginning of the next page See SET NEWP AGE 1 n NONE on page 12 131 for information on the current method for advancing spooled output SET BUF FER bufferlSQL obsolete Makes the specified buffer the current buffer Initially the SQL buffer is the current buffer SOL Plus does not require the use of multiple buffers the SQL buffer alone should meet your needs If the buffer name you enter does not exist SET BUFFER defines creates and names the buffer SOL Plus deletes the buffer and its contents when you exit SOL Plus C 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET MAXD ATA n obsolete Running a query automatically makes the SQL buffer the current buffer To copy text from one buffer to another use the GET and SAVE commands To clear text from the current buffer use CLEAR BUFFER To clear text from the SQL buffer while using a different buffer use CLEAR SOL SET COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE
294. greater than 240 or a COL or TAB value greater than LINESIZE if LINESIZE is greater than 240 Action Make sure the BTITLE TTITLE REPHEADER or REPFOOTER command you enter uses a COL or TAB value of 240 or less or uses a COL or TAB value of LINESIZE or less if LINESIZE is greater than 240 1507 Errorlogging table role or privilege is missing or not accessible Cause Errorlogging table role privilege is missing or not accessible Action See elgsetup txt in the sqlplus doc directory for information about how to create a non default error log table See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about how to grant privileges SP2 1508 Invalid option for SET ERRORLOGGING OFF Cause An attempt was made to issue the SET ERRORLOGGING OFF command with additional options SET ERRORLOGGING OFF accepts no other options Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING OFF command without any other options SP2 1509 Invalid option for SET ERRORLOGGING ON Cause An attempt was made to enter an invalid option for SET ERRORLOGGING ON Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON command with valid options Valid options are TABLE IDENTIFIER and TRUNCATE SP2 1510 Invalid option option_name for SET ERRORLOGGING ON Cause An attempt was made to enter an invalid option for SET ERRORLOGGING ON Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON command with valid options Valid options are TABLE IDENTIFIER and TRUNCATE SP2 1511 Missing table
295. h constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it To define EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report header on a separate page and to center it enter REPHEADER PAGE CENTER EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 12 84 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER LAST_NAME SALARY King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Hartstein 13000 sum 98500 6 rows selected EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT Page 1 Page 2 To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter REPHEADER OFF SQL Plus Command Reference 12 85 RUN RUN Syntax Usage Examples RIUN Lists and executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands RUN causes the last line of the SQL buffer to become the current line The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command in the SQL buffer on your screen The SQL buffer always contains the last SQL statement or PL SQL block entered Assume the SQL buffer contains the following script SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 To RUN the script enter RUN 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE SALARY gt 12000 DEP
296. handled in the same way as for any user table See the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for more information about granting access to tables 12 114 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET ESC APE c ON OFF Example Defines the character used as the escape character OFF undefines the escape character ON enables the escape character ON changes the value of c back to the default MX You can use the escape character before the substitution character set through SET DEFINE to indicate that SQL Plus should treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution If you define the escape character as an exclamation point then SET ESCAPE ACCEPT vl PROMPT Enter amp 1 displays this prompt Enter amp 1 To set the escape character back to the default value of backslash enter SET ESCAPE ON SQL Plus Command Reference 12 115 SET ESCCHAR 1 OFF SET ESCCHAR 1 1 1 OFF Specifies a character to be escaped and not interpreted when used in a file name for the SPOOL START RUN and EDIT commands These special characters are translated to the following a ina filename will be translated to Oracle SID a is translated to Oracle Home in Unix a is translated to Oracle Home in Windows is translated to Oracle Home in certain platforms While it is not recommended that these char
297. haracteristics for only the specified attribute Enter ATTRIBUTE with no clauses to list all current attribute display characteristics type_name attribute_name Identifies the data item typically the name of an attribute within the set of attributes for a given object of Object Type type_name If you select objects of the same Object Type an ATTRIBUTE command for that type_ name attribute_name applies to all such objects you reference in that session ALI AS alias Assigns a specified alias to a type_name attribute_name which can be used to refer to the type_name attribute_name in other ATTRIBUTE commands CLE AR Resets the display characteristics for the attribute_name The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable LIKE type_name attribute_name alias Copies the display characteristics of another attribute LIKE copies only characteristics not defined by another clause in the current ATTRIBUTE command ON OFF Controls the status of display characteristics for a column OFF disables the characteristics for an attribute without affecting the characteristics definition ON reinstates the characteristics 12 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ATTRIBUTE Usage Examples You can enter any number of ATTRIBUTE com
298. has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0809 Package altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0810 Package Body created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package body has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package body Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0811 Package Body altered with compilation warnings 13 26 SQL Plus User Cause The PL SQL package body has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package body s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0812 View created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL view has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL view Ac
299. he commands on your screen formatting the query results according to the SOL Plus commands in the file LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14 000 0 40 Partners 13 500 0 30 Errazuriz 12 000 0 30 Cambrault 11 000 0 30 Zlotkey 10 500 0 20 You can also use the at sign command to run a script SALES The and commands list and run the commands in the specified script in the same manner as START SET ECHO affects the and commands in the same way as it affects the START command To see the commands as SQL Plus enters them you can SET ECHO ON The ECHO system variable controls the listing of the commands in scripts run with the START and commands Setting the ECHO variable OFF suppresses the listing START and leave the last SQL command or PL SQL block of the script in the buffer Running a Script as You Start SQL Plus To run a script as you start SQL Plus use one of the following options a Follow the SOLPLUS command with your username a slash a space and the name of the file SQLPLUS HR SALES SOL Plus starts prompts for your password and runs the script 5 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Substitution Variables Include your username as the first line of the file Follow the SQLPLUS command with and the filename SQL Plus starts prompts for your password and runs the file Nesting Scripts To run a series of scripts in sequence first c
300. he default files are platform specific For example the default file is KORACLE_ HOME dbs initfORACLE_SID ora on UNIX and ORACLE _ HOMEM database initORCL ora on Windows QUIET Suppresses the display of System Global Area information for the starting instance MOUNT dbname Mounts a database but does not open it dbname is the name of the database to mount or open If no database name is specified the database name is taken from the initialization parameter DB_NAME OPEN Mounts and opens the specified database NOMOUNT Causes the database not to be mounted upon instance startup Cannot be used with MOUNT or OPEN SQL Plus Command Reference 12 181 STARTUP Usage Examples RECOVER Specifies that media recovery should be performed if necessary before starting the instance STARTUP RECOVER has the same effect as issuing the RECOVER DATABASE command and starting an instance Only complete recovery is possible with the RECOVER option Recovery proceeds if necessary as if AUTORECOVERY is set to ON regardless of whether or not AUTORECOVERY is enabled If a redo log file is not found in the expected location recovery continues as if AUTORECOVERY is disabled by prompting you with the suggested location and name of the subsequent log files that need to be applied UPGRADE Starts the database in OPEN UPGRADE mode and sets system initialization parameters to specific values required to enable database upgrade scr
301. he COMPUTE command for the correct usage SP2 0591 Unable to allocate dynamic space needed number_of_bytes bytes Try reducing ARRAYSIZE or the number of columns selected Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0593 Label text must follow the LABEL keyword Cause Missing label text about the LABEL keyword in the COMPUTE command Action Check the syntax of the COMPUTE command for the correct options 13 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0594 Usage SET COLSEP text Cause An invalid option was used in the SET COLSEP command Action Specify a valid option SP2 0596 Usage SET AUTO COMMIT OFF ON IMM EDIATE n Cause An invalid option was used in the SET AUTO COMMIT command Action Check the syntax of the SET AUTOCOMMIT command for the correct options SP2 0597 datatype _name is not a valid datatype _name format Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not in the specified datatype Action Correct the datatype and re enter SP2 0598 value_name does not match input format format_name Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not in the specified format Action Correct the format and try again SP2 0599 Usage SET EDITF ILE filenamel ext Cause Required
302. he INSERT keyword was misplaced in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0540 File file_name already exists Use SAVE filenamel ext REPLACE Cause The file specified already exists Action Use the REPLACE option to overwrite the existing file or specify another file name SP2 0544 Command command_name disabled in Product User Profile Cause An attempt was made to use a command that has been explicitly disabled for your schema in this database Action Ask your System Administrator why the Product User Profile PUP table has been set to disable this command for your schema SP2 0545 SET command requires an argument Cause An argument was missing in the SET command Action Check the syntax of the SET command for the correct options SP2 0546 User requested Interrupt or EOF detected Cause Either end of file was reached or CTRL C was entered to cancel the process Action No action required SP2 0547 option_name option value out of range lower_value through upper_ value Cause The specified SET option was out of range Action Enter a value within the SET option range and re try the SET command SP2 0548 Usage VAR IABLE lt variable gt NUMBER CHAR CHAR n CHAR I BYTE VARCHAR2 n CHAR I BYTE NCHAR NCHAR n NVARCHAR2 n CLOB NCLOB REFCURSOR BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_DOUBLE Cause Incorrect syntax for the VARIABLE command was entered A
303. he TO clause When you copy to a remote database from your local database you can omit the FROM clause When you copy between remote databases you must include both clauses However including both clauses increases the readability of your scripts The COPY command behaves differently based on whether the destination table already exists and on the action clause you enter CREATE in the example See Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table on page B 5 for more information By default the copied columns have the same names in the destination table that they have in the source table If you want to give new names to the columns in the destination table enter the new names in parentheses after the destination table name If you enter any column names you must enter a name for every column you are copying Note To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The USING clause specifies a query that names the source table and specifies the data that COPY copies to the destination table You can use any form of the SQL SELECT command to select the
304. he next SQL command or PL SQL block You can view the buffer contents with the LIST command You can execute the command or block in the SOL buffer using the RUN or slash commands RUN displays the command or block in the buffer before executing it slash executes the command or block in the buffer without displaying it first For information about editing a command or block stored in the buffer see Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line on page 5 2 SQL Plus does not store SOL Plus commands or the semicolon or slash characters you type to execute a command in the SQL buffer Executing Commands In command line SQL Plus you type a command and direct SQL Plus to execute it by pressing the Return key SQL Plus processes the command and re displays the command prompt when ready for another command Listing a Table Definition To see the definitions of each column in a given table or view use the SQL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 4 1 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the column definitions of the columns in the sample view EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW enter DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW Name Null Type EMPLOYEE_ID NOT NULL NUMBER 6 JOB_ID NOT NULL VARCHAR2 10 MANAGER_ID NUMBER 6 DEPARTMENT_ID NUMBER 4 LOCATION_ID NUMBER 4 COUNTRY_ID CHAR 2 FIRST _NAME VARCHAR2 20 LAST_NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 25 SALARY NUMBER 8 2 COMMISSION_PCT NUMBER 2 2 DEPARTMENT _NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 JOB_TITLE NOT NULL VARCHAR
305. he privileges granted to access the error log table See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about how to grant privileges SP2 01538 Edition only valid when connected to Oracle Database Cause Attempted to connect to an Edition session when database unavailable Action Ensure database is available before attempting to connect to an Edition session SP2 01539 Edition requires Oracle Database 11g or later SQL Plus Error Messages 13 33 COPY Command Messages Cause Attempted to connect to an Edition session on Oracle Database earlier than 11g Action Edition is only valid with Oracle Database 11g or later COPY Command Messages CPY 0002 Illegal or missing APPEND CREATE INSERT or REPLACE option Cause An internal COPY function has invoked COPY with a create option flag value that is out of range Action Please contact Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services CPY 0003 Internal Error logical host number out of range Cause An internal COPY function has been invoked with a logical host number value that is out of range Action Please contact Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services CPY 0004 Source and destination table and column names don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column name in the destination table does not match the corresponding column name in the optional column name list or in the SELECT command Action Re specify the CO
306. he same way as BTITLE and TTITLE using the REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands Example 6 20 Positioning Title Elements To redisplay the personnel report with a repositioned top title enter the following commands TTITLE CENTER A CME WIDGET SKIP 1 CENTER SKIP 1 LEFT PERSONNEL REPORT RIGHT SALES DEPARTMENT SKIP 2 SET LINESIZE 60 ih Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 19 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SALES DEPARTMENT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected The LEFT RIGHT and CENTER clauses place the following values at the beginning end and center of the line The SKIP clause tells SOL Plus to move down one or more lines Note that there is no longer any space between the last row of the results and the bottom title The last line of the bottom title prints on the last line of the page The amount of space between the last row of the report and the bottom title depends on the overall page size the number of lines occupied by the top title and the number of rows in a given page In the above example the top title occupies three more lines than the top title in the previous example You will learn to set the number of lines per page later in this chapter To always print n blank lines before the bottom title use the
307. hen attempting to save the content to a file Action Enter a SOL command to save SOL Plus commands are not stored in the SOL buffer SP2 0108 The filenames CREATE REPLACE APPEND FILE and abbreviations may not be used Cause An attempt was made to enter a filename using the word FILE or one of the command keywords CREATE REPLACE APPEND or one of their abbreviations The filename specified in the command was not permitted Action Check the following command syntax and enter a valid filename command filename ext CR EATE REP LACE AP PEND where command can be SAVE SPOOL or STORE SET To use the command keywords CREATE REPLACE APPEND or one of their abbreviations as the filename or to use the word FILE as the filename you must enclose it in single quotes SP2 0109 Cannot append to file file_name Cause An attempt was made to append the content of the SOL buffer to a file and the file could not be written Possible causes a An error was encountered when creating the destination file A directory name specified in the SAVE statement was not found A system error made it impossible to open the file Action Take the following actions Check that the destination is valid and that there is sufficient space on the destination device a Check the statement for a typing mistake in the directory name Then issue the statement again after correcting the directory name SP2 0110 Cannot create save file file_na
308. her set or setenv depending on the UNIX shell you are using For example in csh you would enter setenv NLS_LANG Japanese_Japan UTF8 or setenv NLS_LANG Japanese_Japan JA16SJIS or setenv NLS_LANG Japanese_Japan JA16EUC The locale setting of your UNIX terminal determines the exact value of the NLS_ LANG parameter For more information on the NLS_LANG setting see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide Example 11 3 Configuring Japanese Support in Oracle Database To store data in the Japanese character set using UTF 8 character encoding ensure that the Oracle database has been created with the AL32UTF 8 character set See your Oracle Database Installation Guide for information about creating your database in a character set other than US7ASCII SQL Plus Globalization Support 11 3 Setting NLS_LANG 11 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part III SQL Plus Reference Part III contains the SOL Plus command reference and the list of SOL Plus error messages Part III contains the following chapters a SQL Plus Command Reference a SQL Plus Error Messages 12 SQL Plus Command Reference This chapter contains descriptions of the SOL Plus commands listed alphabetically Each description contains the following parts Section Description Syntax Shows how to enter the command and provides a brief description of the basic uses of the command Terms Describes the function of each term or cla
309. hose restrictions for the duration of the session Changes to the PUP table will only take effect the next time the affected users log in to SQL Plus When SYSTEM SYS or a user authenticating with SYSBACKUP SYSDBA SYSDG SYSKM or SYSOPER privileges connects or logs in SOL Plus does not read the PUP table Therefore no restrictions apply to these users The PUP table applies only to the local database If accessing objects on a remote database through a database link the PUP table for the remote database does not apply The remote database cannot extract the username and password from the database link in order to determine that user s profile and privileges Creating the PUP Table You can create the PUP table by running the script named PUPBLD with the extension SQL as SYSTEM The exact format of the file extension and the location of the file are system dependent See your DBA for more information SQL Plus Security 9 1 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Note If the table is created incorrectly all users other than privileged users will see a warning when connecting to Oracle Database that the PUP table information is not loaded PUP Table Structure The PUP table has the following columns PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMERIC_VALUE CHAR_VALUE DATE_VALUE ONG_VALUE NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 VARCHAR2 30 VARCHAR2 240 VARCHAR2 240 NUMBER 15 2 VARCHAR2 240 DATE LONG Description
310. hows the current values of the XQUERY settings BASEURI CONTEXT NODE and ORDERING xquery BASEURI public scott CONTEXT doc test xml NODE byreference ORDERING ordered The following output is displayed when no values are set xquery BASEURI CONTEXT NODE default ORDERING default Examples To display information about the SGA enter SHOW SGA Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes The following example illustrates how to create a stored procedure and then show its compilation errors CONNECT SYSTEM MANAGER CREATE PROCEDURE HR PROC1 AS BEGIN PL z Ty END Warning Procedure created with compilation errors SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE PROC1 NO ERRORS SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE HR PROC1 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 171 SHOW Errors for PROCEDURE HR PROC1 LINE COL ERROR 3 3 PLS 00049 bad bind variable P1 To show whether AUTORECOVERY is enabled enter SHOW AUTORECOVERY AUTORECOVERY ON To display the id of the container to which you are connected enter SHOW CON_ID To display the name of the container to which you are connected enter SHOW CON_NAME CON_NAME CDBSROOT To display the names ids and modes of Pluggable Databases in the Consolidated Database to which you are connected enter SHOW PDBS CON_ID CON_NAME OPEN MODE RESTRICTED
311. i x i is even ELSE INSERT INTO temp VALUES i x i is odd END IF x x 100 END LOOP END Creating Stored Procedures Stored procedures are PL SQL functions packages or procedures To create stored procedures you use the following SQL CREATE commands a CREATE FUNCTION a CREATE LIBRARY a CREATE PACKAGE a CREATE PACKAGE BODY a CREATE PROCEDURE a CREATE TRIGGER a CREATE TYPE Entering any of these commands places you in PL SQL mode where you can enter your PL SQL subprogram For more information see Running PL SQL Blocks on page 4 5 When you are done typing your PL SQL subprogram enter a period ona line by itself to terminate PL SQL mode To run the SQL command and create the stored procedure you must enter RUN or slash A semicolon will not execute these CREATE commands When you use CREATE to create a stored procedure a message appears if there are compilation errors To view these errors you use SHOW ERRORS For example SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE ASSIGNVL See SHOW on page 12 168 for more information To execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure you can use the SQL Plus EXECUTE command EXECUTE runs the PL SQL statement that you enter immediately after the command For example EXECUTE EMPLOYEE_MANAGEMENT NEW_EMP BLAKE See EXECUTE on page 12 59 for more information Running SQL Plus Commands You can use SQL Plus commands to manipulate SQL commands and PL S
312. i ia tirita D 7 Uninstalling SOL Plus Instant ClieNt ooonininnnnicicnonnnnonancnnnnanncncnnonononoronononorororonono nano rnn cion ro rannncns D 7 Uninstalling the Complete Instant Client ooonicococicicinonononinnonocanononanonanononononanononononononononononononcnnnoos D 7 Index xi xii Audience Preface The SQL Plus pronounced sequel plus User s Guide and Reference introduces SOL Plus and its uses and describes each SOL Plus command This preface contains these topics Audience a Documentation Accessibility Related Documents a Conventions The SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference is intended for business and technical users and system administrators who perform the following tasks Develop and run batch scripts a Format calculate on store print and create web output from query results a Examine table and object definitions a Perform database administration This document assumes a basic understanding of the SQL language If you do not have familiarity with SQL see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference If you plan to use PL SQL with SQL Plus see the Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference Documentation Accessibility For information about Oracle s commitment to accessibility visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id docacc Access to Oracle Support Oracle customers have access to electronic support through My Oracle Suppo
313. iables see your Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference Enter PRINT with no variables to print all bind variables Bind variables are created using the VARIABLE command See VARIABLE on page 12 191 for more information and examples You can control the formatting of the PRINT output just as you would query output For more information see the formatting techniques described in Formatting SQL Plus Reports on page 6 1 To automatically display bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command use the AUTOPRINT clause of the SET command See SET on page 12 88 for more information The following example illustrates a PRINT command VARIABLE n NUMBER BEGIN no te 1 END PL SQL procedure successfully completed PRINT n SQL Plus Command Reference 12 71 PROMPT PROMPT Syntax Usage Examples PRO MPT tex where text represents the text of the message you want to display Sends the specified message or a blank line to the user s screen If you omit text PROMPT displays a blank line on the user s screen You can use this command in scripts to give information to the user The following example shows the use of PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT in a script called ASKFORDEPT SQL ASKFORDEPT SQL contains the following SQL Plus and SQL commands PROMPT PROMPT Please enter a valid department PROMPT For example 10 SELECT DEPARTMENT NAME FROM EMP DETAI
314. id 12 190 VARIABLE a il loo desa 12 191 WHENEVER OSERROR ars 12 198 WHENEVER SQLERROR aa 12 199 USUI a a A Ase od een an 12 201 SQL Plus Error Messages SOL Plis Error Messages AAA ees E e EE iti hl aes ek ead even a N EEE 13 1 COPY Command Messages re epopeea A oi aee re et E Eaei EE ESEA SEEE SENEE 13 34 Part IV SQL Plus Appendixes A SQL Plus Limits SQL Plus COPY Command COPY Command Synta A da R A SE a E E A B 1 TE cesan a a a a a ia a a n a a ae B 1 OEE A R E A E EEE E E T E TE B 3 Examples arrn nonn ido asin ista B 3 Copying Data from One Database to Another oonoicicicinnonninnonncnononcnnorincononcorornonininnororoncn nin no ron caninnos B 3 Understanding COPY Command Syntax cccccccceccccsesssesneneeseecesescscsnessesesesesssesceceneseansnanenens B 4 Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table ccc ceeeeeeeceeenseeeecenesssenenesenesenenes B 5 Interpreting the Messages that COPY Displays c cccccscesssssesessessseseececesessseansesesceceneseaesnanenens B 6 Specifying Another User s Table ocio ii trials B 6 Copying Data between Tables on One DatabaSe oocicininicininnnnnnnncnnnnanincncncernaccncanororincacnro rin cncinnos B 7 C Obsolete SQL Plus Commands SQL Plus Obsolete Command Alternatives ee scsesecseeecseecseesceceecseeseneaeseaeseeasseeasesaseeaes C 1 BTI TLE text obsolete old form ccccccccessesscescesscescecececesecescessecsecssesaecssesascseseseeeessseeeseseeeeeces C 2 COL UMN
315. id option was used in the SET SERVEROUTPUT command Action Specify a valid option SP2 0575 Use of Oracle SOL feature not in SOL92 Entry Intermediate Full Level Cause A SQL statement was attempted that is not FIPS compliant May also occur if a SOL Plus feature for example SET AUTOTRACE that uses Oracle specific SQL was turned on when you are using FIPS flagging Action Use SET FLAGGER and turn FIPS compliance checking OFE or rewrite the statement SP2 0577 Usage SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMEDIATE FULL Cause An invalid option was specified in the SET FLAGGER command Action Specify a valid option SP2 0581 Object object_name is a package use DESCRIBE lt package gt lt procedure gt Cause A attempt was made to describe a package as stand alone no sub object such as a procedure was supplied Action Use the DESCRIBE command to describe a sub object within a package SP2 0582 Usage EXIT QUIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n lt variable gt lt bindvariable gt COMMIT ROLLBACK Cause An option to EXIT was invalid in SQL Plus Action Specify a valid option SP2 0584 EXIT variable variable_name was non numeric Cause The specified EXIT variable is non numeric Action Check the syntax of the EXIT command for the correct usage SP2 0590 A COMPUTE function must appear before each LABEL keyword Cause The function COMPUTE must appear before each LABEL keyword Action Check the syntax of t
316. ides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SQL Plus The old form defines the top title as a line with the date left aligned and the page number right aligned followed by a line with centered text and then a blank line The text you enter defines the title TTITLE displays SQL Plus centers text based on the size of a line as determined by SET LINESIZE A separator character begins a new line two line separator characters in a row insert a blank line You can change the line separator character with SET HEADSEP You can control the formatting of page numbers in the old forms of TTITLE and BTITLE by defining a variable named _page The default value of _page is the formatting string page amp P4 To alter the format you can DEFINE _page with a new formatting string as follows SET ESCAPE SQL gt DEFINE _page Page amp P2 This formatting string will print the word page with an initial capital letter and format the page number to a width of two You can substitute any text for page and any number for the width You must set escape so that SQL Plus does not interpret the ampersand amp as a substitution variable See SET ERRORL OGGING ON OFF TABLE schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER identifier on page 12 110 for more information on setting the escape character SQL Plus interprets TTITLE in the old form if a valid new form clause does not immediately follow the command name C 4 SQL Plus User s Guid
317. in a column named REMARKS you can enter COLUMN REMARKS FORMAT A20 WRAP CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 2001 144 This order must be s hipped by air freigh t to ORD If you replace WRAP with WORD_WRAP REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 2001 144 This order must be shipped by air freight to ORD If you specify TRUNCATE REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 2001 144 This order must be s To print the current date and the name of each job in the top title enter the following Use the EMPLOYEES table of the HR schema instead of EMP_DETAILS_VIEW For details on creating a date variable see Displaying the Current Date in Titles on page 6 24 12 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Your two page report would look similar to the following report with Job Report centered within your current linesize COLUMN JOB_ID NOPRINT NEW_VALUE JOBVAR COLUMN TODAY NOPRINT NEW_VALUE DATEVAR BREAK ON JOB_ID SKIP PAGE ON TODAY TTITLE CENTER Job Report RIGHT DATEVAR SKIP 2 LEFT Job JOBVAR SKIP 2 SELECT TO_CHAR SYSDATE MM DD YYYY TODAY LAST_NAME JOB_ID MANAGER_ID HIRE_DATE SALARY DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE JOB_ID IN MK_MAN SA MAN ORDER BY JOB_ID LAST_NAME To change the default format of DATE columns to YYYY MM DD you can enter ALTER SESSION SET NLS_DATE_FORMAT YYYY MM DD
318. in long SQL Plus commands The TABLE option to set table WIDTH and BORDER attributes a The COLUMN command to set ENTMAP OFF for the DEPARTMENT_NAME column to enable the correct formation of HTML hyperlinks This makes sure that any HTML special characters such as quotes and angle brackets are not replaced by their equivalent entities amp quot amp amp lt and amp gt a The use of quotes and concatenation characters in the SELECT statement to create hyperlinks by concatenating string and variable elements View the report html source in your web browser or in a text editor to see that the table cells for the Department column contain fully formed hyperlinks as shown lt html gt lt head gt lt TITLE gt Department Report lt TITLE gt lt STYLE type text css gt lt BODY background FFFFC6 gt lt STYLE gt lt meta name generator content SQL Plus 10 2 0 1 gt lt head gt lt body TEXT FFOO0F gt SQL amp gt SELECT 1t A HREF amp quot http oracle com DEPARTMENT_NAME html amp quot amp gt DEPARTMENT_NAME amp lt A amp gt DEPARTMENT_NAME CITY lt br gt 2 FROM EMP DETAILS VIEW lt br gt 3 WHERE SALARY amp gt 12000 lt br gt lt p gt lt table WIDTH 90 BORDER 5 gt lt tr gt lt th gt DEPARTMENT lt th gt lt th gt CITY lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Executive html gt Executive lt A
319. in the substitution variables used in the command SP2 0737 Usage SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 In ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF Cause An invalid option was used in the SET DESCRIBE command Action Check the syntax of the SET DESCRIBE command for the correct options SP2 0738 Restricted command command_name not available Cause For security reasons the command was restricted by the RESTRICT command line option Action Ask your Database Administrator why SQL Plus should be run with a RESTRICT option SP2 0745 Usage SET SOLPLUSCOMPATUBILITY version release update Cause An invalid option was used in the SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIIBLITY command Action Check the syntax of the SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBLITY command for the correct options SP2 0746 command_option option out of range lower through upper Cause The specified value was not in the range Action Specify a value in the range SP2 0747 PAGESIZE must be at least max_page_size to run this query with LINESIZE line_size Cause The PAGESIZE setting was too small to display the specified LINESIZE Action Increase the PAGESIZE to at least match the specified LINESIZE SP2 0749 Cannot resolve circular path of synonym synonym_name Cause An attempt was made to use a synonym to point to an object that no longer exists where the synonym had the same name as the base object or an attempt was made to use a synonym that has a circular path that points back to itself 13
320. ing Comments in Scripts on page 5 7 The following script contains some typical comments REM COMPUTE use BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM OF DEPARTMENT 30 REM Each column REM one of the SELECT JOB_ID SUM DECODE DEP SUM DECODE DEP SUM DECODE SUM SALARY TO FROM EMP_DETAIL GROUP BY JOB_ID s BREAK ON REPORT to break on end of table DEPARTMENT 10 DEPARTMENT 20 TOTAL BY JOB_ID ON REPORT displays the sums of salaries by job for departments 10 20 30 ARTMENT_ID 10 SALARY 0 DEPARTMENT 10 ARTMENT_ID 20 SALARY 0 DEPARTMENT 20 DEPARTMENT_ID 30 SALARY 0 DEPARTMENT 30 TAL BY JOB_ID S_VIEW 1 12 80 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPFOOTER REPFOOTER Syntax Terms Usage Examples REPF OOTER PAGE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n SIKIP n TAB n LE FT CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition Enter REPFOOTER with no clauses to list the current REPFOOTER definition See the REPHEADER command on page 12 83 for additional information on terms and clauses in the REPFOOTER command syntax If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPFOOTER left justifies the text or variabl
321. ings and messages SP2 0846 Java altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL java has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0847 PL SQL compilation errors Cause The PL SQL block has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0848 Dimension created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL dimension has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0849 Dimension altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL dimension has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 1500 STARTUP with UPGRADE only valid with Oracle 9 2 or greater Cause STARTUP UPGRADE was used to try to startup an Oracle server for a release prior to 9 2 Action Check the platform specific environment to verify that you are connecting to an Oracle server that is at least release 9 2 SP2 1501 STARTUP with DOWNGRADE only valid with Oracle 9 2 or greater Cause STARTUP DOWNGRADE was used to try to startup an Oracle server for a release prior to 9 2 Action Check the platform specific environment to verify that you are connecting to an Oracle server that is at least relea
322. ion errors caused by the errorlog calling itself errorlogging is automatically set OFF Error logging is set OFF by default ON Writes ORA PLS and SP2 errors to the default table SPERRORLOG OFF Disables error TABLE schema tablename Specifies a user defined table to use instead of the default SPERRORLOG If you omit schema the table is created in the current schema The table you specify must exist and you must have access permissions If the table specified does not exist or you do not have access an error message is displayed and the default table SPERRORLOG is used TRUNCATE Clears all existing rows in the error log table and begins recording errors from the current session IDENTIFIER identifier A user defined string to identify errors You can use it to identify errors from a particular session or from a particular version of a query Creating a User Defined Error Log Table You can create one or more error log tables to use other than the default Before specifying a user defined error log table with the TABLE schema tablename option you must create it and ensure that you have permissions to access it The error log table has the following column definitions Table 12 4 SQL Plus Error Log Column Definitions Column Type Description username VARCHAR 256 Oracle account name timestamp TIMESTAMP Time when the error occurred 12 110 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary Tabl
323. ions to start a Database Consolidated or otherwise Only use root_connection_options to start a Pluggable Database while connected to the Root Only use pdb_options to start a Pluggable Database to which you are connected Only use upgrade_options to start a Database Consolidated or otherwise for upgrade or downgrade If neither READ WRITE nor READ ONLY is specified a PDB will be opened in READ ONLY if a CDB to which it belongs is used as a physical standby database otherwise the PDB will be opened READ WRITE For more information about using Consolidated and Pluggable Databases see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference FORCE Shuts down the current Oracle Database instance if it is running with SHUTDOWN mode ABORT before restarting it If the current instance is running and FORCE is not specified an error results FORCE is useful while debugging and under abnormal circumstances It should not normally be used RESTRICT Only enables Oracle Database users with the RESTRICTED SESSION system privilege to connect to the database Later you can use the ALTER SYSTEM command to disable the restricted session feature PFILE filename Specifies the client parameter file to be used while starting the instance If PFILE is not specified the server attempts to access a default server parameter file spfile If the default spfile isn t found the server then attempts to access a default pfile T
324. ipts to be run UPGRADE should only be used when a database is first started with a new version of the Oracle Database Server See the Oracle Database Upgrade Guide for details about preparing for testing and implementing a database version upgrade When run upgrade scripts transform an installed version or release of an Oracle database into a later version for example to upgrade an Oracle9i database to Oracle Database 10g Once the upgrade completes the database should be shut down and restarted normally DOWNGRADE Starts the database in OPEN DOWNGRADE mode and sets system initialization parameters to specific values required to enable database downgrade scripts to be run See the Oracle Database Upgrade Guide for details about preparing for testing and implementing a database version downgrade When run downgrade scripts transform an installed version or release of Oracle Database into a previous version for example to downgrade an Oracle10g database to an Oracle9i database Once the downgrade completes the database should be shut down and restarted normally PLUGGABLE DATABASE Use the pluggable database pdbname option to specify the plugggable database on which you want the STARTUP command to act You must be connected to a database as SYSDBA SYSOPER SYSBACKUP or SYSDG You cannot be connected to a shared server via a dispatcher STARTUP with no arguments is equivalent to STARTUP OPEN STARTUP OPEN RECOVER mounts a
325. istry entry SQLPATH 2 2 2 3 RELEASE clause 12 170 REMARK command 5 7 12 80 removing sample tables 0 xxiv RENAME command disabling 9 3 REPFOOTER clause 12 170 REPFOOTER command 6 18 12 81 aligning footer elements 12 84 BOLD clause 12 84 CENTER clause 12 84 COL clause 12 83 FORMAT clause 12 84 indenting report footers 12 83 LEFT clause 12 84 OFF clause 12 83 RIGHT clause 12 84 SKIP clause 12 83 suppressing current definition 12 83 TAB clause 12 84 REPHEADER clause 12 170 REPHEADER command 6 18 12 83 aligning header elements 6 19 aligning heading elements 12 84 BOLD clause 12 84 CENTER clause 12 84 COL clause 12 83 FORMAT clause 12 84 indenting headings 12 83 LEFT clause 12 84 OFF clause 12 83 PAGE clause 12 83 RIGHT clause 12 84 SKIP clause 12 83 suppressing current definition 12 83 TAB clause 12 84 REPLACE clause in COPY command B 2 B 5 in SAVE command 12 87 12 176 reports Index 11 autotrace 8 1 breaks 12 16 clarifying with spacing and summary lines 6 9 columns 12 27 creating bottom titles 6 17 12 20 C 1 creating footers 12 81 creating headers 12 83 creating headers and footers 6 17 creating master detail 6 23 12 30 12 31 creating top titles 6 17 12 187 C 2 displaying 12 89 12 97 formatting column headings 6 1 12 26 formatting columns 6 3 6 5 12 26 interactive HTML example 7 2 7 3 on the web 7 1 SILENT mode 7 5 starti
326. itution variable 12 105 SUFFIX variable 12 91 12 153 TAB variable 8 10 12 91 12 154 TERMOUT variable 8 10 12 91 12 155 TIME variable 12 91 12 156 TIMING variable 12 91 12 157 TRIMOUT variable 12 91 12 158 TRIMSPOOL variable 12 91 12 159 TRUNCATE variable C 2 C 4 UNDERLINE variable 12 91 12 160 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 12 194 VERIFY clause 5 13 VERIFY variable 5 17 12 91 12 161 WRAP variable 6 5 12 91 12 162 XMLOPTIMIZATIONCHECK variable 12 91 12 163 XQUERY BASEURI variable 12 91 XQUERY CONTEXT variable 12 91 XQUERY NODE variable 12 91 XQUERY ORDERING variable 12 91 SET CONSTRAINTS command disabling 9 3 SET MARKUP BODY clause 3 8 ENTMAP clause 3 9 7 5 HEAD clause 3 8 HTML 3 8 interactive HTML example 7 2 7 3 PREFORMAT clause 3 10 TABLE clause 3 8 SET ROLE command disabling 9 3 SET system variable summary 12 89 SET TRANSACTION command disabling 9 3 SET variables 4 8 See system variables SET XQUERY BASEURI 12 164 SET XQUERY CONTEXT 12 167 SET XQUERY NODE 12 166 SET XQUERY ORDERING 12 165 SGA clause 12 170 SHIFTINOUT variable 12 90 12 142 SHOW schema parameter 12 168 12 169 SHOW clause 12 186 SHOW command 4 8 12 168 ALL clause 12 168 BTITLE clause 12 169 CON_ID clause 12 168 CON_NAME clause 12 168 ERRORS clause 12 169 LABEL variable C 2 listing current page dimensions 6 26 LNO clause 12 169 PDBS clause 12 169 PNO clause 12 170 RELEASE clause
327. ively If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL See SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 for information on changing the default extension When you enter START file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with the filename and extension you specify in the current default directory If SOL Plus does not find such a file SQL Plus will search a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Data items you wish to pass to parameters in the script If you enter one or more arguments SQL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the script The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so on The START command defines the parameters with the values of the arguments if you START the script again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the old values See Defining Substitution Variables on page 5 11 and Using Substitution Variables on page 5 12 for more information on using parameters All previous settings like COLUMN command settings stay in effect when the script starts If the script changes any setting then this new value stays in effect
328. kup and Recovery User s Guide DISCONNECT Indicates that the managed redo process MRP should apply archived redo files as a detached background process Doing so leaves the current session available TIMEOUT Specifies in minutes the wait period of the sustained recovery operation The recovery process waits for integer minutes for a requested archived log redo to be available for writing to the standby database If the redo log file does not become available within that time the recovery process terminates with an error message You can then issue the statement again to return to sustained standby recovery mode If you do not specify this clause or if you specify NOTIMEOUT the database remains in sustained standby recovery mode until you reissue the statement with the RECOVER CANCEL clause or until instance shutdown or failure NODELAY Applies a delayed archivelog immediately to the standby database overriding any DELAY setting in the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter on the primary database If you omit this clause application of the archivelog is delayed according to the parameter setting If DELAY was not specified in the parameter the archivelog is applied immediately DEFAULT DELAY Waits the default number of minutes specified in the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter before applying the archived redo logs DELAY integer Waits integer minutes before applying the archived redo logs NEXT integer 12 76 SQL Plus U
329. l column attributes set for each column remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the column OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command SQL Plus Command Reference 12 31 COLUMN Examples When you enter multiple COLUMN commands for the same column SQL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several COLUMN commands apply the same clause to the same column the last one entered will control the output To make the LAST_NAME column 20 characters wide and display EMPLOYEE NAME on two lines as the column heading enter COLUMN LAST_NAME FORMAT A20 HEADING EMPLOYEE NAME To format the SALARY column so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero enter COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 9 999 990 99 To assign the alias NET to a column containing a long expression to display the result in a dollar format and to display lt NULL gt for null values you might enter COLUMN SALARY COMMISSION_PCT BONUS EXPENSES INS TAX ALIAS NET COLUMN NET FORMAT 9 999 999 99 NULL lt NULL gt Note that the example divides this column specification into two commands The first defines the alias NET and the second uses NET to define the format Also note that in the first command you must enter the expression exactly as you enter it in the SELECT command Otherwise SOL Plus cannot match the COLUMN command to the appropriate column To wrap long values
330. l file Cause Possible causes a Insufficient privileges to create a file A system error made it impossible to create a file Action Take the following actions Change privileges to allow creation of the file Consult the operating system documentation or contact the System Administrator SP2 0333 Illegal spool file name spool_name bad character character_name Cause An invalid filename was entered in the SPOOL command Action Correct the filename and re enter SQL Plus Error Messages 13 11 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0341 line overflow during variable substitution gt number_of_characters characters at line line_number Cause The maximum number of characters was exceeded in the SQL buffer after the substitution variable was expanded Action Reduce the length in the substitution variable and try again SP2 0357 Out of temporary storage Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0359 memory exhausted Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0381 command_name is not available Cause The command specified is
331. l timers created by the TIMING command To clear breaks enter CLEAR BREAKS 12 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CLEAR To clear column definitions enter CLEAR COLUMNS SQL Plus Command Reference 12 25 COLUMN COLUMN Syntax Terms COL UMN column expr option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI AS alias CLE AR ENTMAP ON OFF FOLD_A FTER FOLD_B EFORE FOR MAT format HEA DING text JUS TIFY L EFT CENTER R IGHT LIKE expr alias NEWLINE NEW_V ALUE variable NOPRI NT PRI NT NULL text OLD_V ALUE variable ON OFF WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Specifies display attributes for a given column such as text for the column heading a alignment of the column heading format for NUMBER data wrapping of column data Also lists the current display attributes for a single column or all columns Enter COLUMN followed by column or expr and no other clauses to list the current display attributes for only the specified column or expression Enter COLUMN with no clauses to list all current column display attributes column expr Identifies the data item typically the name of a column in a SQL SELECT command to which the column command refers If you use an expression ina COLUMN command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you
332. lay attributes for all 6 7 12 26 listing display attributes for one 6 7 12 26 names in destination table when copying B 2 B 4 printing line after values that overflow 6 8 12 90 12 138 resetting a column to default display 6 7 12 27 C 1 resetting all columns to default display 12 24 restoring display attributes 6 8 12 14 12 31 setting printing to off or on 6 23 8 8 12 30 starting new lines 12 30 storing values in variables 6 23 12 30 suppressing display attributes 6 8 12 14 12 31 truncating display for all when value overflows 6 6 12 162 truncating display for one when value overflows 6 6 12 31 wrapping display for all when value overflows 6 5 12 162 wrapping display for one when value overflows 6 6 12 31 wrapping whole words for one 6 8 COLUMNS clause 12 24 Index 4 comma number format 6 4 command files aborting and exiting with a return code 5 11 12 198 12 199 creating with a system editor 5 2 creating with SAVE 12 87 12 108 editing with system editor 12 57 in at sign command 5 10 12 5 in EDIT command 12 57 in GET command 12 62 in SAVE command 5 2 12 87 in SOLPLUS command 3 12 5 10 in START command 5 10 12 178 including comments in 5 7 12 80 including more than one PL SQL block 5 2 including more than one SQL command 5 2 nesting 5 11 passing parameters to 5 17 12 5 12 7 12 178 registering 12 89 12 92 retrieving 12 62 running 5 10 12 5 12 1
333. le CREATE OR REPLACE 2 HELLO PROCEDURE HELLO AS BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE HELLO END YH OH FP WwW Warning Procedure created with compilation errors The location of the comment prevents SQL Plus from recognizing the command as a command SOL Plus submits the PL SQL block to the server when it sees the slash at the beginning of the comment which it interprets as the statement terminator Move the comment to avoid this error For example CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE 2 HELLO HELLO AS BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE HELLO END ADM FP WwW Procedure created 5 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Placing Comments in Scripts 2 Do not put comments after statement terminators period semicolon or slash For example if you enter SELECT Y FROM DUAL TESTING You get the following error SELECT Y FROM DUAL TESTING ERROR at line 1 ORA 00911 invalid character SQL Plus expects no text after a statement terminator and is unable to process the command 3 Do not put statement termination characters at the end of a comment line or after comments in a SQL statement or a PL SQL block For example if you enter SELECT COMMENT You get the following error COMMENT ERROR at line 2 ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected The semicolon is interpreted as a statement terminator and SQL Plus submits the partially formed
334. le 12 116 example interactive HTML report 7 2 7 3 EXECUTE command 12 59 executing a CREATE command 4 6 execution plan 8 3 execution statistics including in report 12 97 EXIT clause WHENEVER OSERROR 12 198 WHENEVER SQLERROR 12 199 EXIT command 3 6 12 60 BindVariable clause 12 60 COMMIT clause 12 60 FAILURE clause 12 60 inascript 12 178 ROLLBACK clause 12 60 use with SET MARKUP 7 2 WARNING clause 12 60 exit conditional 12 198 EXITCOMMIT variable 12 89 12 117 EXPLAIN command disabling 9 3 extension 12 87 12 153 12 185 F FAILURE clause 12 60 FEEDBACK variable 12 90 12 118 file extensions 2 5 12 87 12 153 12 185 file names in at sign command 12 5 in double at sign command 12 7 in EDIT command 12 57 in GET command 12 62 inSAVE command 12 87 in SPOOL command 6 27 12 176 in SQLPLUS command 3 12 files flat 6 26 required for SQL Plus Instant Client D 3 FLAGGER variable 12 90 12 119 FLASHBACK command disabling 9 3 flat file 6 26 FLUSH variable 8 9 12 90 12 120 FOLD_AFTER clause 12 27 FOLD_BEFORE clause 12 27 font changing face and size in command line 1 1 footers aligning elements 12 84 displaying at bottom of page 12 81 displaying system maintained values 12 83 formatting elements 12 84 indenting 12 83 listing current definition 12 81 setting at the end of reports 6 17 suppressing definition 12 83 FORCE clause 12 181 FORMAT
335. lists the page 12 186 current timer s title and timing data or lists the number of active timers TTITLE on Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page 12 187 page or lists the current TTITLE definition UNDEFINE on Deletes one or more substitution variables that you defined page 12 190 either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command VARIABLE on Declares a bind variable that can be referenced in PL SQL page 12 191 WHENEVER on Exits SQL Plus if an operating system command generates OSERROR page 12 198 an error WHENEVER on Exits SOL Plus if a SOL command or PL SQL block SQLERROR page 12 199 generates an error XQUERY on Runs an XQuery 1 0 statement page 12 201 12 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference at sign at sign Syntax Terms Usage url file_namel exf arg Runs the SQL Plus statements in the specified script The script can be called from the local file system or from a web server The command functions similarly to and START url Specifies the Uniform Resource Locator of a script to run on the specified web server SOL Plus supports HTTP and FIP protocols but not HTTPS HTTP authentication in the form http username password machine_name domain is not supported in this release file_namel ex Represents the script you wish to run If you omit ext SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension
336. ll not work with SOLPLUS NOLOG Bind variables are not supported in the XQUERY command There are four SET commands specific to the XQUERY command The SHOW XQUERY command gives the status of these settings They are Table 12 7 XQUERY SET commands SET Command SET XQUERY BASEURI SET XQUERY ORDERING SET XQUERY NODE SET XQUERY CONTEXT For more information about the SET XQUERY commands see SQL Plus Command Reference 12 201 XQUERY a SET XQUERY BASEURI text on page 12 164 a SET XQUERY ORDERING UNORDERED ORDERED DEFAULT on page 12 165 a SET XQUERY NODE BYVALUE BYREFERENCE DEFAULT on page 12 166 a SET XQUERY CONTEXT text on page 12 167 Examples The XQuery statement in the following script queries the EMP_DETAILS_VIEW view of the HR schema set long 160 set linesize 160 xquery for i in ora view EMP_DETAILS VIEW return i Result Sequence lt ROW gt lt EMPNO gt 73 69 lt EMPNO gt lt ENAME gt SMITH lt ENAME gt lt JOB gt CLERK lt JOB gt lt MGR gt 7902 lt MGR gt lt HI REDATE gt 17 DEC 80 lt HIREDATE gt lt SAL gt 800 lt SAL gt lt DEPTNO gt 20 lt DEPTNO gt lt ROW gt 14 item s selected 12 202 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 13 SQL Plus Error Messages This appendix lists error messages with prefixes SP2 and CPY generated by SOL Plus a SQL Plus Error Messages a COPY Command Messages For error messages with prefixes such as ORA
337. llowing equal sign Cause There was no value for the variable or symbol SQL Plus expected a value to be assigned to a symbol or variable name after the equal sign Action Specify a value for the symbol or variable SP2 0138 no room to add substitution variable variable Cause Maximum number of variables that can be defined in a SOL Plus session was exceeded Action UNDEFINE any unused variables to make room for this variable and re run the command SP2 0146 Unable to allocate dynamic space needed number_of_bytes bytes exiting Cause An internal error occurred Action Note the message and number and contact the System Administrator SP2 0152 ORACLE may not be functioning properly Cause Unable to initialize a session to the Oracle instance Action Make a note of the message and the number then contact the Database Administrator 13 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0157 unable to CONNECT to ORACLE after 3 attempts exiting SOL Plus Cause Unable to connect to Oracle after three attempts Action Validate login details and re try SP2 0158 unknown command_name option option_name Cause An invalid option was specified for the given command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0160 Unable to open file_name Cause Possible causes The file was not found under the specified name in the specified location File lacked the necessary
338. logical combinations can be set but will not work For example Japanese cannot be supported using a Western European character set such as NLS_LANG JAPANESE_JAPAN WE8DEC However Japanese could be supported with the Unicode character set For example NLS_LANG JAPANESE_JAPAN UTF8 Viewing NLS_LANG Settings You can view the NLS_LANG setting by entering the SELECT command SELECT FROM NLS_SESSION_PARAMETERS The NLS_TERRITORY and NLS_LANGUAGE values correspond to the language and territory components of the NLS_LANG variable You can also obtain a list of valid values for the NLS_SORT NLS_ LANGUAGE NLS_ TERRITORY and NLS_CHARACTERSET by querying the NLS dynamic performance view table VENLS_VALID_VALUES Setting NLS_LANG You can set the NLS_LANG environment variable to control globalization features Example 11 1 Configuring Japanese Support in SQL Plus on Windows 1 Ensure you have exited your current SQL Plus session 2 Open System from Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 3 Click the Advanced tab and select Environment Variables 4 Create a new environment variable NLS_LANG with a value of Japanese_ Japan JA16SJIS 5 You may need to restart Windows for this setting to take effect 11 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Setting NLS_LANG Example 11 2 Configuring Japanese Support in SQL Plus on UNIX 1 2 Ensure you have exited your current SQL Plus session Set the NLS_LANG variable using eit
339. lt setting for SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY is the value of the SOL Plus client It is recommended that you add SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY 12 1 to your scripts to maximize their compatibility with future versions of SQL Plus SQL Plus Compatibility Matrix The SOL Plus Compatibility Matrix tabulates behavior affected by each SOL Plus compatibility setting SQL Plus compatibility modes can be set in three ways a You can include a SET SOLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY command in your site or user profile On installation there is no SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY setting in glogin sql Therefore the default compatibility is 12 1 a You can use the SQLPLUS C OMPATIBILITY x y z command argument at startup to set the compatibility mode of that session You can use the SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY x y z command during a session to set the SQL Plus behavior you want for that session The following table shows the release of SQL Plus which introduced the behavior change and hence the minimum value of SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY to obtain that behavior For example to obtain the earlier behavior of the VARIABLE command you must either use a version of SQL Plus earlier than 9 0 1 or you must use a SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY value of less than 9 0 1 The lowest value that can be set for SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY is 7 3 4 Table 12 6 Compatibility Matrix Value Consequence When available gt 10 1 SHOW ERRORS sorts PL SQL error messages using new 10 1 columns only available in Oracle D
340. mand only occurs with the default SOLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY setting of 10 1 For more information see SET SOLPLUSCOMPATITIBILITY x y z on page 12 148 Starting Command line SQL Plus To begin using SQL Plus you must first understand how to start and stop SQL Plus Example 3 7 Starting SQL Plus This example shows you how to start SQL Plus 1 2 3 Make sure that SQL Plus has been installed on your computer Log on to the operating system if required Enter the command SQLPLUS and press Return Note Some operating systems expect you to enter commands in lowercase letters If your system expects lowercase enter the SQLPLUS command in lowercase SQLPLUS SOL Plus displays its version number the current date and copyright information and prompts you for your username the text displayed on your system may differ slightly SQL Plus Release 12 1 0 1 0 Development on Fri Aug 3 19 03 02 2012 Copyright c 1982 2012 Oracle All rights reserved Enter user name 4 Enter your username and press Return SQL Plus displays the prompt Enter password Enter your password and press Return again For your protection your password does not appear on the screen The process of entering your username and password is called logging in SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle Database to which you connected and the versions of available tools such as PL SQL and the local time of the last time you logged on
341. mands ON commits pending changes to the database after Oracle Database executes each successful INSERT UPDATE or DELETE or PL SQL block OFF suppresses automatic committing so that you must commit changes manually for example with the SQL command COMMIT IMMEDIATE functions in the same manner as ON n commits pending changes to the database after Oracle Database executes n successful SOL INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks n cannot be less than zero or greater than 2 000 000 000 The statement counter is reset to zero after successful completion of n INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks a commit a rollback or a SET AUTOCOMMIT command SET AUTOCOMMIT does not alter the commit behavior when SQL Plus exits Any uncommitted data is committed by default Note For this feature a PL SQL block is considered one transaction regardless of the actual number of SOL commands contained within it 12 94 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET AUTOP RINT ON OFF Sets the automatic printing of bind variables ON or OFF controls whether SQL Plus automatically displays bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command See PRINT on page 12 71 for more information about displaying bind variables SQL Plus Command Reference 12 95 SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF ON sets the RECOVER command to a
342. mands for one or more attributes All attribute characteristics set for each attribute remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the attribute OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command Thus the ATTRIBUTE commands you enter can control an attribute s display characteristics for multiple SQL SELECT commands When you enter multiple ATTRIBUTE commands for the same attribute SQL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several ATTRIBUTE commands apply the same clause to the same attribute the last one entered will control the output To make the LAST_NAME attribute of the Object Type EMPLOYEE_TYPE twenty characters wide enter ATTRIBUTE EMPLOYEE_TYPE LAST_NAME FORMAT A20 To format the SALARY attribute of the Object Type EMPLOYEE_TYPE so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero enter ATTRIBUTE EMPLOYEE_TYPE SALARY FORMAT 9 999 990 99 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 15 BREAK BREAK Syntax Terms BRE AK ON report_element action action where report_element has the syntax column expr ROW REPORT and action has the syntax SKI P n SKI P PAGE NODUP LICATES DUP LICATES Specifies where changes occur in a report and the formatting action to perform such as suppressing display of duplicate values for a given column skipping a line each time a given column value changes
343. marks of SPARC International Inc AMD Opteron the AMD logo and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services Contents PAC ares area at A RAR Aa xiii RN xiii Documentation Accessibility iria aE E a E aiii as xiii Related D c ments eise ihme area i ade aae ages A xiv CONVENIOS E E E O EOE EEEE E xiv Changes in This Release for SQL PIUS 2 0 0 0 ec cecseeesssseesseeeeseneessneecsneccenseceneeeenneeenneeenneeesnes xvii Changes in SOL Plus Release Tui drid iia eds xvii SOC Pl s Quick Sad a lll hans xix SOL Plus Resolution xix SOL Plus Over vie Wicca diia Lacie abd Aelia xix SOL Plus Prerequisites eisai scsi hocsiea eee ade a a E aoe A teats xxi Starting SOL Plus Command line snieni irets iia esta xxi Starting SOL Plus Instant Clint a a T xxiii Connecting to a Different Database ccccccccscsssessesesessseesesesssesesesesesssesesesesesssesesescsesesescse
344. mary lines based on all values in a column by using BREAK and COMPUTE in the following forms BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON REPORT Example 6 14 Computing and Printing a Grand Total To calculate and print the grand total of salaries for all sales people and change the compute label first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SALARY ON REPORT Next enter and run a new query SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN LAST_NAME SALARY Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Errazuriz 12000 Cambrault 11000 Zlotkey 10500 TOTAL 61000 To print a grand total or grand average grand maximum and so on in addition to subtotals or sub averages and so on include a break column and an ON REPORT Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 15 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines clause in your BREAK command Then enter one COMPUTE command for the break column and another to compute ON REPORT BREAK ON break_column ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON REPORT Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines You can compute and print the same type of summary value on different columns To do so enter a separate COMPUTE command for each column Example 6 15 Computing the Same Type of Summary Value on Differe
345. me Cause An attempt was made to save the content of the SQL buffer to a file and the file could not be written Possible causes a An error was encountered when creating the destination file SQL Plus Error Messages 13 5 SQL Plus Error Messages A directory name specified in the SAVE statement was not found a A system error made it impossible to open the file Action Take the following actions a Check that the destination is valid and that there is sufficient space on the destination device a Check the statement for a typing mistake in the directory name Then issue the statement again after correcting the directory name SP2 0111 Cannot close save file file_ name Cause The file was in use Action Release the file from the other process SP2 0116 Illegal SAVE command Cause An invalid option was used in the SAVE command Action Check the syntax of the SAVE command for the correct options SP2 0134 no symbols currently defined Cause No DEFINE symbols were defined Action No action required SP2 0135 Symbol symbol_name is UNDEFINED Cause The specified symbol was undefined Action Re enter the DEFINE command with an assignment clause or a valid symbol or variable name SP2 0136 DEFINE requires an equal sign Cause Expecting an equal sign after a symbol or variable name in the DEFINE command Action Specify an equal sign after the symbol or variable name SP2 0137 DEFINE requires a value fo
346. me database With the COPY command you can copy data between databases in the following ways Copy data from a remote database to your local database a Copy data from your local default database to a remote database most systems Copy data from one remote database to another remote database most systems SQL Plus COPY Command B 3 Copying Data from One Database to Another Note In general the COPY command was designed to be used for copying data between Oracle and non Oracle databases You should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT to copy data between Oracle databases Understanding COPY Command Syntax You enter the COPY command in the following form COPY FROM database TO database action destination_table column_name column_name column_name USING query Here is a sample COPY command COPY FROM HR BOSTONDB TO TODD CHICAGODB CREATE NEWDEPT DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_NAME CITY USING SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW To specify a database in the FROM or TO clause you must have a valid username and password for the local and remote databases and know the appropriate Oracle Net service names COPY obeys Oracle Database security so the username you specify must have been granted access to tables for you to have access to tables For information on what databases are available to you contact your DBA When you copy to your local database from a remote database you can omit t
347. minimum standard deviation variance or row count Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns The BREAK command suppresses duplicate values by default in the column or expression you name Thus to suppress the duplicate values in a column specified in an ORDER BY clause use the BREAK command in its simplest form BREAK ON break_column Note Whenever you specify a column or expression in a BREAK command use an ORDER BY clause specifying the same column or expression If you do not do this breaks occur every time the column value changes Example 6 10 Suppressing Duplicate Values in a Break Column To suppress the display of duplicate department numbers in the query results shown enter the following commands BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID For the following query which is the current query stored in the buffer SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes You can insert blank lines or begin a new page each time the value changes in the break column To insert n blank lines use the BREAK command in the following form BREAK ON break_column SKIP n To skip a page use the command in this form BREAK ON break_column SKIP PAGE Example 6
348. mmand Reference 12 113 SET ERRORL OGGING ON OFF TABLE schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER identifier TIMESTAM STATEMEN P USERNAME SCRIPT IDENTIFIER T MESSAGE Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql show errors ORA 00907 missing 21 30 06 2006 procedure right parenthesis sss Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql set garbage SP2 0158 unknown 21 30 09 2006 SET option garbage Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql garbage ORA 00942 table or 21 30 10 2006 view does not exist Example 3 To use an error log table other than the default a Create the error log table you want to use a Specify the table you want to use with the TABLE option of the SET ERRORLOGGING ON command The error log table must have the column definitions defined in Table 12 4 SOL Plus Error Log Column Definitions John wants to use an error log table named john_sperrorlog John would run the following SQL statements to create the new error log table DROP TABLE john_sperrorlog CREATE TABLE john_sperrorlog username VARCHAR 256 timestamp TIMESTAMP script VARCHAR 1024 identifier VARCHAR 256 message CLOB statement CLOB John then issues the following SET command to enable error logging using the newly created error log table SET ERRORLOGGING ON TABLE john_sperrorlog All error logging for John is now recorded to john_sperrorlog and not to the default error log table SPERRORLOG Access privileges for the error log table are
349. more information CONTINUE Turns off the EXIT option COMMIT Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database ROLLBACK Directs SOL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database NONE Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing The WHENEVER SQLERROR command is triggered by SQL command or PL SQL block errors and not by SQL Plus command errors The commands in the following script cause SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code if the SOL UPDATE command fails WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE UPDATE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SET SALARY SALARY 1 1 The following examples show that the WHENEVER SQLERROR command is not executed after errors with SOL Plus commands but it is executed if SOL commands or PL SQL blocks cause errors WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE column LAST_name headIing Employee Name SQL Plus Command Reference 12 199 WHENEVER SQLERROR Unknown COLUMN option headiing SHOW non_existed_option The following PL SQL block error causes SOL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE begin SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL END SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL ERROR at line 2 ORA 06550 line 2 column 10 PLS 00201 identifier COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST must be declared ORA 06550 line 2 column 3 PL SQL
350. mplete string SQL Plus Error Messages 13 25 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0804 Procedure created with compilation warnings SP2 SP2 SP2 SP2 SP2 Cause The PL SQL procedure has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL procedure Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0805 Procedure altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL procedure has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL procedure Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0806 Function created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL function has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL function Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0807 Function altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL function has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL function Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0808 Package created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package has been created but
351. n 5 21 accepting values from the user 5 19 12 10 INPUT command 5 3 5 6 12 65 entering several lines 12 65 INSERT clause B 2 B 5 INSERT command disabling 9 4 installation SQL Plus Instant Client D 1 SOL Plus Instant Client by copying D 1 SOL Plus Instant Client by copying from 10g Client D 3 SOL Plus Instant Client by download from OTN D 1 D 2 SOL Plus Instant Client on Linux D 2 SQL Plus Instant Client on UNIX or Windows D 2 SQL Plus Instant Client UNIX and Linux files to copy D 4 SQL Plus Instant Client Windows files to copy D 4 installation by copying D 1 installation by copying from 10g Client D 3 installation by download from OTN D 1 D 2 installation on Linux D 2 installation on UNIX or Windows D 2 installation UNIX and Linux files to copy D 4 installation Windows files to copy D 4 INSTANCE variable 12 90 12 123 instances shutting down 12 174 starting 12 180 Instant Client SQL Plus D 1 Instant Client packages D 1 J Japanese JUSTIFY clause 12 30 Index 8 L LABEL variable SHOW command C 2 labels in COMPUTE command 6 13 12 34 language SOL Plus Instant Client D 1 LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variables 2 1 LEFT clause 6 20 12 84 12 188 lightweight OCI package D 1 LIKE clause 6 7 12 14 12 30 limits SOL Plus A 1 lines adding at beginning of buffer 12 65 adding at end of buffer 12 65 adding new after current 5 6 12 65 appending text to 5 5 12 12 changing
352. n about the significance of case in a CHANGE command and on using wildcards to specify blocks of text in a CHANGE command Appending Text to a Line To add text to the end of a line in the buffer use the APPEND command 1 Use the LIST command or the line number to list the line you want to change 2 Enter APPEND followed by the text you want to add If the text you want to add begins with a blank separate the word APPEND from the first character of the text by two blanks one to separate APPEND from the text and one to go into the buffer with the text Example 5 5 Appending Text to a Line To append a space and the clause DESC to line 4 of the current query first list line 4 LIST 4 4 ORDER BY SALARY Next enter the following command be sure to type two spaces between APPEND and DESC APPEND DESC 4 ORDER BY SALARY DESC Type RUN to verify the query Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 5 Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN 4 ORDER BY SALARY DESC EMPLOYEE ID LAST NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 147 Errazuriz SA_MAN 12 000 148 Cambrault SA_MAN 11 000 149 Zlotkey SA_MAN 10 500 Adding a New Line To insert a new line after the current line use the INPUT command To insert a line before line 1 enter a zero 0 and follow the zero with text SOL
353. n and for columns with unknown security Controls whether to display the output that is DBMS_ OUTPUT PUT_LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SQL Plus Enables correct alignment for terminals that display shift characters Controls whether SOL Plus lists the old and new settings of a SQL Plus system variable when you change the setting with SET SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET SQLBLANKLINES ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus puts blank lines within a SOL page 12 144 command or script SET SQLCASE MIXED LOWER UPPER on Converts the case of SOL commands and PL SQL blocks page 12 145 just prior to execution SET SQLCONTINUE gt text on Sets the character sequence SQL Plus displays as a prompt page 12 146 after you continue a SQL Plus command on an additional line using a hyphen SET SQLNUMBER ON OFF on Sets the prompt for the second and subsequent lines of a page 12 147 SOL command or PL SQL block SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY x yj z on Sets the behavior or output format of VARIABLE to that of page 12 148 the release or version specified by x y z SET SQLPREFIX c on Sets the SQL Plus prefix character page 12 150 SET SQLPROMPT SQL gt text on Sets the SQL Plus command prompt page 12 151 SET SQLTERMINATOR k IclON OFF on Sets the character used to end and execute SQL commands page 12 152 toc SET SUFFIX SQL text on Sets the default file that SQL Plu
354. n heading separation is OFF SQL Plus prints a heading separator character like any other character ON changes the value of c back to the default 12 122 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL Example Changes the default instance for your session to the specified instance path Using the SET INSTANCE command does not connect to a database The default instance is used for commands when no instance is specified Any commands preceding the first use of SET INSTANCE communicate with the default instance To reset the instance to the default value for your operating system you can either enter SET INSTANCE with no instance_path or SET INSTANCE LOCAL Note you can only change the instance when you are not currently connected to any instance That is you must first make sure that you have disconnected from the current instance then set or change the instance and reconnect to an instance in order for the new setting to be enabled This command may only be issued when Oracle Net is running You can use any valid Oracle Net connect identifier as the specified instance path See your operating system specific Oracle Database documentation for a complete description of how your operating system specifies Oracle Net connect identifiers The maximum length of the instance path is 64 characters To set the default instance to PROD1 enter DISCONNECT SET INSTANCE PROD1
355. n the infinity sign replaces the value Likewise if a negative value is extremely small and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number then the negative infinity sign replaces the value SQL Plus Command Reference 12 29 COLUMN HEA DING text Defines a column heading If you do not use a HEADING clause the column s heading defaults to column or expr If text contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single or double quotes Each occurrence of the HEADSEP character by default begins a new line For example COLUMN LAST NAME HEADING Employee Name would produce a two line column heading See SET HEADS EP c ON OFF on page 12 122 for information on changing the HEADSEP character JUS TIFY L EFT CIENTER R IGHT Aligns the heading If you do not use a JUSTIFY clause headings for NUMBER columns default to RIGHT and headings for other column types default to LEFT LIKE expr alias Copies the display attributes of another column or expression whose attributes you have already defined with another COLUMN command LIKE copies only attributes not defined by another clause in the current COLUMN command NEWLINE Starts a new line before displaying the column s value NEWLINE has the same effect as FOLD_BEFORE NEWL INE does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode unless PREFORMAT is SET ON NEW_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value
356. n upper limit of 32k bytes The length semantics are determined by the length qualifiers CHAR or BYTE and if not explicitly stated the value of the NLS_ LENGTH_SEMANTICS environment variable is applied to the bind variable Explicitly stating the length semantics at variable definition stage will always take precedence over the NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS setting Note By default the maximum VARCHAR length is 4000 bytes Attempting to use a maximum length greater than 4000 bytes raises ORA 01460 unimplemented or unreasonable conversion requested To enable 32k maximum length you must add the MAX_STRING_ SIZE extended parameter to your init ora file NVARCHAR2 n Creates a variable of type NVARCHAR2 with length of up to n characters The maximum that n can be is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen national character set with an upper limit of 32k bytes see note The only exception to this is when a SQL Plus session is connected to a pre Oracle9i server or the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable is set to a version less than 9 0 0 In this case the length n can be in bytes or characters depending on the chosen national character set with the upper limit of 32k bytes still retained Note By default the maximum NVARCHAR length is 4000 bytes Attempting to use a maximum length greater than 4000 bytes raises ORA 01460 unimplemented or unreasonable conversion requested To
357. name for SET ERRORLOGGING ON TABLE Cause Either no table name was entered or an invalid table or schema name was entered with the SET ERRORLOGGING ON TABLE command The table name is assumed to be in the current schema unless another schema is specified with the syntax schema table Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON TABLE command with a valid table name SP2 1512 Unable to set table_name as table name for SET ERRORLOGGING ON 13 32 SQL Plus User TABLE Cause Either no table name was entered or an invalid table or schema name was entered with the SET ERRORLOGGING ON TABLE command The table name is assumed to be in the current schema unless another schema is specified with the syntax schema table s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON TABLE command with a valid table name SP2 1513 Invalid file name file_name for SET ERRORLOGGING ON FILE Cause Either no file name was entered or an invalid file name or path was entered with the SET ERRORLOGGING ON FILE command Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON FILE command with a valid file name and path SP2 1514 Invalid identifier identifier for SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER Cause Either no identifier string was entered or an invalid identifier string was entered with the SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER command The identifier string cannot contain special characters Action Reenter the SET ERRORLOGGING ON IDENTIFIER
358. nce To view information about an invisible column with the DESCRIBE command Create a table with an invisible column create table test_invisible_cols emp_id number emp_info char 20 emp_acc_no number invisible Table created Use the DESCRIBE command to list the table columns describe test_invisible_cols EMP_INFO CHAR 20 Note that with the default SET COLINVISIBLE OFF the invisible column does not appear in the result Change the default setting of SET COLINVISIBLE to ON SET COLINVISIBLE ON colinvisible ON Now use the DESCRIBE command again to list the table columns The invisible column now appears in the output describe test_invisible_cols EMP_ID NUMBER EMP_INFO CHAR 20 EMP_ACC_NO INVISIBLE NUMBER 12 100 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET COLSEP text Example Sets the column separator character printed between columns in output If the COLSEP variable contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single quotes The default value for text is a single space In multi line rows the column separator does not print between columns that begin on different lines The column separator does not appear on blank lines produced by BREAK SKIP n and does not overwrite the record separator See SET RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF on page 12 137 for more information To set the column separator to enter S S S F
359. nction or procedure DISCONNECT on Commits pending changes to the database and logs the page 12 56 current user off Oracle Database but does not exit SQL Plus 12 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description EDIT on Invokes an operating system text editor on the contents of page 12 57 the specified file or on the contents of the buffer EXECUTE on Executes a single PL SQL statement page 12 59 EXIT on Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating page 12 60 system GET on Loads a operating system file into the buffer page 12 62 HELP on Accesses the SOL Plus command line help system page 12 63 HOST on Executes an operating system command without leaving page 12 64 SQL Plus INPUT on Adds one or more new lines after the current line in the page 12 65 buffer LIST on Lists one or more lines of the buffer page 12 67 PASSWORD on Enables a password to be changed without echoing the page 12 69 password on an input device PAUSE on Displays the specified text then waits for the user to press page 12 70 Return PRINT on Displays the current value of a bind variable page 12 71 PROMPT on Sends the specified message to the user s screen page 12 72 QUIT on Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating page 12 60 system QUIT is identical to EXIT RECOVER on Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or page 12 73 more datafiles or the entire d
360. nd opens the database even when recovery fails To start a CDB or non CDB instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database and open the database enter STARTUP or enter 12 182 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP STARTUP OPEN database To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database and open the database enter STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT MOUNT To start an instance using the parameter file TESTPARM without mounting the database enter STARTUP PFILE testparm NOMOUNT To shutdown a particular database immediately restart and open it allow access only to users with the RESTRICTED SESSION privilege and use the parameter file MYINIT ORA enter STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT PFILE myinit ora OPEN database To startup an instance and mount but not open a database enter CONNECT as SYSDBA Connected to an idle instance STARTUP MOUNT ORACLE instance started Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes To startup a PDB from a PDB container enter the following sequence CONNECT SYS lt password gt CDB1_PDB1 AS SYSDBA Connected SHOW CON_NAME CON_NAME CDB1_PDB1 SHOW PDBS CON_ID CON_NAME OPEN MODE RESTRICTED 3 CDB1_PDB1 MOUNTED STARTUP Pluggable Database opened SQL Plus Command Reference 12 183 ST
361. nd to begin writing HMTL output to it SET MARKUP has the same options and behavior as SOLPLUS MARKUP See MARKUP Options on page 3 7 for detailed information For examples of usage see SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF on page 12 129 and Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus on page 7 1 Use the SHOW MARKUP command to view the status of MARKUP options The following is a script which uses the SET MARKUP HTML command to enable HTML marked up text to be spooled to a specified file Note The SET MARKUP example command is laid out for readability using line continuation characters and spacing Command options are concatenated in normal entry Use your favorite text editor to enter the commands necessary to set up the HTML options and the query you want for your report SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON HEAD lt TITLE gt SQL Plus Report lt title gt lt STYLE TYPE TEXT CSS gt lt BODY background ffffc6 gt lt STYLE gt SET ECHO OFF SPOOL employee htm SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST _NAME SALARY FROM EMP DETAILS VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 SPOOL OFF SET MARKUP HTML OFF SET ECHO ON As this script contains SOL Plus commands do not attempt to run it with slash from the buffer because it will fail Save the script in your text editor and use START to execute it START employee sql As well as writing the
362. nds or PL SQL blocks If the START command is disabled see Disabling SOL Plus SOL and PL SQL Commands on page 9 3 this will also disable the command See START on page 12 178 for information on the START command SOL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued If you require a semicolon in your command add a second SQL Plus Command Reference 12 5 at sign SOLTERMINATOR See SET SQLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 12 152 for more information Examples To run a script named PRINTRPT with the extension SQL enter PRINTRPT To run a script named WKRPT with the extension QRY enter WKRPT QRY You can run a script named YEAREND specified by a URL and pass values to variables referenced in YEAREND in the usual way HTTP machine_name domain port YEAREND SQL VAL1 VAL2 FTP machine_name domain port YEAREND SQL VAL1 VAL2 On a web server configured to serve SQL reports you could request SOL Plus to execute a dynamic script with HTTP machine_name domain port SCRIPTSERVER ENDOFYEAR VAL1 VAL2 12 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference double at sign double at sign Syntax Terms Usage url file_namef ex arg Runs a script This command is almost identical to the at sign command When running nested scripts it looks for nested scripts in the same path or url as the calling script The command functi
363. ne or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0840 Type altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0841 Type Body created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type body has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0842 Type Body altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type body has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0843 Library created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL library has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0844 Library altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL library has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0845 Java created with compilation error Cause The PL SQL java has been created but has one or more error messages 13 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warn
364. necessary before you can run SQL Plus a Install Oracle Database or Oracle Client See the Oracle Database Installation Guide for your operating system available at http www oracle com technetwork Obtain an Oracle Database login username and password during installation or from your Database Administrator See Login Username and Password a Ensure a sample database is installed and that you have a login username and password for it during Oracle Database installation See Sample Schemas and SQL Plus a Create a default database during installation or obtain the connection identifier for the Oracle Database you want to connect to from your Database Administrator See Connecting to a Database a Ensure the database you want to connect to is started See the STARTUP command SQL Plus Date Format The default date format in SOL Plus is determined by the database NLS_DATE_ FORMAT parameter and may use a date format displaying two digit years You can use the SOL TO_CHAR function or the SOL Plus COLUMN FORMAT command in your SELECT statements to control the way dates are displayed in your report Starting SQL Plus Command line The SOL Plus executable is usually installed in 0RACLE_HOME bin which is usually included in your operating system PATH environment variable You may need to change directory to the ORACLE_HOME bin directory to start SOL Plus In the following examples you are prompted to enter the database account passwo
365. nefit comes from tuning SOL queries executed in a script This is done with tools like SOL Plus s AUTOTRACE command It involves restructuring queries to make best use of the Oracle Database SQL optimizer For information about Tuning SQL statements see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide The performance gains made by tuning SQL Plus specific commands are smaller but could be important for some applications The following system variables and commands can influence SOL Plus performance COLUMN NOPRINT COLUMN NOPRINT turns off screen output and printing of the column heading and all values selected for the column It is better to remove an unneeded column from a SELECT then it is to use COLUMN NOPRINT to stop it displaying Removing the column from the query means the SQL engine does not need to process it or need to transfer the column data back to SOL Plus SET APPINFO OFF Sets automatic registering of scripts through the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package Setting APPINFO OFF prevents administrators monitoring the performance and resource usage of scripts If many SQL scripts are being called then turning APPINFO OFF stops internal SQL Plus calls to the database DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package SET ARRAYSIZE Sets the number of rows that SOL Plus will fetch from the database at one time Valid values are 1 to 5000 The effectiveness of setting ARRAYSIZE depends on how well Oracle Database fills network packets and your netwo
366. ng on a new page 12 109 title 12 187 C 2 RESTRICT 3 11 9 6 12 181 return code specifying 5 11 12 60 12 199 REVOKE command 9 1 disabling 9 3 RIGHT clause 6 20 12 84 12 188 roles 9 5 disabling 9 5 re enabling 9 6 ROLLBACK clause 12 60 WHENEVER OSERROR 12 198 WHENEVER SQLERROR 12 199 ROLLBACK command disabling 9 3 ROWID column definition from DESCRIBE 12 50 rows performing computations on 6 12 12 34 setting number retrieved at one time 8 8 12 89 12 93 setting the number after which COPY commits 12 103 RUN command 12 86 executing current PL SQL block 4 5 making last line current 5 4 similar to slash command 12 86 S sample schemas xiv 0 xxiii see Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide 0 xxiii using HR in COLUMN example 12 32 using HR in examples 5 1 6 1 sample tables access to O xxiii creating 0 xxiv removing 0 xxiv unlocking 0 xxiii SAVE command 12 87 APPEND clause 12 87 CREATE clause 12 87 REPLACE clause 12 87 Index 12 storing commands in scripts 12 87 using with INPUT to create scripts 5 2 SAVEPOINT command disabling 9 4 saving environment attributes 12 185 SCAN variable C 1 C 4 schemas command 13 10 database 8 2 DESCRIBE parameter 12 50 disabled commands 13 14 HR sample 0 xxiii installing own copy of HR 0 xxiii sample xiv SHOW parameter 12 168 12 169 unlocking HR 0 xxiii using HR in COLUMN example 12 32 using HR in examples 5 1 6 1 SCR
367. nge of lines m to n DEL n none deletes the current line through line n INPUT I adds one or more lines INPUT text I text adds a line consisting of text LIST or L lists all lines in the SQL buffer LIST n Lnorn lists line n LIST L lists the current line LIST n Ln lists line n through the current line LIST LAST L LAST lists the last line LIST mn Lmn lists a range of lines m to n LIST n L n lists the current line through line n These are useful if you want to correct or modify a command you have entered Listing the Buffer Contents The SQL buffer contains the last SQL or PL SQL command Any editing command other than LIST and DEL affects only a single line in the buffer This line is called the current line It is marked with an asterisk when you list the current command or block Example 5 2 Listing the Buffer Contents Suppose you want to list the current command Use the LIST command as shown If you have exited SQL Plus or entered another SQL command or PL SQL block since following the steps in Example 4 3 Entering a SOL Command perform the steps in that example again before continuing LIST SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Notice that the semicolon you entered at the end of the SELECT command is not listed This semicolon is necessary to indicate the end of the command when you enter Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 3 Editing S
368. ning SQL Plus This chapter provides information about how to tune SQL Plus for better performance It discusses the following topics a Tracing Statements Collecting Timing Statistics Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries Execution Plan Output in Earlier Databases SQL Plus Script Tuning For information about tuning Oracle Database see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide Tracing Statements You can automatically get a report on the execution path used by the SQL optimizer and the statement execution statistics The report is generated after successful SQL DML that is SELECT DELETE UPDATE and INSERT statements It is useful for monitoring and tuning the performance of these statements SQL Plus report output may differ for DML if dynamic sampling is in effect Controlling the Autotrace Report You can control the report by setting the AUTOTRACE system variable Autotrace Setting Result SET AU SET AU SET AU TOTRACE OFF TOTRACE ON EXPLAIN TOTRACE ON STATISTICS SET AU SET AU TOTRACE ON TOTRACE TRACEONLY No AUTOTRACE report is generated This is the default The AUTOTRACE report shows only the optimizer execution path The AUTOTRACE report shows only the SQL statement execution statistics The AUTOTRACE report includes both the optimizer execution path and the SOL statement execution statistics Like SET AUTOTRACE ON but suppresses the pri
369. nnections The Site Profile script installed during installation is an empty script The Site Profile script is generally named glogin sql SQL Plus executes this script whenever a user starts a SOL Plus session and successfully establishes the Oracle Database connection The Site Profile enables the DBA to set up site wide SOL Plus environment defaults for all users of a particular SOL Plus installation Users cannot directly access the Site Profile Default Site Profile Script The Site Profile script is KORACLE_HOME sqlplus admin glogin sql in UNIX and ORACLE _HOME sqlplus admin glogin sql in Windows If a Site Profile already exists at this location it is overwritten when you install SOL Plus If SOL Plus is removed the Site Profile script is deleted User Profile For SQL Plus command line connections SQL Plus also supports a User Profile script The User Profile is executed after the Site Profile and is intended to allow users to specifically customize their session The User Profile script is generally named login sql SQL Plus searches for the User Profile in your current directory and then the directories you specify with the SOLPATH environment variable SOL Plus searches this colon separated list of directories and their subdirectories in the order they are listed You can add any SQL commands PL SQL blocks or SOL Plus commands to your user profile When you start SOL Plus it automatically searches for your user profile
370. no clauses or to list all lines The last line listed becomes the new current line marked by an asterisk To list the contents of the buffer enter LIST or enter 1 1 SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SH_CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID The asterisk indicates that line 4 is the current line To list the second line only enter LIST 2 The second line is displayed 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SQL Plus Command Reference 12 67 LIST To list from the current line now line 2 to the last line enter LIST LAST You will then see this 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SH_CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID 12 68 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PASSWORD PASSWORD Syntax PASSW ORD username where username specifies the user If omitted username defaults to the current user Enables you to change a password without echoing it on an input device Usage To change the password of another user you must have been granted the appropriate privilege See CONNECT on page 12 39 for more information about changing your password Examples If you want to change your current password enter PASSWORD Changing password for your_password Old password your_password New password new_password Retype new password new_ password Password changed If you are logged on as a DBA and want to change the password for user johnw c
371. not fit on one line because of the PL SQL statement use the SQL Plus continuation character a hyphen The length of the command and the PL SQL statement cannot exceed the length defined by SET LINESIZE You can suppress printing of the message PL SQL procedure successfully completed with SET FEEDBACK OFF If the variable n has been defined with VARIABLE n NUMBER The following EXECUTE command assigns a value to the bind variable n EXECUTE n 1 PL SQL procedure successfully completed For information on how to create a bind variable see the VARIABLE command on page 12 191 SQL Plus Command Reference 12 59 EXIT EXIT Syntax Terms Usage EXIT QUIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK Commits or rolls back all pending changes logs out of Oracle Database terminates SOL Plus and returns control to the operating system EXIT QUIT Can be used interchangeably QUIT is a synonym for EXIT SUCCESS Exits normally FAILURE Exits with a return code indicating failure WARNING Exits with a return code indicating warning COMMIT Saves pending changes to the database before exiting n Represents an integer you specify as the return code variable Represents a user defined or system variable but not a bind variable such as SQL SQLCODE EXIT variable exits with the value of variable as the return code BindVariable Represents a va
372. nt Chente eia sea dalla seas a aei TE sacaba ti D 1 Installing SOL Plus Instant Client by Downloading from OTN oonncncccnnnnonicinnnonanononinnnnacncncnnnno D 2 Installing SQL Plus Instant Client from Linux RPM Packages ccc ccc cerns eeeeeeees D 2 Installing SQL Plus Instant Client from the UNIX or Windows Zip Files ce D 2 List of Files Required for SOL Plus Instant Client 0 ccc cece ceceeeeeseseseneneneseseneeees D 3 Installing SOL Plus Instant Client from the 12c Client Release Media 0 eee D 3 Installing SQL Plus Instant Client on UNIX or Linux ccc ccc cesses sete cenenenenesenenenes D 4 Installing SQL Plus Instant Client on Wind OWS ococccoccccnnnnaconanonononanonononononononononconannoncnrncnnarnrnnns D 4 Configuring SOL Plus Instant Client ooonnonicicinnnnnnnnonanononoconananonononananonononcnnonannonon cono nnrn coro cara rncncncnn ns D 4 Configuring SOL Plus Instant Client on Linux from RPMS ooononcncicnnnoninnnnnncninnnnorncncnronorinninnos D 4 Configuring SOL Plus Instant Client on Linux from Client Media or Zip File and UNIX D 5 Configuring SOL Plus Instant Client on Windows cocicicicinnnnnoninnonnnnninnonoronnncancoronoroncianorancanianos D 5 Connecting to a Database with SOL Plus Instant Client oonnnoninnnnnnnnicnnoninnnnncnnnonacanancnnaracncncnnono D 6 AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER Connections with SOL Plus Instant Client ooononnnnnnnnnn D 7 Uninstalling Instant Client uo aii
373. nt Columns To print the total of salaries and commissions for all sales people first enter the following COMPUTE command COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY COMMISSION_PCT ON REPORT You do not have to enter a BREAK command the BREAK you entered in Example 6 14 Computing and Printing a Grand Total is still in effect Now change the first line of the select query to include COMMISSION_PCT 1 1 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY APPEND COMMISSION_PCT Finally run the revised query to see the results LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 3 Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 sum 61000 1 5 You can also print multiple summary lines on the same break column To do so include the function for each summary line in the COMPUTE command as follows COMPUTE function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column If you include multiple columns after OF and before ON COMPUTE calculates and prints values for each column you specify Example 6 16 Computing Multiple Summary Lines on the Same Break Column To compute the average and sum of salaries for the sales department first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID 6 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions COMPUTE AVG SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID Now enter and run the following query SELEC
374. nting of the user s query output if any If STATISTICS is enabled query data is still fetched but not printed Tuning SQL Plus 8 1 Tracing Statements To use this feature you must create a PLAN_TABLE table in your schema and then have the PLUSTRACE role granted to you DBA privileges are required to grant the PLUSTRACE role For information on how to grant a role and how to create the PLAN_TABLE table see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference For more information about the roles and the PLAN_TABLE see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference and the AUTOTRACE variable of the SET command on page 12 88 Note SQL Plus AUTOTRACE does not support switching containers with the ALTER SESSION SET CONTAINER option Statistical data gathered in this case may be inconsistent Example 8 1 Creating a PLAN_TABLE Run the following commands from your SQL Plus session to create the PLAN_TABLE in the HR schema CONNECT HR SORACLE_HOME rdbms admin utlxplan sql Table created Example 8 2 Creating the PLUSTRACE Role Run the following commands from your SQL Plus session to create the PLUSTRACE role and grant it to the DBA CONNECT AS SYSDBA SORACLE_HOME sqlplus admin plustrce sql drop role plustrace Role dropped create role plustrace Role created grant plustrace to dba with admin option Grant succeeded Example 8 3 Granting the PLUSTRACE Role Run the following commands from your SQL
375. o continue and take no action when an operating system error occurs If you do not enter the WHENEVER SQLERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when a SQL error occurs If a failure occurs when reading from the output file the commands in the following script cause SQL Plus to exit and COMMIT any pending changes WHENEVER OSERROR EXIT START no_such_file OS Message No such file or directory Disconnected from Oracle 12 198 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER SQLERROR WHENEVER SQLERROR Syntax Terms Usage Examples WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable Bind Variable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Performs the specified action exits SQL Plus by default if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to perform the specified action as soon as it detects a SQL command or PL SQL block error but after printing the error message SOL Plus will not exit on a SOL Plus error EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n I variable BindVariable Directs SOL Plus to exit as soon as it detects a SOL command or PL SQL block error but after printing the error message SOL Plus will not exit on a SQL Plus error The EXIT clause of WHENEVER SOLERROR follows the same syntax as the EXIT command See EXIT on page 12 60 for
376. ogin credentials in the client wallet See Also Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about configuring your client to use secure external password store and for information about managing credentials in it Expired Password In the command line interface if your password has expired SOL Plus prompts you to change it when you attempt to log in You are logged in once you successfully change your password Changing your Password In the command line interface you can change your password with the PASSWORD command See PASSWORD on page 12 69 Connecting to a Database You must connect to an Oracle Database instance before you can query or modify data in that database You can connect to the default database and to other databases accessible through your network To connect to another database over a network both databases must have Oracle Net configured and have compatible network drivers 3 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Connecting to a Database You must enter either a connection identifier or a net service name to connect to a database other than the default The connection identifier or net service name is entered as an argument to the SOLPLUS Program Syntax when starting a command line session as an argument to the CONNECT command from a current session For detailed usage see Accessing a Container in a CDB in the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide Net Service Name Your DBA is
377. ol file after printing Example 6 26 Sending Query Results to a Printer To generate a final report and spool and print the results create a script named EMPRPT containing the following commands First use EDIT to create the script with your operating system text editor EDIT EMPRPT Next enter the following commands into the file using your text editor SPOOL TEMP CLEAR COLUMNS CLEAR BREAKS CLEAR COMPUTES COLUMN DEPARTMENT_ID HEADING DEPARTMENT COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP 1 ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON REPORT Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 27 Storing and Printing Query Results SET PAGESIZE 24 SET NEWPAGE 0 SET LINESIZE 70 TTITLE CENTER A CME WIDGET SKIP 2 LEFT EMPLOYEE REPORT RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP 2 BTITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID SPOOL OFF If you do not want to see the output on your screen you can also add SET TERMOUT OFF to the beginning of the file and SET TERMOUT ON to the end of the file Save and close the file in your text editor you will automatically return to SOL Plus Now run the script EMPRPT EMPRPT SQL Plus displays the output on your screen unless you set TERMOUT to OFF and spools
378. old 3 WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 new 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14 000 0 40 Partners 13 500 0 30 Errazuriz 12 000 0 30 Cambrault 11 000 0 30 Zlotkey 10 500 0 20 You can use many parameters in a script Within a script you can refer to each parameter many times and you can include the parameters in any order While you cannot use parameters when you run a command with RUN or slash you could use substitution variables instead Before continuing return the columns to their original heading by entering the following command CLEAR COLUMN 5 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Communicating with the User Communicating with the User Three SOL Plus commands PROMPT ACCEPT and PAUSE help you communicate with the end user These commands enable you to send messages to the screen and receive input from the user including a simple Return You can also use PROMPT and ACCEPT to customize the prompts for values SQL Plus automatically generates for substitution variables Receiving a Substitution Variable Value Through PROMPT and ACCEPT you can send messages to the end user and receive values from end user input PROMPT displays a message you specify on screen to give directions or information to the user ACCEPT prompts the user for a value and stores it in the substitution variable you specify Use PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT when a prompt spans more than one line
379. ollowing command DEFINE _EDITOR vi You can include an editor definition in your user or site profile so that it is always enabled when you start SQL Plus See SOL Plus Configuration on page 2 3 the DEFINE command on page 12 43 and the EDIT command on page 12 57 for more information To create a script with a text editor enter EDIT followed by the name of the file to edit or create for example EDIT SALES EDIT adds the filename extension SQL to the name unless you specify the file extension When you save the script with the text editor it is saved back into the same file EDIT lets you create or modify scripts You must include a semicolon at the end of each SQL command and a slash ona line by itself after each PL SQL block in the file You can include multiple SQL commands and PL SQL blocks in a script Example 5 1 Using a System Editor to Write a SQL Script Suppose you have composed a query to display a list of salespeople and their commissions You plan to run it once a month to keep track of how well each employee is doing To compose and save the query using your system editor invoke your editor and create a file to hold your script EDIT SALES Enter each of the following lines in your editor Do not forget to include the semicolon at the end of the SOL statement COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90
380. ollowing message SQL Plus Basics 4 9 Interpreting Error Messages COMMIT COMPLETE When the autocommit feature is turned on you cannot roll back changes to the database To commit changes to the database after a number of SQL DML commands for example 10 enter SET AUTOCOMMIT 10 SOL Plus counts SOL DML commands as they are executed and commits the changes after each 10th SQL DML command Note For this feature a PL SQL block is regarded as one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it To turn the autocommit feature off again enter the following command SET AUTOCOMMIT OFF To confirm that AUTOCOMMIT is now set to OFF enter the following SHOW command SHOW AUTOCOMMIT AUTOCOMMIT OFF See SET AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE nj on page 12 94 for more information Interpreting Error Messages If SQL Plus detects an error in a command it displays an error message See Chapter 13 SQL Plus Error Messages for a list of SOL Plus error messages Example 4 6 Interpreting an Error Message If you attempt to execute a file that does not exist or is unavailable by entering START EMPLYYES SQL An error message indicates that the table does not exist SP2 0310 unable to open file emplyyes sql You will often be able to figure out how to correct the problem from the message alone If you need further explanation take one of the following steps to de
381. om SQL commands or PL SQL blocks You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can just press Return or click Execute There is no need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon Continuing a Long SQL Plus Command on Additional Lines You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the hyphen SOL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line For example COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 999 HEADING MONTHLY SALARY Since SQL Plus identifies the hyphen as a continuation character entering a hyphen within a SQL statement is ignored by SQL Plus SQL Plus does not identify the statement as a SQL statement until after the input processing has joined the lines together and removed the hyphen For example entering the following SELECT 200 SQL Plus Basics 4 7 System Variables that Affect How Commands Run 100 FROM DUAL returns the error SELECT 200 100 FROM DUAL ERROR at line 1 ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected To ensure that the statement is interpreted correctly reposition the hyphen from the end of the first line to the beginning of the second line System Variables that Affect How Commands Run The SOL Plus SET command controls many variables called SET variables or system variables which affect the wa
382. om a script myfile sql which contains the following VARIABLE U REFCURSOR BEGIN OPEN U FOR SELECT FROM DEPT END SET System Variable Summary SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE SSS SET GARBAGE SELECT FROM GARBAGE Enter the following SET ERRORLOGGING ON MYFILE which produces the following output open u for select from dept ERROR at line 2 ORA 6550 line 2 column 29 PLS 00201 ORA 00942 ORA 6550 line 2 column 16 PL SQL SQL Statement ignored ERROR ORA 00907 missing right parenthesis SP2 0158 unknown SET option garbage garbage ERROR at line 3 ORA 00942 table or view does not exist table or view does not exist To view the errror log written to the default error log table SPERRORLOG enter SELECT TIMESTAMP USERNAME SCRIPT FROM SPERRORLOG which produces the following output IDENTIFIER STATEMENT MESSAGE TIMESTAM STATEMEN P USERNAME SCRIPT IDENTIFIER T MESSAGE Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for ORA 06550 line 2 21 30 03 2006 select from column 27 dept Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for PL SQL ORA 00942 21 30 05 2006 select from table or view does dept not exist Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for ORA 06550 line 2 21 30 05 2006 select from column 13 dept Mon May 08 SYSTEM d myfile sql open u for PL SQL SQL 21 30 05 2006 select from Statement ignored dept SQL Plus Co
383. ommands and the banner normally displayed when you start SOL Plus If you omit username or password SOL Plus prompts for them but the prompts are not visible Use SILENT to invoke SOL Plus within another program so that the use of SOL Plus is invisible to the user SILENT is a useful mode for creating reports for the web using the SOLPLUS MARKUP command inside a CGI script or operating system script The SOL Plus banner and prompts are suppressed and do not appear in reports created using the SILENT option username password Represent the username and password with which you wish to start SOL Plus and connect to Oracle Database Starting SQL Plus 3 11 SQLPLUS Program Syntax Start Warning Including your password in plain text is a security risk You can avoid this risk by omitting the password and entering it only when the system prompts for it If you omit username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts for it In silent mode username and password prompts are not visible Your username appears when you type it but not your password connect_identifier Consists of an Oracle Net connect identifier The exact syntax depends upon the Oracle Net configuration For more information refer to the Oracle Net manual or contact your DBA edition value The value for the Oracle Edition An edition enables two or more versions of an object in a database It provid
384. on Check the syntax of the SHUTDOWN command for the correct options SP2 0718 Illegal ARCHIVE LOG option Cause An invalid option was used in the ARCHIVE LOG command Action Check the syntax of the ARCHIVE LOG command for the correct options SP2 0728 Specify log lt RET gt suggested filename AUTO CANCEL Cause This is a RECOVER DATABASE command prompt prompting for the redo log files to be applied Action Enter one of the redo log file options SP2 0729 Cannot SET INSTANCE while connected to a database Cause There was a problem with the connection instance while issuing the SET INSTANCE command SQL Plus Error Messages 13 21 SQL Plus Error Messages Action Disconnect from the instance before re issuing the command SP2 0733 Invalid connect string Cause An invalid connect string was specified Action Check that the connect string is correct SP2 0734 Unknown command beginning command_name rest of line ignored Cause The command entered was invalid Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0735 Unknown command_name option beginning option_name Cause An invalid option was specified for a given command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0736 Command line overflow while substituting into line beginning string _ name Cause The maximum length of the command line was exceeded Action Reduce the length of the data
385. on Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an page 12 14 Object Type column and lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes BREAK on Specifies where and how formatting will change in a report page 12 16 or lists the current break definition BTITLE on Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each page 12 20 report page or lists the current BTITLE definition CHANGE on Changes text on the current line in the buffer page 12 22 CLEAR on Resets or erases the current clause or setting for the specified page 12 24 option such as BREAKS or COLUMNS COLUMN on Specifies display characteristics for a given column or lists page 12 26 the current display characteristics for a single column or for all columns COMPUTE on Calculates and prints summary lines using various standard page 12 34 computations on subsets of selected rows or lists all COMPUTE definitions CONNECT on Connects a given user to Oracle Database page 12 39 COPY on Copies results from a query to a table in the same or another page 12 42 database DEFINE on Specifies a substitution variable and assigns it a CHAR page 12 43 value or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables DEL on Deletes one or more lines of the buffer page 12 45 DESCRIBE on Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or page 12 50 synonym or the specifications for the specified fu
386. on or blanks variable text Defines names a substitution variable and assigns it a CHAR value Enter DEFINE followed by variable to list the value and type of variable Enter DEFINE with no clauses to list the values and types of all substitution variables Defined variables retain their values until you enter anew DEFINE command referencing the variable enteran UNDEFINE command referencing the variable a enteran ACCEPT command referencing the variable a reference the variable in the NEW_VALUE or OLD_VALUE clause of a COLUMN command and then reference the column in a SELECT command a EXIT SQL Plus Whenever you run a stored query or script SOL Plus substitutes the value of variable for each substitution variable referencing variable in the form amp variable or amp amp variable SQL Plus will not prompt you for the value of variable in this session until you UNDEFINE variable If the value of a defined variable extends over multiple lines using the SOL Plus command continuation character SOL Plus replaces each continuation character and carriage return with a space For example SQL Plus interprets DEFINE TEXT ONE TWO THREE as DEFINE TEXT ONE TWO THREE You should avoid defining variables with names that may be identical to values that you will pass to them as unexpected results can occur Ifa value supplied for a defined variable matches a variable name then the contents of the matching variable are
387. on reference in the SELECT statement by placing the expression or function reference in double quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes ON expr column alias REPORT ROW If multiple COMPUTE commands reference the same column in the ON clause only the last COMPUTE command applies To reference a SQL SELECT expression or function reference in an ON clause place the expression or function reference in quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes Enter COMPUTE without clauses to list all COMPUTE definitions In order for the computations to occur the following conditions must all be true a One or more of the expressions columns or column aliases you reference in the OF clause must also be in the SELECT command The expression column or column alias you reference in the ON clause must occur in the SELECT command and in the most recent BREAK command Ifyou reference either ROW or REPORT in the ON clause also reference ROW or REPORT in the most recent BREAK command To remove all COMPUTE definitions use the CLEAR COMPUTES command Note that if you use the NOPRINT option for the column on which the COMPUTE is being performed the COMPUTE result is also suppressed To subtotal the salary for the account manager AC_MGR and salesman SA_ MAN job classifications with a compute label of TOTAL enter BREAK ON JOB_ID SKIP 1 COMPUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SALARY ON JOB_ID SELECT JOB_ID LAS
388. onnect MYUSERNAME MYPASSWORD select EOF To run a batch SQL script hard code the username and password as the first line of the SQL script Then call the script with sqlplus myscript sql When SQL Plus is started like this it uses the first line of the script as the username passwordOconnection_identifier string Avoid storing your username and password in files or scripts If you do store your username and password in a file or script ensure that the file or script is secured from non authorized access SQL Plus Security 9 7 Program Argument Security 9 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 10 Database Administration with SQL Plus Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of the database administration tools available in SQL Plus and discusses the following topics Overview Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown a Redo Log Files a Database Recovery This chapter is intended for use by database administrators You must have database administrator privileges to use this functionality For more information on database administration see the Oracle Database Concepts manual Special operations such as starting up or shutting down a database are performed by a database administrator DBA The DBA has certain privileges that are not assigned to normal users The commands outlined in this chapter would normally be used by a DBA For more information about security and roles in S
389. ons similarly to and START url Specifies the Uniform Resource Locator of a script to run on the specified web server SOL Plus supports HTTP and FIP protocols but not HTTPS HTTP authentication in the form http username password machine_name domain is not supported in this release file_name ex Represents the nested script you wish to run If you omit ext SOL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 When you enter file_name ext from within a script SQL Plus runs file_name ext from the same directory as the script When you enter file_name ext interactively SOL Plus runs file_name ext from the current working directory or from the same url as the script from which it was called If SQL Plus does not find the file it searches a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Represent data items you wish to pass to parameters in the script If you enter one or more arguments SQL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the script The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The
390. or Messages Oracle Database error message documentation is only available in HTML If you only have access to the Oracle Database Documentation media you can browse the Oracle Database error messages by range Once you find the specific range use your browser s find in page feature to locate the specific message When connected to the Internet you can search for a specific error message using the error message search feature of the Oracle Database online documentation Conventions xiv The following text conventions are used in this document Convention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or the glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values Convention Meaning monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter XV xvi Changes in This Release for SQL Plus This preface lists changes in the SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Changes in SQL Plus Release 12 1 The following are changes in the SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference for SQL Plus Release 12 1 New Features The following features are new in this release Support for Iterative Results Implicit Results SQL Plus can now iteratively return results from a PL SQL Statement wi
391. orm calculations on store and print from query results a Examine table and object definitions xix XX Develop and run batch scripts a Perform database administration You can use SQL Plus to generate reports interactively to generate reports as batch processes and to output the results to text file to screen or to HTML file for browsing on the Internet You can generate reports dynamically using the HTML output facility of SOL Plus Who Can Use SQL Plus The SOL Plus SQL and PL SQL command languages are powerful enough to serve the needs of users with some database experience yet straightforward enough for new users who are just learning to work with the Oracle Database The SQL Plus language is easy to use For example to rename a column labeled LAST_NAME with the heading Family Name enter the command COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Family Name Similarly to list column definitions for the EMPLOYEES table enter the command DESCRIBE EMPLOYEES How Can I Learn SQL Plus There are several sources available to assist you to learn SQL Plus a Part Il of this Guide Using SOL Plus a Help for SQL Plus Command line help a Oracle Database 12c SOL Fundamentals An instructor led course run by Oracle This is a comprehensive hands on course taking the student through all aspects of using SQL Plus to access Oracle Database a More Oracle Database 12c Training To find more useful Oracle courses go to http www o
392. ottom Titles and Headers and Footers As you have already seen you can set a title to display at the top of each page of a report You can also set a title to display at the bottom of each page The TTITLE command defines the top title the BTITLE command defines the bottom title You can also set a header and footer for each report The REPHEADER command defines the report header the REPFOOTER command defines the report footer A TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER or REPFOOTER command consists of the command name followed by one or more clauses specifying a position or format and a CHAR value you wish to place in that position or give that format You can include multiple sets of clauses and CHAR values TTITLE position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value BTITLE position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value REPHEADER position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value REPFOOTER position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value For descriptions of all TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER clauses see the TTITLE command on page 12 187 and the REPHEADER command on page 12 83 Example 6 18 Placing a Top and Bottom Title on a Page To put titles at the top and bottom of each page of a report enter TTITLE CENTER ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT BTITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Now run the current query ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPARTMENT_ID L
393. ou can also use CHANGE to modify a line in the buffer that has generated an Oracle Database error SQL Plus sets the buffer s current line to the line containing the error so that you can make modifications To reenter an entire line you can type the line number followed by the new contents of the line If you specify a line number larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SOL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Examples Enter 3 so the current line of the buffer contains the following text 3 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN CLERK SA_MAN 12 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CHANGE Enter the following command CHANGE CLERK SH_CLERK The text in the buffer changes as follows 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK SA_MAN Or enter the following command CHANGE CLERK SH_CLERK The original line changes to 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK Or enter the following command CHANGE SA_MAN The original line changes to 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SA_MAN You can replace the contents of an entire line using the line number This entry 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK causes the second line of the buffer to be replaced with WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK Note th
394. owing system variables specified with the SOL Plus SET command affect substitution variables System Variable Affect on Substitution Variables SET CONCAT Defines the character that separates the name of a substitution variable or parameter from characters that immediately follow the variable or parameter by default the period SET DEFINE Defines the substitution character by default the ampersand amp and turns substitution on and off SET ESCAPE Defines an escape character you can use before the substitution character The escape character instructs SQL Plus to treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution The default escape character is a backslash SET NUMFORMAT Sets the default format for displaying numbers including numeric substitution variables SET NUMWIDTH Sets the default width for displaying numbers including numeric substitution variables SET VERIFY ON Lists each line of the script before and after substitution See SET on page 12 88 for more information about system variables Passing Parameters through the START Command You can bypass the prompts for values associated with substitution variables by passing values to parameters in a script through the START command You do this by placing an ampersand amp followed by a numeral in the script in place of a substitution variable Each time you run this script START replaces each
395. ows selected In the above example there is no need to issue a PRINT command to display the variable The following example creates some variables VARIABLE id NUMBER VARIABLE txt CHAR 20 VARIABLE myvar REFCURSOR Enter VARIABLE with no arguments to list the defined variables VARIABLE variable id datatype NUMBER variable txt datatype CHAR 20 variable myvar datatype REFCURSOR The following example lists a single variable VARIABLE txt variable txt datatype CHAR 20 The following example illustrates producing a report listing individual salaries and computing the departmental salary cost for employees who earn more than 12 000 per month VARIABLE rc REFCURSOR BEGIN OPEN rc FOR SELECT DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST _NAME SQL Plus Command Reference 12 195 VARIABLE END PL SQL procedure successfully completed SET PAGESIZE 100 FEEDBACK OFF TTITLE LEFT Departmental Salary Bill SKIP 2 COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 999 990 99 HEADING Salary COLUMN DEPARTMENT_NAME HEADING Department COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Employee COMPUTE SUM LABEL Subtotal OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_NAME COMPUTE SUM LABEL Total OF SALARY ON REPORT BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_NAME SKIP 1 ON REPORT SKIP 1 PRINT rc Departmental Salary Bill DEPARTMENT_NAME Employee Salary Executive De
396. pied from the primary database and a control file UNTIL CONSISTENT WITH CONTROLFILE Specifies that the recovery of an old standby datafile or tablespace uses the current standby database control file SQL Plus Command Reference 12 75 RECOVER PARALLEL integer SQL Plus selects a degree of parallelism equal to the number of CPUs available on all participating instances times the value of the PARALLEL_THREADS_PER_CPU initialization parameter The PARALLEL keyword overrides the RECOVERY_PARALLELISM initialization parameter For more information about the PARALLEL keyword see the Oracle Real Application Clusters Administration and Deployment Guide guide Use integer to specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Each parallel thread may use one or two parallel execution processes NOPARALLEL Specifies serial recovery processing This is the default MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE Specifies sustained standby recovery mode This mode assumes that the standby database is an active component of an overall standby database architecture A primary database actively archives its redo log files to the standby site As these archived redo logs arrive at the standby site they become available for use by a managed standby recovery operation Sustained standby recovery is restricted to media recovery For more information on the parameters of this clause see the Oracle Database Bac
397. ponse from the keyboard even if you have redirected terminal input or output to a file If a terminal is not available if for example you run the script in batch mode SOL Plus uses the redirected file After you enter a value at the prompt SOL Plus lists the line containing the substitution variable twice once before substituting the value you enter and once after substitution You can suppress this listing by setting the SET command variable VERIFY to OFF Example 5 9 Using Substitution Variables Create a script named STATS to be used to calculate a subgroup statistic the maximum value on a numeric column SELECT amp GROUP_COL MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM FROM amp TABLE GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL SAVE STATS Created file STATS Now run the script STATS STATS And respond to the prompts for values as shown Enter value for group_col JOB_ID old 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL new 1 SELECT JOB_ID Enter value for number_col SALARY old 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM new 2 MAX SALARY MAXIMUM Enter value for table EMP_DETAILS VIEW old 3 FROM amp TABLE new 3 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW Enter value for group_col JOB_ID old 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL new 4 GROUP BY JOB_ID SQL Plus displays the following output Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 13 Using Substitution Variables JOB_ID MAXIMUM AC_ACCOUNT 8300 AC_MGR 12000 AD_ASST 4400 AD_PRES 24000 AD_VP 17000 FI_AC
398. ppendixes SQL Plus Limits SOL Plus COPY Command Obsolete SOL Plus Commands SQL Plus Instant Client A SQL Plus Limits The general SQL Plus limits shown are valid for most operating systems Table A 1 SQL Plus Limits Item Limit filename length username length substitution variable name length substitution variable value length command line length LONG LINESIZE LONGCHUNKSIZE value output line size SQL or PL SQL command line size after variable substitution number of characters in a COMPUTE command label number of lines per SQL command maximum PAGESIZE total row width maximum ARRAYSIZE maximum number of nested scripts maximum page number maximum PL SOL error message size maximum ACCEPT character string length maximum number of substitution variables system dependent 30 bytes 30 bytes 240 characters 2500 characters 2 000 000 000 bytes system dependent system dependent system dependent 3 000 characters internal only 500 characters 500 assuming 80 characters per line 50 000 lines 32 767 characters 5000 rows 20 99 999 2K 240 Bytes 2048 SQL Plus Limits A 1 A 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus COPY Command This appendix discusses the following topics COPY Command Syntax Copying Data from One Database to Another Copying Data between Tables on One Database Read this chapter while sitting at your
399. pt can be run to restore the original values This is useful if you want to reset system variables after running a report that alters them You could also include the script in your User Profile script so that these system variables are set each time you start SOL Plus To store the current setting of all system variables enter STORE SET file name Enter a file name and file extension or enter only the file name to use the default extension SQL You can use the SET SUF FIX SQL text command on page 12 153 to change the default file extension Restoring the System Variables To restore the stored system variables enter START file_name If the file has the default extension as specified by the SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 12 153 command you do not need to add the period and extension to the file name You can also use the at sign or the double at sign commands to run the script Example 2 1 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables To store the current values of the SOL Plus system variables in a new script plusenv sql Configuring SQL Plus 2 5 SQL Plus Configuration STORE SET plusenv Created file plusenv Now the value of any system variable can be changed SHOW PAGESIZE PAGESIZE 24 SET PAGESIZE 60 SHOW PAGESIZE PAGESIZE 60 The original values of system variables can then be restored from the script START plusenv SHOW PAGESIZE PAGESIZE 24 Installing Command line H
400. r 12 50 PL SQL properties listed by 12 50 table properties listed by 12 50 DISABLED keyword disabling commands 9 2 disabling PL SQL commands 9 4 SQL commands 9 3 SOL Plus commands 9 3 DISASSOCIATE command disabling 9 3 DISCONNECT command 3 2 12 56 DOCUMENT command C 1 C 2 REMARK as newer version of C 2 DOCUMENT variable C 1 C 3 DROP command disabling 9 3 DUPLICATES clause 12 18 E ECHO SET command 12 107 ECHO variable 5 10 12 89 12 107 Ed on UNIX 12 46 EDIT command 5 1 12 45 12 57 creating scripts with 5 2 defining EDITOR 12 57 modifying scripts 12 57 setting default filename 12 89 12 108 EDITFILE variable 12 89 12 108 edition 3 12 12 40 in CONNECT command 12 40 in SQLPLUS command 3 12 EDITOR operating system variable 12 46 EMBEDDED variable 12 89 12 109 entities HTML 7 5 ENTMAP 3 9 ENTMAP clause 3 9 7 5 12 27 environment variables LD_LIBRARY_PATH 2 1 LOCAL 2 1 NLS_LANG 2 1 ORA_EDITION 2 2 ORA_NLS10 2 2 ORACLE HOME 2 1 ORACLE _PATH 2 2 ORACLE SID 2 2 PATH 2 2 SQL Plus 2 1 SQLPATH 2 2 TNS_ADMIN 2 2 TWO_TASK 2 2 error SOL Plus Instant Client unsupported charset D 2 error messages COPY command 13 34 interpreting 4 10 sqlplus 13 1 ERRORLOGGING variable 12 110 errors compilation errors 4 6 12 169 13 29 making line containing current 5 4 escape characters definition of 12 89 12 115 ESCAPE variable 5 17 12 89 12 115 ESCCHAR variab
401. r encountered while printing the specified variable Action Check that the specified variable is correct and try again SP2 0626 Error accessing package DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO You may need to install the Oracle Procedural option SET APPINFO requires Oracle Server Release 7 2 or later Cause This message is followed by a successful login to the Oracle Server The DBMS_APPLICATION package is used to maintain on line information about a particular application logged onto Oracle SET APPINFO could not be initialized Action This package is created during the running of the CATPROC SQL and should be available on all databases from Oracle 7 2 Check that your database is correctly installed SP2 0631 String beginning string_name is too long Maximum size is 1 characteror Maximum size is string_length characters Cause The string specified was too long Action Reduce the size of the specified string and re try the operation SP2 0640 Not connected Cause The PASSWORD command was issued when there was no connection to the Oracle instance Action Connect to the Oracle database before re issuing the PASSWORD command SP2 0641 command_name requires connection to server Cause SOL Plus was unable to execute the command because there was no connection to a database Action Connect to a database and re try the operation SP2 0642 SQL Plus internal error state error_state context error_number Unsafe to proceedor Unable to proceed
402. racle com education How to Use the SQL Plus Guide This guide provides information about SOL Plus that applies to all operating systems It also includes some Windows and UNIX specific information Some aspects of SQL Plus may differ on each operating system Operating system specific details are covered in the Oracle Database Installation Guide provided for your system Use these operating system specific guides with this SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Throughout this guide examples showing how to enter commands use a common command syntax and a common set of sample tables The tables are described in Sample Schemas and SQL Plus on page xxiii SQL Plus Command line Architecture SQL Plus command line uses a two tier model comprising a Client command line user interface a Database Oracle Database The two tiers may be on the same computer SQL Plus Client The command line user interface is the character based terminal implementation Oracle Database Oracle Database Net components provide communication between the SQL Plus Client and Oracle Database SQL Plus Prerequisites SQL Plus is a component of Oracle Database SQL Plus is installed by default when you install the Oracle Database Some aspects of Oracle Database and SQL Plus differ from one computer and operating system to another These topics are discussed in the Oracle Database Installation Guide for each operating system that SQL Plus supports What is
403. rd An example using an Easy Connection identifier to connect to the HR schema in the MYDB database running on mymachine is sqlplus hr mymachine mydomain port MYDB An example using a Net Service Name is sqlplus hr MYDB xxi xxii Net Service Names can be stored in several places including Oracle Names See the Net Services Reference Guide for more information If you want to use Net Service Names configured in a local Oracle Net tnsnames ora file then set the environment variable TNS_ADMIN to the directory containing the tnsnames ora file For example on UNIX if your tnsnames ora file is in home user1 and it defines the Net Service Name MYDB2 TNS_ADMIN home user1 export TNS_ADMIN sqlplus hr MYDB2 This example assumes the ORACLE_HOME environment variable is set and the SORACLE_HOME network admin tnsnames ora or ORACLE_ HOME network admin tnsnames ora file defines the Net Service Name MYDB3 sqlplus hr MYDB3 The TWO_TASK on UNIX or LOCAL on Windows environment variable can be set to a connection identifier This removes the need to explicitly enter the connection identifier whenever a connection is made in SQL Plus or SQL Plus Instant Client This UNIX example connects to the database known as MYDB4 TNS_ADMIN home user1 export TNS_ADMIN TWO_TASK MYDB4 export TWO_TASK sqlplus hr To start SQL Plus and connect to the default database 1 Open a UNIX or a Windows terminal and enter the SQL Plus command
404. reate a script containing several START commands each followed by the name of a script in the sequence Then run the script containing the START commands For example you could include the following START commands in a script named SALESRPT START Q1SALES START Q2SALES START Q3SALES START Q4SALES START YRENDSLS Note The command may be useful in this example See the double at sign command on page 12 7 for more information Exiting from a Script with a Return Code You can include an EXIT command in a script to return a value when the script finishes See the EXIT command on page 12 60 for more information You can include a WHENEVER SQLERROR command in a script to automatically exit SQL Plus with a return code should your script generate a SQL error Similarly you can include a WHENEVER OSERROR command to automatically exit should an operating system error occur See the WHENEVER SQLERROR command on page 12 199 and the WHENEVER OSERROR command on page 12 198 for more information Defining Substitution Variables You can define variables called substitution variables for repeated use in a single script by using the SOL Plus DEFINE command Note that you can also define substitution variables to use in titles and to save your keystrokes by defining a long string as the value for a variable with a short name Example 5 8 Defining a Substitution Variable To define a substitution variable L_NAME and give it
405. ree components each controlling a subset of the globalization features Your operating system and keyboard must be able to support the character set you have chosen You may need to install additional support software For more SQL Plus Globalization Support 11 1 Setting NLS_LANG information about NLS_LANG and software support see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide Setting up locale specific behavior on the SQL Plus client is achieved with the use of NLS parameters These parameters may be specified in a number of ways including as an initialization parameter on the server For settings that control the behavior of the server see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide NLS_LANG has the syntax NLS_LANG language _territory charset where language specifies the conventions to use for Oracle Database messages sorting order day and month names For example to receive messages in Japanese set language to JAPANESE If language is not set it defaults to AMERICAN where territory specifies the convention for default dates and for monetary and numeric formats For example to use the Japanese territory format set territory to JAPAN If territory is not set the default value is derived from the language value and so is set to AMERICA where in SOL Plus command line charset specifies the character set encoding used by SOL Plus for data processing and is generally suited to that of the users terminal Il
406. rent line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CENTER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows BOLD Prints data in bold print SOL Plus represents bold print on your terminal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operating systems SOL Plus may instruct your printer to print bold text on three consecutive lines instead of bold FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See COLUMN on page 12 26 for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SQL Plus prints NUMBER values according to the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SOL Plus prints DATE values using the default format If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPHEADER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SOL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify positioning and formatting eac
407. reports intended for web tables a PAGESIZE is the number of rows in an HTML table not the number of lines Each row may contain multiple lines The TTITLE BTITLE and column headings are repeated every PAGESIZE rows a LINESIZE may have an effect on data if wrapping is on or for very long data Depending on data size output may be generated on separate lines which a browser may interpret as a space character a TTITLE and BTITLE content is output to three line positions left center and right and the maximum line width is preset to 90 of the browser window These elements may not align with the main output as expected due to the way they are handled for web output Entity mapping in TTITLE and BTITLE is the same as the general ENTMAP setting specified in the MARKUP command Ifyou use a title in your output then SQL Plus starts a new HTML table for output rows that appear after the title Your browser may format column widths of each table differently depending on the width of data in each column a SET COLSEP RECSEP and UNDERLINE only produce output in HTML reports when PREFORMAT is ON No Login Time Option nologintime The last login time for non SYS users is displayed when you log on This feature is on by default The last login time is displayed in local time format You can use the nologintime option to disable this security feature After you login the last login information is displayed SQL Plus Release 12 1 0 1
408. riable created in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command and then referenced in PL SQL or other subprograms BindVariable exits the subprogram and returns you to SQL Plus ROLLBACK Executes a ROLLBACK statement and abandons pending changes to the database before exiting EXIT with no clauses commits and exits with a value of SUCCESS EXIT enables you to specify an operating system return code This enables you to run SQL Plus scripts in batch mode and to detect programmatically the occurrence of an unexpected event The manner of detection is operating system specific The key words SUCCESS WARNING and FAILURE represent operating system dependent values On some systems WARNING and FAILURE may be indistinguishable The range of operating system return codes is also restricted on some operating systems This limits the portability of EXIT n and EXIT variable between platforms For 12 60 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EXIT Examples example on UNIX there is only one byte of storage for return codes therefore the range for return codes is limited to zero to 255 If you make a syntax error in the EXIT options or use a non numeric variable SOL Plus performs an EXIT FAILURE COMMIT For information on exiting conditionally see the WHENEVER SQLERROR command on page 12 199 and the WHENEVER OSERROR command on page 12 198 The following example commits all uncommitted transactions and returns the error code of the last exe
409. riable_name is too long max max_name_ length Illegal variable name variable_name Cause Specified variable name exceeded the maximum name length Action Reduce the size of the symbol name and re enter SP2 0323 no room to add timing element request denied Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the TIMING command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0324 operating system timing error error_option_number request denied Cause The TIMING command failed to initialize due to a possible operating system error Action Resolve the operating system error and try again SP2 0325 no timing elements to option_name Cause There are no timers recorded to SHOW or STOP Action Check that timers were created with the TIMING command SP2 0328 no room to allocate title buffer Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the TTITLE or BTITLE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0331 SPOOL OUT disabled Cause An attempt was made to use SPOOL OUT where it is not supported Action No action possible SPOOL OUT has been disabled possibly because of lack of printing support at the operating system level SP2 0332 Cannot create spoo
410. rk latency and throughput In recent versions of 8 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Script Tuning SQL Plus and Oracle Database ARRAYSIZE may have little effect Overlarge sizes can easily take more SQL Plus memory which may decrease overall performance SET DEFINE OFF SET DEFINE OFF disables the parsing of commands to replace substitution variables with their values SET FLUSH OFF SET FLUSH OFF enables the operating system to buffer output ON disables buffering and flushes output to the screen Any benefit from setting FLUSH either ON or OFF depends on your operating system and data The gain may be marginal Use OFF only when you run a script that does not require user interaction and whose output you do not need to see until the script finishes running SET LINESIZE SET LINESIZE sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays on one line before beginning a new line Keep LINESIZE as small as possible to avoid extra memory allocations and memory copying However if LINESIZE is too small columns that cannot fit next to each other are put on separate lines This may reduce performance significantly SET LONGCHUNKSIZE SET LONGCHUNKSIZE sets the size of the increments SOL Plus uses to retrieve a BLOB BFILE CLOB LONG NCLOB or XMLType value Experiment with different sizes if LONGS or LOBs are being fetched SET PAGESIZE Sets the number of lines on each page of output Increase PAGESI
411. rname password 3 5 3 11 SQLPREFIX variable 12 91 12 150 SQLPROMPT variable 8 9 12 91 12 151 SQLTERMINATOR variable 12 64 12 91 12 144 12 152 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 12 75 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 12 75 START clause 12 186 START command 5 10 12 178 arguments 5 17 passing parameters to a script 5 17 script 5 10 12 178 similar to at sign command 5 10 12 5 12 178 similar to double at sign command 12 178 starting SOL Plus 1 1 3 5 STARTUP command 12 180 DOWNGRADE clause 12 182 FORCE clause 12 181 MOUNT clause 12 181 NOMOUNT clause 12 181 OPEN clause 12 181 PFILE clause 12 181 PLUGGABLE DATABASE clause 12 182 RECOVER clause 12 182 RESTRICT clause 12 181 specifying a database 12 181 UPGRADE clause 12 182 statistics 8 3 collecting TIMING statistics 8 5 STOP clause 12 186 stop query 4 8 STORE command 2 5 12 185 SET clause 12 185 stored functions 5 22 stored procedures creating 4 6 subkey registry 2 3 substitution variables 5 11 5 12 5 17 12 89 12 105 _EDITOR 12 46 appending characters immediately after 5 14 avoiding unnecessary prompts for value 5 14 concatenation character 12 89 12 102 DEFINE command 12 43 defining 5 11 5 14 12 43 deleting 5 12 12 190 displaying in headers and footers 12 83 displaying in titles 12 187 in ACCEPT command 5 19 12 10 listing definitions 5 11 12 43 parsing 8 9 prefixing 12 105 C 1 related system variables 5 17 restric
412. roduct v10g Configuring SQL Plus 2 1 SQL Plus Environment Variables Table 2 1 Cont Parameters or Environment Variables influencing SQL Plus Parameter or Variable Description ORA_EDITION ORA_NLS10 ORACLE PATH ORACLE_SID PATH SQLPATH TNS_ADMIN TWO_TASK Environment variable to specify the database edition to use If you specify the edition with the CONNECT or SQLPLUS command option edition value it is used instead of ORA_ EDITION If no edition is specified in either the CONNECT or SOLPLUS command option or in ORA_EDITION SQL Plus connects to the default edition When ORA_EDITION is set a subsequent STARTUP command in the session results in an ORA 38802 error To correct this you must unset ORA_EDITION then reconnect and shutdown the database then start the database again Environment variable to specify the locations of the NLS data and the user boot file in SQL Plus 10 2 The default location is SORACLE_HOME nls data In a system with both Oracle9i and 10g or a system under version upgrade you should set ORA_NLS10 for Oracle 10g and set ORA_NLS33 for 97 The default NLS location in 9i was ORACLE_ HOME common nls admin data Environment variable to specify the location of SQL scripts If SOL Plus cannot find the file in ORACLE_PATH or if ORACLE_PATH is not set it searches for the file in the current working directory Not applicable to Windows Environment variable to specify the
413. rrent date The _DATE value can be UNDEFINED or set to a fixed string with an explicit DEFINE _DATE You can re enable the default dynamic date behavior with DEFINE _DATE an empty string _DATE enables time values to be included in your SQL Plus prompt Specifies the default editor used by the EDIT command SQL Plus Command Reference 12 45 Predefined Variables _O_ VERSION _O_RELEASE _PRIVILEGE During SQL Plus installation on Windows operating systems it is set to Notepad On UNIX operating systems it is set to the value of the UNIX environment variable EDITOR if it exists otherwise it is set to Ed You can use the DEFINE command to redefine EDITOR to hold the name of your preferred text editor For example to define the editor used by EDIT to be vi enter the following command DEFINE _EDITOR vi Contains the current version of the installed Oracle Database in the form Oracle Database 12c Release 12 1 0 0 0 Production Contains the full release number of the installed Oracle Database in the form 1201000100 Contains a value indicating the privilege level of the current connection It contains one of the following values ASSYSASM ASSYSBACKUP ASSYSDBA ASSYSDG a ASSYSOPER An empty string for normal user connections or when there is no connection AS SYSASM AS SYSBACKUP AS SYSDBA AS SYSDG and AS SYSOPER are database administrator level privileges See Also Oracl
414. rs enter STARTUP OPEN sales PFILE INITSALES ORA RESTRICT where SALES is the database name specified in the DB_NAME parameter in the INITSALES ORA parameter file Pluggable Database Startup A Pluggable Database is a self contained collection of schemas and schema objects that exist inside a Consolidated Database To start a pluggable database PDB 1 Start SOL Plus with the NOLOG argument sqlplus nolog 2 Issue a CONNECT command using easy connect or a net service name to connect to the PDB 3 Issue a STARTUP command For more information about PDB startup see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide guide For more information about starting a database see the STARTUP command Database Shutdown Shutting down a database involves three steps 1 Closing the database When a database is closed all database and recovery data in the SGA are written to the datafiles and redo log files and all online datafiles are closed 2 Dismounting the database Dismounting the database disassociates the database from an instance and closes the control files of the database 3 Shutting down the instance 10 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Redo Log Files Shutting down an instance reclaims the SGA from memory and terminates the background Oracle Database processes that constitute an Oracle Database instance For more information about database shutdown see the Oracle Database Concepts guide For information
415. rt For information visit http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id info or visit http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id trs if you are hearing impaired xiii Related Documents For more information see these Oracle resources a SQL Plus Quick Reference Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference a Oracle Database SQL Language Reference a Oracle Call Interface Programmer s Guide a Oracle Database Concepts a Oracle Database Administrator s Guide a Oracle Database Backup and Recovery User s Guide a Oracle Database Advanced Application Developer s Guide a Oracle XML DB Developer s Guide Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide a Oracle Database Heterogeneous Connectivity Administrator s Guide Oracle Database Error Messages Oracle Database Upgrade Guide a Oracle Database Reference Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide a Oracle Database Net Services Administrator s Guide a Pro COBOL Programmer s Guide a Pro C C Programmer s Guide a Oracle Database installation and user s manuals for your operating system Many of the examples in this book use the sample schemas which are installed by default when you select the Basic Installation option with an Oracle Database installation See Oracle Database Sample Schemas for information on how these schemas were created and how you can use them yourself SQL Plus error message documentation is available in Chapter 13 SOL Plus Err
416. s buffering FLUSH only affects display output it does not affect spooled output Use OFF only when you run a script non interactively that is when you do not need to see output and or prompts until the script finishes running The use of FLUSH OFF may improve performance by reducing the amount of program I O 12 120 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET HEA DING ON OFF Example Controls printing of column headings in reports ON prints column headings in reports OFF suppresses column headings The SET HEADING OFF command does not affect the column width displayed it only suppresses the printing of the column header itself To suppress the display of column headings in a report enter SET HEADING OFF If you then run a SQL SELECT command SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID AC_MGR the following output results Higgins 12000 To turn the display of column headings back on enter SET HEADING ON SQL Plus Command Reference 12 121 SET HEADS EP c1 ON OFF SET HEADS EP _ cl ON OFF Defines the character used as a line break in column headings The heading separator character cannot be alphanumeric or white space You can use the heading separator character in the COLUMN command and in the old forms of BTITLE and TTITLE to divide a column heading or title onto more than one line ON or OFF turns heading separation on or off Whe
417. s only one of the sp1XX msb files For example splja msb is read if NLS_LANG is JAPANESE_JAPAN JA16EUC If NLS_LANG is not set then the default English language splus msb is used Check that the appropriate file is of non zero size and that the file permissions allow it to be read Note that msb files are binary The contents may be meaningless when viewed or printed If you are unsure which language file is being used unset NLS_LANG and run SQL Plus to verify it can read the splus msb file SP2 0751 Unable to connect to Oracle Exiting SOL Plus Cause No connection to an Oracle server could be made Action Normally occurs after other errors showing that the database is not running or that the username and password were invalid SP2 0752 Usage CIOMPATIBILITY version release update Cause An invalid option was used in the C OMPATIBILITY command option Action Check the syntax of the SQL Plus executable for the correct options SP2 0753 STARTUP with MIGRATE only valid with Oracle 9 2 or greater Cause STARTUP MIGRATE was used to try to startup an Oracle server for a release prior to 9 2 Action Check the platform specific environment to verify that you are connecting to an Oracle server that is at least release 9 2 SP2 0754 FROM clause cannot contain AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER Cause The COPY command does not support AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER connections Action Remove AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER from the FROM clause SP2 07
418. s the input format for the reply If the reply does not match the specified format ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again If an attempt is made to enter more characters than are specified by the char format an error message is given and the value must be reentered If an attempt is made to enter a greater number precision than is specified by the number format an error message is given and the value must be reentered The format element must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 See COLUMN FORMAT on page 12 26 for a complete list of format elements Oracle Database date formats such as dd mm yy are valid when the datatype is DATE DATE without a specified format defaults to the NLS_DATE_FORMAT of the current session See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide and the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for information on Oracle Database date formats DEF AULT 12 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ACCEPT Examples Sets the default value if a reply is not given The reply must be in the specified format if defined PROMPT text Displays text on screen before accepting the value of variable from the user NOPR OMPT Skips a line and waits for input without displaying a prompt HIDE Suppresses the display as you type the reply To display or reference variables use the DEFINE command See the DEFINE command on page 12 43 for more information To display the prompt Password place the reply in a CHAR
419. s title and accumulated time and to remove the timer enter TIMING STOP 12 186 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE TTITLE Syntax Terms TTI TLE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text BOLD CE NTER COL n FORMAT text LE FT R IGHT S KIP n TAB n Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page Enter TTITLE with no clauses to list its current definition The old form of TTITLE is used if only a single word or string in quotes follows the TTITLE command See TTI TLE text obsolete old form on page C 4 for a description of the old form of TTITLE These terms and clauses also apply to the BIITLE command text The title text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word ona single line variable A substitution variable or any of the following system maintained values SQL LNO the current line number SQL PNO the current page number SOL RELEASE the current Oracle Database release number SQL SQLCODE the current error code or SQL USER the current username To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the title You can format variable with the FORMAT clause SOL Plus substitution variables amp variables are expanded before TTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the TTITLE text During subsequent execu
420. s uses in commands that page 12 153 refer to scripts SET TAB ON OFF on Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal page 12 154 output SET TERMOUT ON OFF on Controls the display of output generated by commands page 12 155 executed from a script SET TIME ON OFF on Controls the display of the current time page 12 156 SET TIMING ON OFF on Controls the display of timing statistics page 12 157 SET TRIMOUT ON OFF on Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the page 12 158 end of each displayed line SET TRIMSPOOL ON OFF on Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the page 12 159 end of each spooled line SET UNDERLINE IclON OFF on Sets the character used to underline column headings in page 12 160 SQL Plus reports to c SET VERIFY ON OFF on Controls whether SOL Plus lists the text of a SOL page 12 161 statement or PL SQL command before and after SOL Plus replaces substitution variables with values SET WRAP ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus truncates the display of a page 12 162 SELECTed row if it is too long for the current line width SET XMLOPTIMIZATIONCHECK ON OFF on Specifies that only fully optimized XML queries and DML page 12 163 operations are executed Only to assist in developing and debugging not for production SET XQUERY BASEURI text on Defines the base URI to use This is useful to change the page 12 164 prefix of the file to access when writing generic XQuer
421. s with the PRINT command PRINT employee_info EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 The PRINT statement also closes the cursor To reprint the results the PL SQL block must be executed again before using PRINT Example 5 15 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Procedures A REFCURSOR bind variable is passed as a parameter to a procedure The parameter has a REF CURSOR type First define the type CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE EmpPack AS TYPE EmpInfoTyp IS REF CURSOR PROCEDURE EmpInfoRpt emp_cv IN OUT EmpInfoTyp END EmpPack Package created Next create the stored procedure containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 23 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY EmpPack AS PROCEDURE EmpInfoRpt emp_cv IN OUT EmpInfoTyp AS BEGIN OPEN emp_cv FOR SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN END END Procedure created Execute the procedure with a SQL Plus bind variable as the parameter VARIABLE cv REFCURSOR EXECUTE EmpPack EmpInfoRpt cv PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable PRINT cv EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 The procedure can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable VARIABLE pcv REFCURSOR EXECUTE EmpInfo_rpt pcv PL SQ
422. se 9 2 SP2 1502 The HTTP proxy server specified by http_proxy is not accessible Cause The HTTP proxy server used by SQL Plus cannot be accessed SOL Plus will be unable to run scripts located on a web server Action Check that the proxy setting has the correct value or unset it if no proxy is needed SQL Plus may get the proxy name from the environment variable http_ proxy or the value may be set in another way on your system Check that the given proxy server is operational Most web browsers can be configured to use a proxy Configure a browser to use the desired proxy and verify that web pages can still be loaded SP2 1503 Unable to initialize Oracle call interface Cause Indicates a library used by SQL Plus to communicate with the database failed to initialize correctly Action Check that the Oracle environment or registry entries are consistent and correct If using the SQL Plus Instant Client make sure the SQL Plus and Oracle SQL Plus Error Messages 13 31 SQL Plus Error Messages libraries are from the same release Make sure you have read access to the libraries SP2 1504 Cannot print uninitialized LOB variable SP2 SP2 Cause The specified LOB variable should be initialized before printing Action Check that the specified variable is initialized and try again 1505 Invalid COL or TAB position entered Cause The BTITLE TTITLE REPHEADER or REPFOOTER command you entered attempts to use a COL or TAB value
423. select the data with types that SOL Plus supports SP2 0685 The date entered_variable is invalid or format mismatched format Cause An invalid date was entered or does not match the format Action Enter a valid date or a date in the required format SP2 0686 Usage DESCRIBE schema object db_link Cause An invalid option was used in the DESCRIBE command Action Check the syntax of the DESCRIBE command for the correct options SP2 0692 Usage CONNIECT logon AS SYSDBA SYSOPER Where lt logon gt lt username gt lt password gt lt connect_string gt Cause An invalid option was entered for the SQL Plus CONNECT command Action Check the syntax for the CONNECT command for the correct usage SP2 0714 Invalid combination of STARTUP options Cause The specified options of the STARTUP command cannot be used simultaneously Action Check the syntax of the STARTUP command for the correct usage SP2 0715 Invalid combination of SHUTDOWN options Cause The specified options of the SHUTDOWN command cannot be used simultaneously Action Check the syntax of the SHUTDOWN command for the correct usage SP2 0716 Invalid combination of ARCHIVE LOG options Cause The specified options of the ARCHIVE LOG command cannot be used simultaneously Action Check the syntax of the ARCHIVE LOG command for the correct usage SP2 0717 Illegal SHUTDOWN option Cause An invalid option was used in the SHUTDOWN command Acti
424. separated by slashes or any other non alphanumeric character the word CHANGE or the letter C a the sequence of characters you want to change the replacement sequence of characters The CHANGE command finds the first occurrence in the current line of the character sequence to be changed and changes it to the new sequence You do not need to use the CHANGE command to re enter an entire line Example 5 4 Correcting the Error To change JO_ID to JOB_ID change the line with the CHANGE command CHANGE JO_ID JOB_ID The corrected line appears on your screen 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID FIRST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 5 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line Now that you have corrected the error you can use the RUN command to run the command again RUN SQL Plus correctly displays the query and its result 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN EMPLOYEE ID LAST NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 147 Errazuriz SA_MAN 12 000 148 Cambrault SA_MAN 11 000 149 Zlotkey SA_MAN 10 500 Note that the column SALARY retains the format you gave it in Example 4 4 Entering a SOL Plus Command If you have left SQL Plus and started again since performing Example 4 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command the column has reverted to its original format See CHANGE on page 12 22 for informatio
425. ser s Guide and Reference RECOVER Applies the specified number of archived redo logs as soon as possible after they have been archived It temporarily overrides any DELAY setting in the LOG_ARCHIVE_ DEST_n parameter on the primary database and any delay values set in an earlier SOL Plus RECOVER command or an ALTER DATABASE RECOVER command EXPIRE integer Specifies the number of minutes from the current time after which managed recovery terminates automatically NO EXPIRE Disables a previously specified EXPIRE integer option USING CURRENT LOGFILE Recovers redo from standby online logs as they are being filled without requiring them to be archived in the standby database first UNTIL CHANGE integer Processes managed recovery up to but not including the specified system change number SCN THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer Terminates managed recovery based on archivelog thread number and sequence number Managed recovery terminates when the corresponding archivelog has been applied If omitted THREAD defaults to 1 THROUGH ALL ARCHIVELOG Continues managed standby until all archivelogs have been recovered You can use this statement to override a THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer clause issued in an earlier statement If the THROUGH clause is omitted this is the default THROUGH ALL SWITCHOVER Keeps managed standby recovery running through all switchover operations THROUGH LAST SWITCHOVER Terminates man
426. ser s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0827 Procedure created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL procedure has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0828 Procedure altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL procedure has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0829 Function created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL function has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0830 Function altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL function has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0831 Package created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0832 Package altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP
427. ses the command and also stores the command in the SQL buffer See The SQL Buffer on page 4 2 for details If you mistakenly press Return before typing the semicolon SOL Plus prompts you with a line number for the next line of your command Type the semicolon and press Return again or click Execute to run the command A slash ona line by itself also tells SQL Plus that you wish to run the command Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number Type a slash and press Return again or click Execute SQL Plus executes the command and stores it in the buffer A blank line in a SQL statement or script tells SOL Plus that you have finished entering the command but do not want to run it yet Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number Note You can change the way blank lines appear and behave in SQL statements using the SET SQLBLANKLINES command For more information about changing blank line behavior see the SET command on page 12 88 To execute commands this way press Return again SQL Plus now prompts you with the SQL Plus command prompt SQL Plus does not execute the command but stores it in the SQL buffer See The SOL Buffer on page 4 2 for details If you subsequently enter another SOL command SQL Plus overwrites the previous command in the buffer Running PL SQL Blocks You can also use PL SQL subprograms
428. seseesesenens xxiii Sample Schemas anid SQL PIUS coc ido pla uk tl Metin a xxiii Running your first QUe di a aia XxiV Exiting SQL PIUS ea Ei XXV Part SQL Plus Getting Started 1 SQL Plus User Interface The Command in Screens iee a aa aea a E Eaa e ARa ai REA 1 1 Changing the Command line Font and Font Size ocicinicicicicinononcnnonnnonennononerinconnnonan anno cnononanancnonono 1 1 2 Configuring SQL Plus SQL Plus Environment Variables ccccceccssssseeseescceseessesecoeeeeesesaecaeeeceeceaeeeesecnecaeeaeesecaesaeeeeeaeeaees 2 1 SOLPATE Registi y Entry is teste tivated ach Sia Beh Hey eee ithe edits eB AAA hte ii Ros 2 3 SOL Plus Configuratio senienas anias orian EEA a Gae eaa cesses pelaa 2 3 Site Profile oia a a e aaa a onsin aaae 2 4 User Profiles ane a ee ed ei ea 2 4 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System VariableS ocococinnnncnnnnnnonnnnnccarinnncncncnnononncncncorororocncnnos 2 5 Installing Command line Help oooncncncncncnononnnninnnnnnnnnnononoronononanonononnoninno nan coni nono ronanona ron an ca nnoanananonos 2 6 Configuring Oracle Net Services i i eoe a iia 2 7 Starting SQL Plus Login Username and Password cccccccscssssssesesescseesesesescsesesesescsesesesesescscsssesescsesesssesescecsssnsnseecsees 3 1 Secure External Password HE A le a ei 3 2 EXPIDA WO iii a A A E LAIA S A 3 2 Changing your Password iioncintialin anida iii a aiae REE 3 2 Contiecting toa Database sseni ties 3 2 N
429. set You do this with the functions of the SOL Plus COMPUTE command Use the BREAK and COMPUTE commands together in the following forms BREAK ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column You can include multiple break columns and actions such as skipping lines in the BREAK command as long as the column you name after ON in the COMPUTE command also appears after ON in the BREAK command To include multiple break columns and actions in BREAK when using it in conjunction with COMPUTE use these commands in the following forms BREAK ON break_column_1 SKIP PAGE ON break_column_2 SKIP 1 COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column 6 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines ON break_column_2 The COMPUTE command has no effect without a corresponding BREAK command You can COMPUTE on NUMBER columns and in certain cases on all types of columns For more information see the COMPUTE command on page 12 34 The following table lists compute functions and their effects Table 6 1 Compute Functions Function Computes the SUM Sum of the values in the column MINIMUM Minimum value in the column MAXIMUM Maximum value in the column AVG Average of the values in the column STD Standard deviation of the values in the column VARIANCE Variance of the values in the column COUNT Number of non null values in the
430. splayed for a value of zero B B9999 Displays blanks for the integer part of a fixed point number when the integer part is zero regardless of zeros in the format model C C999 Displays the ISO currency symbol in the specified position D 99D99 Displays the decimal character to separate the integral and fractional parts of a number 12 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Table 12 1 Cont Number Formats Element Examples Description EEEE 9 999EEEE Displays value in scientific notation format must contain exactly four E s G 96999 Displays the group separator in the specified positions in the integral part of a number L L999 Displays the local currency symbol in the specified position MI 9999MI Displays a trailing minus sign after a negative value Display a trailing space after a positive value PR 9999PR Displays a negative value in lt angle brackets gt Displays a positive value with a leading and trailing space RN RN Displays uppercase Roman numerals m m Displays lowercase Roman numerals Value can be an integer between 1 and 3999 S 9999 Displays a leading minus or plus sign 9999S Displays a trailing minus or plus sign TM Displays the smallest number of decimal characters possible The default is TM9 Fixed notation is used for output up to 64 characters scientific notation for more than 64 characters Cannot precede TM with any other element TM can only be followed by a single 9 or
431. ssword files Uninstalling Instant Client The SQL Plus Instant Client package can be removed separately from the OCI Instant Client After uninstalling the SOL Plus Instant Client package the remaining OCI Instant Client libraries enable custom written OCI programs or third party database utilities to connect to a database Uninstalling SQL Plus Instant Client 1 For installations on Linux from RPM packages use rpm e only on the SQL Plus Instant Client package or For installations on UNIX and Windows and installations on Linux from the Client Release media manually remove the following SQL Plus specific files Table D 4 Instant Client Files in the SQL Plus Package UNIX Windows Description sqlplus sqlplus exe SQL Plus executable libsqlplus so not applicable SOL Plus library libsqlplusic so orasqlplusic12 dll SOL Plus data shared library 2 Reset environment variables and remove tnsnames ora if necessary Uninstalling the Complete Instant Client 1 For installations on Linux from RPM packages use rpm qa to find the SQL Plus Instant Client and Basic OCI package names and run rpm e to remove them or For installations on UNIX and Windows and installations on Linux from the Client Release media manually delete the directory containing the SQL Plus executable and Oracle libraries See Installing SOL Plus Instant Client from the 12c Client Release Media on page D 3 for a list of the files you copied to the dire
432. stantclient12_1 on Windows 3 Unzip the two packages into the new directory D 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Installing SQL Plus Instant Client from the 12c Client Release Media 4 Configure SQL Plus Instant Client See Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on page D 4 List of Files Required for SQL Plus Instant Client Tables E 1 E 2 and E 3 list the required files from each of the SQL Plus and OCI packages The files from only one of the OCI packages are required Other files installed that are not listed here can be ignored or can be removed to save disk space Table D 1 Instant Client Files in the SQL Plus Package Linux and UNIX Windows Description sqlplus sqlplus exe SQL Plus executable libsqlplus so not applicable SOL Plus library libsqlplusic so orasqlplusic12 dll SQL Plus data shared library Table D 2 Instant Client Files in the Basic OCI Package Linux and UNIX Windows Description libclntsh so 12 1 oci dll Client code library libclntshcore so not applicable OCI Instant Client data shared Library libociei so oraocieil2 dll OCI Instant Client data shared library libnnz12 so orannzsbb12 dll Security library libons so oraons dll ONS library Table D 3 Instant Client Files in the Lightweight OCI Package Linux and UNIX Windows Description libelntsh so 12 1 oci dll Client code library libociicus so oraociicus12 dll OCI Instant Client data shared library English only libnnz12 so orannzsbb12 dll
433. stitution Variables As you have seen in Example 5 12 Prompting for and Accepting Input SQL Plus automatically generates a prompt for a value when you use a substitution variable You can replace this prompt by including PROMPT and ACCEPT in the script with the query that references the substitution variable First clear the buffer with CLEAR BUFFER To create such a file enter the following INPUT PROMPT Enter a valid employee ID PROMPT For Example 145 206 ACCEPT ENUMBER NUMBER PROMPT Employee ID SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST _NAME SALARY FROM EMP DETAILS VIEW WHERE EMPLOYEE _ID amp ENUMBER Save this file as PROMPT2 Next run this script SOL Plus prompts for the value of ENUMBER using the text you specified with PROMPT and ACCEPT START PROMPT2 SOL Plus prompts you to enter an Employee ID Enter a valid employee ID For Example 145 206 Employee ID 205 old 3 WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID amp ENUMBER new 3 WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID 205 Department Report FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY Shelley Higgins 12000 What would happen if you typed characters instead of numbers Since you specified NUMBER after the variable name in the ACCEPT command SQL Plus will not accept a non numeric value Try entering characters instead of numbers to the prompt for Employee ID SQL Plus will respond with an error message and prompt you again to re enter the correct number START PROMPT2 5 20 SQL Plus Us
434. t or enter the end of file character Ctrl D on UNIX or Ctrl Z on Windows SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle Database from which you disconnected and the versions of tools available through SOL Plus before you return to the operating system prompt SQLPLUS Program Syntax 3 6 You use the SOLPLUS command at the operating system prompt to start command line SOL Plus SQLPLUS Options Logon NOLOG Start where Options has the following syntax H ELP V ERSION I C OMPATIBILITY x y z L OGON M ARKUP markup_option NOLOGINTIME R ESTRICT 1 2 3 S ILENT NOLOGINTIME and markup_option has the following syntax SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax Options HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF where Logon has the following syntax username password connect_identifier 43 AS SYSASM SYSBACKUP SYSDBA SYSDG SYSOPER SYSKM edition value where Start has the following syntax url file_name ext arg Warning Including your password in plain text is a security risk You can avoid this risk by omitting the password and entering it only when the system prompts for it You have the option of entering logon If you do not specify logon but do specify start SQL Plus assumes that the first line of the script contains a valid logon If neither start
435. t has expired you are prompted to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA You can use the DISCONNECT command to disconnect from a database without leaving SQL Plus Secure External Password Store As a command line alternative for large scale deployments where applications use password credentials to connect to databases it is possible to store such credentials in a client side Oracle wallet An Oracle wallet is a secure software container that is used to store authentication and signing credentials Storing database password credentials in a client side Oracle wallet eliminates the need to embed usernames and passwords in application code batch jobs or scripts This reduces the risk of exposing passwords in the clear in scripts and application code and simplifies maintenance because you need not change your code each time usernames and passwords change In addition not having to change application code also makes it easier to enforce password management policies for these user accounts When you configure a client to use the external password store applications can use the following syntax to connect to databases that use password authentication CONNECT database_alias Note that you need not specify database login credentials in this CONNECT statement Instead your system looks for database l
436. t recommended If disabled terminate a command line session by sending an EOF character such as Ctrl D in UNIX or Ctrl Z in Windows Otherwise terminate a session by terminating the SQL Plus process If disabled the EXIT operation in WHENEVER OSERROR and WHENEVER SQLERROR is also disabled Example 9 1 Setting Restrictions in the PUP Table This is an example of how to insert a row into the PUP table to restrict the user HR from using the SELECT statement 1 Log in as SYSTEM with the command SQLPLUS SYSTEM Insert a row into the PUP table with the command INSERT INTO PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE VALUES SQL Plus HR SELECT NULL NULL DISABLED NULL NULL Connect as HR and try to SELECT something CONNECT HR SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW This command causes the following error message 9 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating and Controlling Roles SP2 0544 Command SELECT disabled in Product User Profile 4 To delete this row and remove the restriction from the user HR CONNECT again as SYSTEM and enter DELETE FROM PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE WHERE USERID HR Creating and Controlling Roles You can use SQL commands to create and control access to roles to provide security for your database tables By creating a role and then controlling who has access to it you can ensure that only certain users have access to particular database privileges Roles are created and used with the SQL
437. tax for the DESCRIBE command was entered Action Check the syntax of the DESCRIBE command for the correct usage SP2 0561 Object does not exist Cause The specified object you tried to DESCRIBE does not exist in the database Action Retry the command with a valid object name SP2 0562 Object does not exist in package Cause The specified object you tried to DESCRIBE does not exist in the package Action Check and make sure that the object name is correct SP2 0564 Object object_name is INVALID it may not be described Cause The specified object you tried to DESCRIBE is invalid Action Re validate the object SP2 0565 Illegal identifier Cause An invalid character was used in the DESCRIBE command Action Correct the character and try again SP2 0566 Illegal sub object specification Cause Invalid sub object specification in the DESCRIBE command Action Correct the subject specification and try again SP2 0567 Illegal column specification for PL SQL object Cause A column was described within an object in the DESCRIBE command SQL Plus Error Messages 13 15 SQL Plus Error Messages Action Remove the column specification in the DESCRIBE command and try again SP2 0568 No bind variables declared Cause There are no bind variables declared Action No action required SP2 0570 Usage SET SERVEROUTPUT ON OFF SIZE n UNL IMITED FOR MAT WRA PPED WORID_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Cause An inval
438. tents of the SOL buffer with the operating system text editor If you omit the file extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command If you specify a filename SQL Plus searches for the file in the directory set by ORACLE_PATH If SQL Plus cannot find the file in ORACLE_PATH or if ORACLE_ PATH is not set it searches for the file in the current working directory If SQL Plus cannot find the file in either directory it creates a file with the specified name The substitution variable EDITOR contains the name of the text editor invoked by EDIT You can change the text editor by changing the value of EDITOR For information about changing the value of a substitution variable see DEFINE on page 12 43 EDIT attempts to run the default operating system editor if EDITOR is undefined EDIT places the contents of the SQL buffer in a file named AFIEDT BUF by default in your current working directory and runs the text editor on the contents of the file If the file AFIEDT BUF already exists it is overwritten with the contents of the buffer You can change the default filename by using the SET EDITFILE command For more information about setting a default filename for the EDIT command see the EDITFILE variable of the SET command Note The default file AFIEDT BUF may have a different name on some operating systems
439. tents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension SOL enter SAVE DEPTSALRPT To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension OLD enter SAVE DEPTSALRPT OLD SQL Plus Command Reference 12 87 SET SET Syntax Usage Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment settings for your current session for example to customize HTML formatting enable or disable the printing of column headings set the number of lines per page set the display width for data SET system_variable value where system_variable and value represent one of the clauses shown in the SET System Variable Summary on page 12 89 table following SQL Plus maintains system variables also called SET command variables to enable you to set up a particular environment for a SOL Plus session You can change these system variables with the SET command and list them with the SHOW command SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION are SQL commands see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for more information When not followed by the keywords TRANSACTION or ROLE SET is assumed to be a SOL Plus command 12 88 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET APPINFO ON OFF text on Sets automatic registering of scripts through the DBMS_ page 12 92 APPLICATION_INFO package SET ARRAYSIZE 15 n on Se
440. ter the specified keyword Action Enter a column name after the specified keyword SP2 0019 invalid numeric argument to option_name option Cause An invalid numeric argument was used in the specified option Action Correct the argument and try again SP2 0020 no storage available for column_name Cause An error has occurred SQL Plus was unable to allocate memory for a BREAK command Action Allocate more memory by closing some applications SP2 0022 cannot allocate space to modify the buffer_name buffer variable Cause An internal error occurred Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0023 String not found Cause The search string specified was not found Action Check the search string to make sure that it is valid SP2 0024 Nothing to change Cause There was nothing in the SQL buffer when using the CHANGE command Action Make sure the SQL buffer is not empty before using the CHANGE command SP2 0025 Invalid change string Cause An invalid option was used in the CHANGE command Action Check the syntax of the CHANGE command for the correct options SP2 0026 No lines to delete Cause There was nothing in the SQL buffer when using the DEL command Action Make sure the SQL buffer is not empty before using the DEL command SP2 0027 Input is too long gt max_characters characters
441. termine the cause of the problem and how to correct it a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters SP2 look up the SQL Plus message in SQL Plus Error Messages on page 13 1 Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters CPY look up the SQL Plus COPY command message in COPY Command Messages on page 13 34 4 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Interpreting Error Messages a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters ORA look up the Oracle Database message in the Oracle Database Error Messages guide or in the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters PLS look up the Oracle Database message in the Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference If the error is unnumbered look up correct syntax for the command that generated the error in Chapter 12 SOL Plus Command Reference for a SOL Plus command in the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference for a SOL command or in the Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference for a PL SQL block Otherwise contact your DBA SQL Plus Basics 4 11 Interpreting Error Messages 4 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 9 Using Scripts in SQL Plus This chapter helps you learn to write and edit scripts containing SOL Plus commands SQL commands and PL SQL blocks It covers the following topics Editing Scripts Editing Scripts in SQL
442. th the action specified for the innermost break and proceeding in reverse order toward the outermost break in this case from SKIP 1 for ON SALARY toward SKIP PAGE for ON DEPARTMENT_ID SOL Plus executes each action up to and including the action specified for the first break encountered in the initial search If for example in a given row the value of JOB_ID changes but the values of DEPARTMENT_ID and SALARY remain the same SQL Plus skips two lines before printing the row one as a result of SKIP 1 ON SALARY and one as a result of SKIP 1 ON JOB_ID 12 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK Whenever you use ON column you should also use an ORDER BY clause in the SQL SELECT command Typically the columns used in the BREAK command should appear in the same order in the ORDER BY clause although all columns specified in the ORDER BY clause need not appear in the BREAK command This prevents breaks from occurring at meaningless points in the report If the BREAK command specified earlier in this section is used the following SELECT command produces meaningful results SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID SALARY LAST_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID SALARY LAST_NAME All rows with the same DEPARTMENT_ID print together on one page and within that page all rows with the same JOB_ID print in groups Within each group of jobs those jobs with the same SALARY print in groups Bre
443. the SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL option and the SQLPLUS SPOOL filename command The SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL ON option enables the writing of the lt HTML gt tag to the spool file The spool file is not created and the header and footer tags enabled by the SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL ON option are not written to the spool file until you issue the SQLPLUS SPOOL filename command See the SPOOL command on page 12 176 for more information SQL Plus writes several HTML tags to the spool file when you issue the SPOOL filename command Starting SQL Plus 3 9 SQLPLUS Program Syntax When you issue any of the SOL Plus commands EXIT SPOOL OFF or SPOOL filename SQL Plus appends the following end tags and closes the file lt BODY gt lt HTML gt You can specify lt HEAD gt tag contents and lt BODY gt attributes using the HEAD and BODY options PRE FORMAT ONIOFF PREFORMAT ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus writes output to the lt PRE gt tag or to an HTML table The default is OFF so output is written to a HTML table by default You can turn PREFORMAT ON and OFF as required during a session Note To produce report output using the HTML lt PRE gt tag you must set PREFORMAT ON For example SQLPLUS M HTML ON PREFORMAT ON or SET MARKUP HTML ON PREFORMAT ON MARKUP Usage Notes When MARKUP HTML ON PREFORMAT OFF is used commands originally intended to format paper reports have different meaning for
444. the second line DEFINE LINE3 This is the third line Then reference the variables in your TTITLE or BTITLE command as follows TTITLE CENTER LINE1 SKIP 1 CENTER LINE2 SKIP 1 CENTER LINE3 Displaying System Maintained Values in Titles You can display the current page number and other system maintained values in your title by entering a system value name as a title element for example TTITLE LEFT system maintained_value_name There are five system maintained values you can display in titles the most commonly used of which is SQL PNO the current page number See TTITLE on page 12 187 for a list of system maintained values you can display in titles Example 6 22 Displaying the Current Page Number in a Title To display the current page number at the top of each page along with the company name enter the following command TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 21 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions ACMEWIDGET PAGE 1 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Note that SQL PNO has a format ten spaces wide You can change this format with the FORMAT clause of TTITLE or BTITLE Example 6 23 Formatting a System Maintained Value in a Title To close up the space between
445. the word PAGE and the page number reenter the TTITLE command as shown TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the query ACME WIDGET PAGE 1 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions To list a page title definition enter the appropriate title command with no clauses TTITLE BTITLE To suppress a title definition enter TTITLE OFF BTITLE OFF 6 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions These commands cause SQL Plus to cease displaying titles on reports but do not clear the current definitions of the titles You may restore the current definitions by entering TTITLE ON BTITLE ON Displaying Column Values in Titles You may wish to create a master detail report that displays a changing master column value at the top of each page with the detail query results for that value underneath You can reference a column value in a top title by storing the desired value ina variable and referencing the variable in a TTITLE command Use the following form of the COLUMN command to define the variable COLUMN column_name NEW_VALUE variable_name You must include the master column in an ORDER BY clause and in a BREAK command
446. thout using a local ref cursor See Fetching Iterative Results from a SELECT inside a PL SQL Block on page 5 25 Last Login Time SOL Plus now displays the time you last logged on by default This security feature can be turned off with a SQLPLUS command option nologintime See No Login Time Option on page 3 10 Displaying Invisible Columns SOL Plus has a new SET command SET COLINVI SIBLE to allow invisible column information to be viewed with the SQL Plus DESCRIBE command This feature is intended to assist in application development and only expose new content when ready See SET COLINVI SIBLE ON OFF on page 12 100 See Oracle Database SQL Language Reference Pluggable Database Support New STARTUP command options now support pluggable databases There are three new SHOW command options to display information about pluggable databases SHOW CON_ID SHOW CON_NAME and SHOW PDBS See STARTUP on page 12 180 See SHOW on page 12 168 New Administrative Privileges xvii xviii The SQLPLUS and CONNECT commands now support the new user privileges SYSBACKUP SYSDG SYSKM and also the existing SYSASM SYSDBA SYSOPER privileges See SQLPLUS Program Syntax on page 3 6 See CONNECT on page 12 39 See Oracle Database Administrator s Guide Desupported Features Some features previously described in this document are desupported in Oracle Database 12c Release 1 12 1 See Oracle Database Upgrade Guide for a list of desupporte
447. ticular user You may want to have your own copies of the sample tables to use as you try the examples in this guide To get your own copies of the HR tables see your DBA or see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide or you can create the HR tables with the script HR_MAIN SQL which is located in the following directory on UNIX SORACLE_HOME demo schema human_resources hr_main sql xxiii And on the following directory on Windows ORACLE_HOME DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL To create the HR tables from command line SQL Plus do the following 1 Ask your DBA for your Oracle Database account username and password 2 Login to SQL Plus 3 On UNIX enter the following command at the SQL Plus prompt SQL gt DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL On Windows enter the following command at the SQL Plus prompt SQL gt DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL To remove the sample tables perform the same steps but substitute HR_DROP SQL for HR_MAIN SQL Running your first Query To describe a database object for example column details for EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter a DESCRIBE command like DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW which produces the following output EMPLOYEE_ID NOT NULL NUMBER JOB_ID NOT NULL VARCHAR2 10 MANAGER_ID NUMBERE DEPARTMENT_ID NUMBER 4 LOCATION_ID NUMBER 4 COUNTRY_ID CHAR FIRST_NAME VARCHAR2 20 LAST_NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 25 SALARY NUMBER B 2
448. tifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA or CONN ECT connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA Cause Invalid option was specified for the command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0308 cannot close spool file Cause The file is currently being used Action Release the file from the other process SP2 0309 SOL Plus command procedures may only be nested to a depth of number_of_nested_procedures Cause Maximum number of nested procedures or scripts was reached Action Reduce the number of nested procedures or scripts SP2 0310 unable to open file file_name Cause Unable to open the specified file Action Check and make sure the file name is valid SP2 0311 string expected but not found Cause SQL Plus was expecting a string at the end of the command but could not find it Action Retry the command with a valid string Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0312 missing terminating quote quote_type Cause The DESCRIBE command schema or object did not have a terminating quote Action Close the opening quotation mark with the corresponding closing quotation mark 13 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0317 expected symbol name is missing Cause SOL Plus was expecting a symbol but it was not specified Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0318 symbol name beginning va
449. tines so removing the spaces could take extra effort Deletes substitution variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command or COLUMN NEW_VAL OLD_VAL Use the UNDEFINE command to remove unnecessary substitution variables This can reduce the time taken for any operation that uses amp new_value or old_value variables 8 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 9 SQL Plus Security This chapter describes the available methods for controlling access to database tables and SQL Plus commands It covers the following topics a PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table a Disabling SOL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands Creating and Controlling Roles Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT a Program Argument Security PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table SQL Plus uses the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE PUP table a table in the SYSTEM account to provide product level security that supplements the user level security provided by the SQL GRANT and REVOKE commands and user roles DBAs can use the PUP table to disable certain SQL and SQL Plus commands in the SQL Plus environment on a per user basis SQL Plus not Oracle Database enforces this security DBAs can even restrict access to the GRANT REVOKE and SET ROLE commands to control users ability to change their database privileges SQL Plus reads restrictions from the PUP table when a user logs in to SQL Plus and maintains t
450. tings Lightweight SQL Plus Instant Client Error with Unsupported Character Set Attempting to start SQL Plus Instant Client with an unsupported character set will fail with the following error Error 5 initializing SQL Plus NLS initialization error Installing SQL Plus Instant Client by Downloading from OTN The OTN downloads for Linux are RPM packages The OTN downloads for UNIX and Windows are zip files The SOL Plus Instant Client package should never be installed on an ORACLE _ HOME Installing SQL Plus Instant Client from Linux RPM Packages 1 Download the RPM packages containing the SQL Plus Instant Client package and the OCI package from the OTN Instant Client page at http www oracle com technology tech oci instantclient insta ntclient html Both packages must be from the same version such as 12 1 0 0 0 2 Use rpm i for the initial install of the RPM packages or rpm u to upgrade to a newer version of the packages 3 Configure SQL Plus Instant Client See Configuring SQL Plus Instant Client on page D 4 Installing SQL Plus Instant Client from the UNIX or Windows Zip Files 1 Download the zip files containing the SQL Plus Instant Client package and the OCI package from the OTN Instant Client page at http www oracle com technology tech oci instantclient insta ntclient html Both packages must be from the same version such as 12 1 0 0 0 2 Create a new directory for example home instantclient12_1 on UNIX or c in
451. tion Examples To execute a UNIX operating system command Is sql enter HOST ls sql To execute a Windows operating system command dir sql enter HOST dir sql 12 64 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference INPUT INPUT Syntax Usage Examples I NPUT tex where text represents the text you wish to add Adds one or more new lines of text after the current line in the buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SOL Plus commands To add a single line enter the text of the line after the command INPUT separating the text from the command with a space To begin the line with one or more spaces enter two or more spaces between INPUT and the first non blank character of text To add several lines enter INPUT with no text INPUT prompts you for each line To leave INPUT enter a null empty line or a period If you enter a line number at the command prompt larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SOL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text then SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Assume the SQL buffer contains the following command SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW To add an ORDER BY clause to the query enter LIST 2 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW INPUT O
452. tion Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0813 View altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL view has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL view Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0814 Trigger created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL trigger has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL trigger Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0815 Trigger altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL trigger has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL trigger Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0816 Type created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0817 Type altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performanc
453. tion for each page of results the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a substitution variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a TTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for variables that are to be substituted on each page of results If you want to use a substitution variable to insert unchanging text in a TTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once OFF Turns the title off suppresses its display without affecting its definition SQL Plus Command Reference 12 187 TTITLE Usage ON Turns the title on restores its display When you define a top title SQL Plus automatically sets TTITLE to ON COL n Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Here column means print position not table column S KIP n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line TAB n Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CENTER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that
454. tions 5 17 single and double ampersands 5 14 system variables used with 5 17 undefined 5 12 where and how to use 5 12 SUFFIX variable 12 91 12 153 used with EDIT command 12 57 used with GET command 12 62 used with SAVE command 12 87 used with START command 12 178 SUM function 6 13 summary lines computing and printing 6 12 12 34 computing and printing at ends of reports 6 15 computing same type on different columns 6 16 printing grand and sub summaries totals 6 15 printing multiple on same break column 6 16 syntax COPY command B 4 syntax rules SQL commands 4 4 SQL Plus commands 4 7 SYSASM clause 3 12 12 40 SYSBACKUP clause 3 12 12 40 SYSDBA clause 3 12 12 40 SYSDG clause 3 12 12 40 SYSKM clause 3 12 12 40 SYSOPER clause 3 12 12 40 system variables 4 8 12 88 affecting SOL Plus performance 8 8 affecting substitution variables 5 17 listing current settings 4 8 12 168 listing old and new values 12 90 12 143 storing and restoring 2 5 summary of SET commands 12 89 system maintained values displaying in headers and footers 12 83 displaying in titles 6 21 12 187 formatting in titles 6 22 T TAB clause 12 84 12 188 TAB variable 8 10 12 91 12 154 TABLE clause 3 8 TABLE option 3 8 tables access to sample 0 xxiii controlling destination when copying B 2 B 5 copying values between B 3 B 7 listing column definitions 4 2 12 50 referring to another user s when copying B 6 T
455. to an equal sign and rerun the query enter the following commands SET UNDERLINE 6 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 3 Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 Now change the underline character back to a dash SET UNDERLINE Note You must enclose the dash in quotation marks otherwise SQL Plus interprets the dash as a hyphen indicating that you wish to continue the command on another line Formatting NUMBER Columns When displaying NUMBER columns you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command Later sections describe the default display and how you can alter it with the COLUMN command The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one reset the column s format with COLUMN column_name CLEAR or exit from SQL Plus Default Display A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use FORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus normally displays numbers with as many digits as are required for accuracy up to a standard display width determined by the value of the NUMWIDTH variable of the SET command normally 10 If a number is larger than the value of SET NU
456. ts On starting it outputs the HTML and BODY tags before executing any commands All subsequent output is in HTML until SOL Plus terminates The SILENT and RESTRICT command line options may be effectively used with MARKUP to suppress the display of SQL Plus prompt and banner information and to restrict the use of some commands SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON generates an HTML page for each subsequently spooled file The HTML tags in a spool file are closed when SPOOL OFF is executed or SOL Plus exits You can use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL OFF to generate HTML output suitable for embedding in an existing web page HTML output generated this way has no lt HTML gt or lt BODY gt tags Creating Reports During a SQL Plus session use the SET MARKUP command interactively to write HTML to a spool file You can view the output in a web browser SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON only specifies that SQL Plus output will be HTML encoded it does not create or begin writing to an output file You must use the SQL Plus SPOOL command to start generation of a spool file This file then has HTML tags including lt HTML gt and lt HTML gt Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 7 1 Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus When creating a HTML file it is important and convenient to specify a html or htm file extension which are standard file extensions for HTML files This enables you to easily identify the type of your output files and also ena
457. ts the number of rows called a batch that SQL Plus will page 12 93 fetch from the database at one time SET AUTOCOMMIT ON OFF IMMEDIATE n on Controls when Oracle Database commits pending changes page 12 94 to the database SET AUTOPRINT ON OFF on Sets the automatic printing of bind variables page 12 95 SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF on ON sets the RECOVER command to automatically apply page 12 96 the default filenames of archived redo log files needed SET AUTOTRACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY on EXPLAIN STATISTICS page 12 97 SET BLOCKTERMINATOR cl ON OFF on page 12 98 SET CMDSEP c ON OFF on page 12 99 SET COLINVI SIBLE ON OFF on page 12 100 SET COLSEP _ tex on page 12 101 SET CONCAT c ON OFF on page 12 102 SET COPYCOMMIT 0 n on page 12 103 SET COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF on page 12 104 SET DEFINE 4 c ON OFF on page 12 105 SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM on ON OFF INDENT ON OFF page 12 106 SET ECHO ON OFF on page 12 107 SET EDITFILE file_name exf on page 12 108 SET EMBEDDED ON OFF on page 12 109 SET ERRORLOGGING ON OFF TABLE on schema tablename TRUNCATE IDENTIFIER Pase 12 110 identifier SET ESCAPE 11 cl ON OFF on page 12 115 SET ESCCHAR I OFF on page 12 116 SET EXITCOMMIT ON OFF on page 12 117 during recovery Displays a report on the execution of successful SQL DML statements SELECT INSERT
458. tting Columns COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 3 Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 Note The new headings will remain in effect until you enter different headings reset each column s format or exit from SQL Plus To change a column heading to two or more words enclose the new heading in single or double quotation marks when you enter the COLUMN command To display a column heading on more than one line use a vertical bar where you want to begin a new line You can use a character other than a vertical bar by changing the setting of the HEADSEP variable of the SET command See the SET command on page 12 88 for more information Example 6 2 Splitting a Column Heading To give the columns SALARY and LAST_NAME the headings MONTHLY SALARY and LAST NAME respectively and to split the new headings onto two lines enter COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME Now rerun the query with the slash command LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 53 Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 Example 6 3 Setting the Underline Character To change the character used to underline headings
459. tution variables When you execute a VARIABLE BLOB BFILE CLOB or NCLOB command SOL Plus associates a LOB locator with the bind variable The LOB locator is automatically populated when you execute a SELECT clob_column INTO cv statement in a PL SQL block SQL Plus closes the LOB locator when you exit SOL Plus To free resources used by BLOB BFILE CLOB and NCLOB bind variables you may need to manually free temporary LOBs with EXECUTE DBMS_LOB FREETEMPORARY Cv All temporary LOBs are freed when you exit SQL Plus SQL Plus SET commands such as SET LONG and SET LONGCHUNKSIZE and SET LOBOFFSET may be used to control the size of the buffer while PRINTing BLOB BFILE CLOB or NCLOB bind variables SQL Plus Command Reference 12 193 VARIABLE Examples SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables may be used to reference PL SQL 2 3 or higher Cursor Variables allowing PL SQL output to be formatted by SOL Plus For more information on PL SQL Cursor Variables see your Oracle Database PL SQL Language Reference When you execute a VARIABLE REFCURSOR command SOL Plus creates a cursor bind variable The cursor is automatically opened by an OPEN FOR SELECT statement referencing the bind variable in a PL SQL block SQL Plus closes the cursor after completing a PRINT statement for that bind variable or on exit SOL Plus formatting commands such as BREAK COLUMN COMPUTE and SET may be used to format the output from PRINTing a REFCUR
460. u can display their values in SOL Plus or reference them in PL SQL subprograms that you run in SQL Plus Creating Bind Variables You create bind variables in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command For example VARIABLE ret_val NUMBER This command creates a bind variable named ret_val with a datatype of NUMBER See the VARIABLE command on page 12 191 for more information To list all bind variables created in a session type VARIABLE without any arguments Using Scripts in SQL Plus 5 21 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Referencing Bind Variables You reference bind variables in PL SQL by typing a colon followed immediately by the name of the variable For example ret_val 1 To change this bind variable in SQL Plus you must enter a PL SQL block For example BEGIN ret_val 4 END PL SQL procedure successfully completed This command assigns a value to the bind variable named ret_val Displaying Bind Variables To display the value of a bind variable in SQL Plus you use the SQL Plus PRINT command For example PRINT RET_VAL RET_VAL This command displays a bind variable named ret_val See PRINT on page 12 71 for more information about displaying bind variables Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables allow SQL Plus to fetch and format the results of a SELECT statement contained in a PL SQL block REFCURSOR bind variables can also be used to reference PL SQL cursor v
461. uide and Reference DEL DEL The SQL buffer now contains the following lines SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID To delete the third line of the buffer enter DEL 3 The SQL buffer now contains the following lines SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SQL Plus Command Reference 12 49 DESCRIBE DESCRIBE Syntax Terms Usage DESC RIBE schema object db_link Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure schema Represents the schema where the object or permission to describe the object resides If you omit schema and the object is not a public synonym SOL Plus assumes you own object object Represents the table view type procedure function package or synonym you wish to describe db_link Consists of the database link name corresponding to the database where object exists For more information on which privileges allow access to another table in a different schema refer to the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference The description for tables views types and synonyms contains the following information a each column s name whether or not null values are allowed NULL or NOT NULL for each column a datatype of columns for example CHAR DATE LONG LONGRAW NUMBER RAW ROWID VARCHAR2 VARCHAR or XMLType precision of
462. umn display attributes 6 7 12 26 NEW_VALUE clause 6 23 12 30 NEWLINE clause 12 30 NOPRINT clause 6 23 8 8 12 30 NULL clause 12 31 OFF clause 6 8 12 31 OLD_VALUE clause 6 24 12 31 ON clause 6 8 12 31 Index 3 PRINT clause 12 30 resetting a column to default display C 1 resetting to default display 6 7 12 27 C 1 restoring column display attributes 6 8 12 31 storing current date in variable for titles 12 32 suppressing column display attributes 6 8 12 31 TRUNCATED clause 6 6 12 31 WORD_WRAPPED clause 6 6 6 8 12 31 WRAPPED clause 6 6 12 31 column headings aligning 12 30 changing 6 1 12 30 changing character used to underline 12 91 12 160 changing to two or more words 6 2 12 30 displaying on more than one line 6 2 12 30 suppressing printing in a report 12 90 12 121 when truncated 12 28 when truncated for CHAR and LONG columns 6 5 when truncated for DATE columns 6 5 when truncated for NUMBER columns 6 3 column separator 12 89 12 101 C 1 columns assigning aliases 12 27 computing summary lines 6 12 12 34 copying display attributes 6 7 12 14 12 30 copying values between tables B 1 B 3 B 7 displaying values in bottom titles 6 24 12 31 displaying values in top titles 6 23 12 30 formatting CHAR VARCHAR LONG and DATE 12 27 formatting in reports 6 1 12 26 formatting MLSLABEL RAW MLSLABEL ROWLABEL 12 27 formatting NUMBER 6 3 12 28 listing disp
463. urrently identified by johnwpass to johnwnewpass PASSWORD johnw Changing password for johnw New password johnwnewpass Retype new password johnwnewpass Password changed Passwords are not echoed to the screen they are shown here for your convenience SQL Plus Command Reference 12 69 PAUSE PAUSE Syntax Usage Examples PAU SE text where text represents the text you wish to display Displays the specified text then waits for the user to press RETURN Enter PAUSE followed by no text to display two empty lines Because PAUSE always waits for the user s response it is best to use a message that tells the user explicitly to press Return PAUSE reads input from the terminal if a terminal is available even when you have designated the source of the command input as a file See SET PAU SE ON OFF text on page 12 136 for information on pausing between pages of a report To print Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue and to have SOL Plus wait for the user to press Return you might include the following PAUSE command in a script SET PAUSE OFF PAUSE Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue SELECT 12 70 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRINT PRINT Syntax Usage Examples PRINT variable where variable represents names of bind variables whose values you want to display Displays the current values of bind variables For more information on bind var
464. use appearing in the syntax Usage Provides additional information on uses of the command and on how the command works Examples Gives one or more examples of the command You can continue a long SOL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can press Return If you wish however you can enter a semicolon at the end of a SOL Plus command SQL Plus Command Reference 12 1 SQL Plus Command Summary SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description on Runs SQL Plus statements in the specified script The script page 12 5 can be called from the local file system or from a web server on Runs a script This command is similar to the at sign page 12 7 command It is useful for running nested scripts because it has the additional functionality of looking for the specified script in the same path as the calling script slash on Executes the SQL command or PL SQL block page 12 9 ACCEPT on Reads a line of input and stores it in a given substitution page 12 10 variable APPEND on Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the page 12 12 buffer ARCHIVELOG on Displays information about redo log files page 12 13 ATTRIBUTE
465. using the SKIP PAGE clause Example 6 24 Creating a Master Detail Report Suppose you want to create a report that displays two different managers employee numbers each at the top of a separate page and the people reporting to the manager on the same page as the manager s employee number First create a variable MGRVAR to hold the value of the current manager s employee number COLUMN MANAGER_ID NEW_VALUE MGRVAR NOPRINT Because you will only display the managers employee numbers in the title you do not want them to print as part of the detail The NOPRINT clause you entered above tells SQL Plus not to print the column MANAGER _ID Next include a label and the value in your page title enter the proper BREAK command and suppress the bottom title from the last example TTITLE LEFT Manager MGRVAR SKIP 2 BREAK ON MANAGER_ID SKIP PAGE BTITLE OFF Finally enter and run the following query SELECT MANAGER_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE MANAGER_ID IN 101 201 ORDER BY MANAGER_ID DEPARTMENT_ID Formatting SQL Plus Reports 6 23 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Manager 101 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 10 Whalen 4400 40 Mavris 6500 70 Baer 10000 100 Greenberg 12000 110 Higgins 12000 Manager 201 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Fay 6000 6 rows selected If you want to print the value of a column at the bottom of the page you can use the C
466. ut changing Command Prompt properties see Windows Help or click Help in the Command Prompt Properties dialog 1 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 2 Configuring SQL Plus This chapter explains how to configure your SQL Plus command line environment It has the following topics a SQL Plus Environment Variables a SQL Plus Configuration SQL Plus Environment Variables These environment variables specify the location or path of files used by SOL Plus For other environment variables that influence the behavior of SOL Plus see the Oracle Database Administrator s Reference Table 2 1 Parameters or Environment Variables influencing SQL Plus Parameter or Variable Description LD_LIBRARY_PATH Environment variable to specify the path used to search for libraries on UNIX and Linux The environment variable may have a different name on some operating systems such as DYLD_LIBRARY_PATH on Apple Mac OS LIBPATH on IBM AIX 5L and SHLIB_PATH on HP UX Not applicable to Windows operating systems Example SORACLE_HOME 1ib LOCAL Windows environment variable to specify a connection string Performs the same function as TWO_TASK on UNIX NLS_LANG Environment variable to specify globalization behavior Example american_america utf8 ORACLE_HOME Environment variable to specify where SQL Plus is installed It is also used by SQL Plus to specify where message files are located Examples d oracle 10g u01 app oracle p
467. utomatically apply the default filenames of archived redo log files needed during recovery No interaction is needed provided the necessary files are in the expected locations with the expected names The filenames used are derived from the values of the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT OFF the default option requires that you enter the filenames manually or accept the suggested default filename given See RECOVER on page 12 73 for more information about database recovery Example To set the recovery mode to AUTOMATIC enter SET AUTORECOVERY ON RECOVER DATABASE 12 96 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET AUTOT RACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS Displays a report on the execution of successful SQL DML statements such as SELECT INSERT UPDATE DELETE or MERGE The report can include execution statistics and the query execution path SQL Plus report output may differ for DML if dynamic sampling is in effect OFF does not display a trace report ON displays a trace report TRACEONLY displays a trace report but does not print query data if any EXPLAIN shows the query execution path by performing an EXPLAIN PLAN STATISTICS displays SQL statement statistics Information about EXPLAIN PLAN is documented in the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference Using ON or TRACEONLY with no explicit options defaults to EXPLAIN STATISTICS The TR
468. value does not fit within the column width SQL Plus wraps or truncates the character string depending on the setting of SET WRAP A LONG BLOB BFILE CLOB NCLOB or XMLType column s width defaults to the value of SET LONGCHUNKSIZE or SET LONG whichever one is smaller SOL Plus truncates or wraps XMLType columns after 2000 bytes To avoid this you need to set an explicit COLUMN format for the XMLType column A COLUMN format can be up to a maximum of 60000 per row SQL Plus Command Reference 12 27 COLUMN To change the width of a datatype to n use FORMAT An A stands for alphabetic If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SQL Plus truncates the heading DATE Columns The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SOL Plus is derived from the NLS_DATE_FORMAT parameter The NLS_DATE_ FORMAT setting is determined by the NLS territory parameter For example the default format for the NLS territory America is DD Mon RR and the default width is A9 The NLS parameters may be set in your database parameter file in environment variables or an equivalent platform specific mechanism They may also be specified for each session with the ALTER SESSION command For more information about DATE formats and about NLS parameters see the Oracle Database SQL Language Reference You can change the format of any DATE column using the SQL function TO_CHAR in your SQL SELECT statement You may also wish to use an explicit C
469. variable could not be created Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0260 computation for column column_name not uniquely qualified could be for table table_name or table_name computation ignored Cause The specified column was not uniquely qualified in the statement Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0262 no room to allocate CCBDEF pointer array Cause An internal memory error occurred Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0263 no room to allocate COMPUTE block for column_name ON page report column_name Cause Insufficient memory allocated to the COMPUTE block Action Allocate more memory by closing other applications SP2 0265 option_name must be set ON or OFF Cause An invalid SET option name was specified Action Re enter with either ON or OFF as one of the SET options SP2 0266 internal error buffer buffer_size smaller than 1 buffer_limit Cause An internal error occurred Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0267 option_name option parameter_number out of range lower_range through upper_range Cause A value for a parameter was out of the specified range
470. y expressions SET XQUERY ORDERING ORDERED on Controls the ordering of results from an XQuery IUNORDERED DEFAULT page 12 165 SET XQUERY NODE BYVALUE on Sets the preservation mode for notes created or returned BYREFERENCE DEFAULT page 12 166 SET XQUERY CONTEXT tex on Specifies an XQuery context item which can be either a page 12 167 node or a value SQL Plus Command Reference 12 91 SET APPI NFOJ ON OFF text SET APPI NFO ON OFF text Example Sets automatic registering of scripts through the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package This enables the performance and resource usage of each script to be monitored by your DBA The registered name appears in the MODULE column of the V6SESSION and V SQLAREA virtual tables You can also read the registered name using the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO READ_MODULE procedure ON registers scripts invoked by the or START commands OFF disables registering of scripts Instead the current value of text is registered text specifies the text to register when no script is being run or when APPINFO is OFF which is the default The default for text is SQL Plus If you enter multiple words for text you must enclose them in quotes The maximum length for text is limited by the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package The registered name has the format nn xfilename where nn is the depth level of script x is lt when the script name is truncated otherwise it is blank and filename is th
471. y SOL Plus runs your commands System variables control a variety of conditions within SOL Plus including default column widths for your output whether SQL Plus displays the number of records selected by a command and your page size The examples in this guide are based on running SQL Plus with the system variables at their default settings Depending on the settings of your system variables your output may appear slightly different than the output shown in the examples Your settings might differ from the default settings if you have a SOL Plus LOGIN file on your computer See the SET command on page 12 88 for more information on system variables and their default settings See SQL Plus Configuration on page 2 3 and SOLPLUS Program Syntax on page 3 6 for details on the SOL Plus LOGIN file To list the current setting of a system variable enter SHOW followed by the variable name See the SHOW command on page 12 168 for information on other items you can list with SHOW Stopping a Command while it is Running Suppose you have displayed the first page of a 50 page report and decide you do not need to see the rest of it Press Cancel the system s interrupt character which is usually CTRL C SQL Plus stops the display Note Pressing Cancel does not stop the printing of a file that you have sent to a printer with the OUT clause of the SQL Plus SPOOL command You will learn about printing query results in Chapter 6 Formatting SOL
472. y recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0244 Cannot issue a PRINT command within a PAGE break Cause The PRINT command is not allowed within a PAGE break Action Check the syntax of the PRINT command for the correct options SP2 0245 Unable to allocate temporary storage for printing Cause Unable to allocate temporary storage for printing Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0246 Illegal FORMAT string column_ format_name Cause An invalid format was specified for the column Action Specify a valid format for the column SP2 0249 variable_name not a valid variable type for printing Cause The specified variable is not valid for printing Action Check the variable type before re typing the command SP2 0253 data item line_number data_item_name will not fit on line 13 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages Cause The current line size setting is too small to fit the specified data item on a line Action Increase the line size so that the item can be displayed SP2 0258 could not create variable variable_name for column column_name Cause The specified variable could not be created for column internal error or out of memory Action Check memory usage SP2 0259 could not create variable variable_name for COMPUTE INTO Cause The specified
473. ying numbers See the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command on page 12 26 for number format descriptions Enter a number format for format To use the default field width and formatting model specified by SET NUMWIDTH enter SET NUMFORMAT SQL Plus Command Reference 12 133 SET NUM WIDTH 10 n SET NUM WIDTH 10 n Sets the default width for displaying numbers See the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN on page 12 26 command for number format descriptions COLUMN FORMAT settings take precedence over SET NUMFORMAT settings which take precedence over SET NUMWIDTH settings 12 134 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET PAGES IZE 14 n Sets the number of lines on each page of output You can set PAGESIZE to zero to suppress all headings page breaks titles the initial blank line and other formatting information SQL Plus Command Reference 12 135 SET PAU SE ON OFF text SET PAU SE ON OFF text Enables you to control scrolling of your terminal when running reports You need to first SET PAUSE text and then SET PAUSE ON if you want text to appear each time SQL Plus pauses SET PAUSE ON pauses output at the beginning of each PAGESIZE number of lines of report output Press Return to view more output SET PAUSE text specifies the text to be displayed each time SQL Plus pauses Multiple words in text must be enclosed in single quotes You can embed terminal dependent es

SQL*Plus User's Guide and Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents